The Lighting Handbook

Your concise reference book always ready to hand.

Chapter 1

Lighting technology

Chapter 2

Standard values for indoor and outdoor lighting

Based on the new European standards

Chapter 3

Lighting application

Chapter 4

Technology

Chapter 5

Lamps

Chapter 6

Lighting control and control gear

Chapter 7

Emergency lighting

Chapter 8

Technology and tables

Chapter 9

Checklists

Chapter 10

Design tools

Imprint: For questions and suggestions on The Lighting Handbook: Zumtobel Lighting GmbH Schweizer Strasse 30 Postfach 72 6851 Dornbirn, AUSTRIA T +43/(0)5572/390-0 F +43/(0)5572/22 826

4th edition, revised and updated: October 2013

The Lighting Handbook

Chapter 1

Lighting technology

What is light? What is light? What does the human eye see? Light has a triple effect

6 6 6 7

Basic parameters used in lighting 8 Luminous flux 9 Luminous intensity 9 Illuminance 9 Luminance 9 Quality characteristics of lighting 10 The right light traditional and new quality criteria 10 Illuminance definition of terminology 10 Glare glare limitation 12 On quality characteristics 13 UGR limits 13 Illuminance levels on ceilings and walls 15 Spatial illumination 15 Light colour 16 Colour rendering 16 Measuring illuminance Types of lighting Lighting concepts 17 18

20

Humanergy Balance 22 Comprehensive assessment of lighting quality (ELI) 22 Calculation of energy efciency (LENI) 23 Visual performance 24 Vista 24 Visual comfort 24 Vitality 25 Empowerment 25

The Lighting Handbook

What is light?
Light is that part of the electromagnetic spectrum that is perceived by our eyes. The wavelength range is between 380 and 780 nm. By day we see in colour, while at night we can only see in shades of grey.

What is light?

What does the human eye see?

Wavelength [m] Gamma rays X-rays Ultraviolet Light 10 -5 Infrared Microwaves 10 0 Television, VSW Medium wave 10 5 Radio waves

Relative spectral brightness perception 1.0 0.8 0.6 0.4 0.2 350 450 550 650 Wavelength [nm] 750 Night Day

10 -10

Wavelength [nm]

The Lighting Handbook

Light has a triple effect Light for visual functions Illumination of task area in conformity with relevant standards Glare-free and convenient Light creating biological effects Supporting peoples circadian rhythm Stimulating or relaxing Light for emotional perception Lighting enhancing architecture Creating scenes and effects

The Lighting Handbook

Basic parameters used in lighting

Luminous flux Luminous intensity Illuminance Luminance

Luminous ux

E= A

Lumen [lm] Luminous intensity Illuminance E

Candela [lm/sr]=[cd] Luminance L

Lux [lm/m 2]=[lx]

L= A L cos

L=E

[lm/sr*m 2]=[cd/m 2]

= A = A L cos = = = * =

solid angle into which luminous flux is emitted area hit by luminous flux visible areas of light source reflectance of area 3.14 for diffuse surface areas

The Lighting Handbook

Luminous ux The luminous flux describes the quantity of light emitted by a light source. The luminous efficiency is the ratio of the luminous flux to the electrical power consumed (lm/W). It is a measure of a light sources economic efficiency.
Abbreviation: Phi Unit: lmLumen

Luminous intensity The luminous intensity describes the quantity of light that is radiated in a parti cular direction. This is a useful measurement for directive lighting elements such as reflectors. It is represented by the luminous intens ity distribut ion curve (LDC).
Abbreviation: Unit: cd Candela

Illuminance Illuminance describes the quantity of luminous flux falling on a surface. It decreases by the square of the distance (inverse square law). Relevant standards specify the required illuminance (e.g. EN 12464 Lighting of indoor workplaces). Illuminance: E(lx) = luminous flux (lm) area (m 2)

Abbreviation: E Unit: lx Lux

Luminance Luminance is the only basic lighting para meter that is perceived by the eye. It specifies the brightness of a surface and is essentially dependent on its reflectance (finish and colour).
Abbreviation: L Unit: cd/m 2

The Lighting Handbook

10

Quality characteristics of lighting

The right light traditional and new quality criteria Traditional quality criteria Glare limitation Good modelling Correct light colour Avoidance of reflections Harmonious brightness distribution Sufficient illumination level Appropriate colour rendering New quality criteria Changing lighting situations Personal control Energy efficiency Daylight integration Light as an interior design element

Illuminance denition of terminology Illuminance maintenance value m : value below which the illuminance level must not fall in the visual task area. Visual task area: illuminance levels are specified for specific visual tasks and are designed for the area in which these may take place. If the exact location is unknown, the room as a whole or a defined area of the work station is used for specification. The visual task area may be a horizontal, vertical or inclined plane. Area immediately surrounding the visual task area: here illuminance may be one level lower than in the visual task area (e.g. 300lx to 500 lx). Maintenance factor: the initial value multiplied by the maintenance factor gives the illuminance maintenance value. The maintenance factor can be determined individually, and takes the installations reduction in luminous flux caused by soiling and ageing of lamps, luminaires and room surfaces into account. The and and See maintenance schedule (the cleaning maintenance intervals for the lamps installation) must be documented. also Section 9 Checklists.

The Lighting Handbook

11

Relative illuminance (%)

150 125 100 75 50 25 0

initial value

maintenance value

operating time Maintenance value = maintenance factor x initial value

The Lighting Handbook

12

Quality characteristics of lighting

Glare glare limitation Direct glare Reected glare

Cause Luminaires without glare control Very bright surfaces Effect Loss of concentration More frequent mistakes Fatigue Remedy Luminaires with limited luminance levels Blinds on windows

Cause Reflective surfaces Incorrect luminaire arrangement Incorrect workstation position Effect Loss of concentration More frequent mistakes Fatigue Remedy Matching luminaire to workstation (layout) Indirect lighting Matt surfaces

The Lighting Handbook

On quality characteristics
European Standard EN 12464 regulates the lighting of indoor workplaces. In doing so, the unified glare rating method is used to evaluate (psychological) glare. UGR is based on a glare formula. This formula takes account of all the luminaires in the system that contribute to the sensation of glare. UGR levels for luminaires are determined using the tabular method according to CIE117. Zumtobel also specifies the UGR index complied with by all luminaires concerned. Reference values for specific room sizes are given in the data sheets. UGR levels are available for each individual product in the corresponding photometric data sheet. Example: www.zumtobel.com/42178787 (Photometry tab) UGR limits (UGR L) that must not be exceeded: 16 Technical drawing 19 Reading, writing, training, meetings, computer-based work 22 Craft and light industries 25 Heavy industry 28 Railway platforms, foyers The UGR limits are specified in the EN12464 standard for activities and visual tasks (see tables on pages 2939).

13

2 UGR = 8 log 0.25 L Lb P2

(1)

(2)

The UGR method takes account of the brightness of walls and ceilings (1) as well as all luminaires in the system that contribute to the sensation of glare (2). The result is a UGR index.

The Lighting Handbook

14

On quality characteristics

= 45 = 85

UGRL
Quality class

13

16

19

22

25

28

for nominal illuminance (lx) 1000 750 500 2000 1500 1000 750 <300 500 <300 2000 1000 500 <300 2000 1000 500 <300

A 1 2 3

85 75 65 55 45 8 103 2 3 4 5 6 8 104 Luminance L in cd/m2 2 3 4 1

8 6 4 3 2 a hs

The luminance limiting curve method assesses the mean luminance between 45 and 85, and formerly even the glare effect of a luminaire. The new European standard sets UGR = 19 as the maximum permissible value for offices, which is equivalent to the luminance limiting curve for 500 lx in Quality class 1.

UGR values are available for each individual product in the corresponding photometric data sheet. Example: www.zumtobel.com/42178787 (Photometry tab)

The Lighting Handbook

15

Illuminance levels on ceilings and walls Unlit ceilings and walls create an unpleasant room impression. Bright surfaces, however, pleasantly enhance the room climate. The EN 12464 standard therefore requires an illuminance level of at least 30 lx or 50 lx* on ceilings and at least 50 lx or 75 lx* on walls. In fact, these levels ought to be sig nificantly exceeded and should be at least 175lx on walls.
* in offices, class rooms, hospitals

Spatial illumination In order to enhance peoples and objects recognisability in a room, basic requirements are placed on cylindrical illuminance Z and modelling. Hence, Z should be as high as 150 lx in rooms used for communication. Modelling is the ratio between cylindrical and horizontal illuminance at a specific point and should be between 0.3 and 0.6.

The Lighting Handbook

16

On quality characteristics

Light colour The light colour describes the colour appearance of the light.

Colour temperature ww (warm white) nw (intermediate white) tw (cool white) up to 3300 K 33005300 K from 5300 K

Appearance reddish white bluish

Association warm neutral cool

In addition to the colours of the surfaces, it is also the light colour that determines a rooms basic atmosphere!

Colour rendering
Colour rendering index R a Daylight LED Halogen lamp Compact fluorescent lamp Fluorescent lamp High-pressure mercury lamp Metal halide lamp High-pressure sodium lamp 90 8089 7079 6069 4059 2039

= B anned or no longer recommended under EU Regulation 245/2009 (EUP), due to low efficiency and inappropriate colour rendering.

The Lighting Handbook

Measuring illuminance
The Mean illuminance is the arithmetic brilliance level measured with a luxmeter in a defined grid, under precisely specified conditions.

17

Measuring instruments: Description and precision L: maximum precision, tolerance 3 % A: high precision, tolerance 5 % B: average precision; tolerance 10 % (minimum requirement)

Measuring conditions Avoid external light/daylight (measure separately and subtract) Check mains voltage and ambient temperature Use new, burnt-in lamps (discharge lamps 100 h)

Measuring grid and measuring level In order to facilitate inspection of the light ing system, the measuring grid has been specified in the EN 12464 (Lighting of workplaces) and EN 12193 (Lighting of sports facilities) standards. Workplaces = 0.75 m; sports facilities (floor) = 0.03 m C irculation areas, stairs, car parks (floor) = 0.03 m C ylindrical illuminance = 1.2 m M easuring grid: congruent triangles M easuring grid not congruent with luminaire layout grid

Size of measuring eld 1m 5m 10 m 50 m 100 m

Grid element spacing 0.2 m 0.6 m 1m 3m 5m

The Lighting Handbook

18

Types of lighting
Direct lighting Highly directional Strong glare reduction at certain angles Dark ceiling (cave effect) Limited flexibility of work station layout Energy efficiency on the task level

Indirect lighting Diffuse lighting conditions Room gains in height Glare-free Workstations can be positioned anywhere Low energy efficiency

The Lighting Handbook

19

Indirect/direct lighting Pleasant room impression High user acceptance Good contrast ratios F lexible workstation layout (indirect component > 60 %)

Mellow Light Recessed direct/indirect solution Workstations can be positioned anywhere Glare-free Reduced luminance levels at all viewing angles Gives impression of daylight in room

The Lighting Handbook

20

Lighting concepts
The definition of individual visual tasks for the purpose of lighting design in a room, as provided for in the EN 12464 standard, opens up new perspectives for lighting design. The quantity and quality of light can now be specified exactly for any task area. Task area related lighting concepts are a customised tool to fully exploit the additional options provided. At the same time they offer financial scope that can be used to impro v e lighting comfort and enhance the effect of a room. Visual function Task area related lighting provides the right amount of light at the best possible quality for every visual task. Uniformity, control of glare and reflections, good contrast rendition and shadow detail are consistently matched to the respective task. The light ing is adjusted perfectly to the room users needs. Emotional and biological effects Focusing the lighting onto clearly defined areas means saving investment and operating costs. The funds saved can be used to improve comfort and enhance the room atmosphere, for instance by exciting lighting accents, illuminated walls or dynamic lighting scenarios. Optimum energy efciency Large buildings provide huge potential for optimisation of energy consumption. Lighting that is consistently focussed onto individual task areas reduces mean illuminance levels and therefore the average expenditure on energy. Savings can be further increased by using daylight-based lighting management and presence detectors.

The Lighting Handbook

21

Room-related lighting concepts take neither individual task areas nor different visual tasks into account. They are based on the most demanding task performed in the room. The position of the workstation is not defined, the entire room disposes of a uniform lighting quality.

Lighting focussed onto individual visual task areas provides for varied light design in the room. By illuminating walls, for instance, rooms can be designed to be much more open and attractive; dynamic lighting situations can enhance their visual quality.

The Lighting Handbook

22

Humanergy Balance
Human aspects + Energy efciency = Humanergy Balance The Humanergy Balance concept harmo nises both aspects of lighting and makes it possible to assess them: ELI, the lighting quality indicator, takes their physical and psychological effects on people into account; LENI, the energy efficiency indicator, assesses the economic and ecological aspects of light.

Comprehensive assessment of lighting quality (ELI)

The Ergonomic Lighting Indicator (ELI) allows to assess lighting quality in terms of quantity, using five descriptive quality criteria. Checklists are used to record the individual criteria, which are displayed in a Kiviat graph (spider chart). The outermost line in the graph indicates optimum fulfilment of a criterion.

Example of ELI assessment using a spider chart:

Visual performance Sehleistung

1 0

E
Empowerment Individualitt und Flexibilitt

-1 2 1 -2 1 1 2 -2 -1 0 1 2 2 3

5B Vista Erscheinungsbild

60

3 4 5

D
Vitality Vitalitt

C
Visual comfort Sehkomfort

The Lighting Handbook

Calculation of energy efficiency (LENI)

The Lighting Energy Numeric Indicator (LENI) stands for a lighting installations actual energy consumption in kWh per square metre per year. LENI is determined according to the specifications of the EN 15193 standard (assessment of buildings in terms of energy used energy requirements made on lighting).

23

Formula for calculating a lighting installations energy consumption

(Pn x FC) x {(tD x FO x FD) + (tN x FO)} [kWh/(year x m)] A

LENI =

Without elaborating on individual parameters in greater detail, the following relevant factors are identified: T he installed load (P n) M ultiplied by the annual hours of use by day (t D) and at night (t N) Reduced by the factors ( 1) for daylightbased control (F D), presence-based control(F O) and a constant lighting control system (F C) (e.g. maintenance control) The area assessed (A)
Sehleistung

LENI also takes charging energy for emergency lighting and standby energy into account.

The 1 following factors have a positive impact on the reduction of energy 0 consumption 4 B S ensible control of 5 lighting -1 3 4 2 Erscheinungsbild U se of daylight 3 1 -2 2 1 U se1of presence detectors -2 2 I ntelligent consideration of hours of use -1 3 E nergy-efficient lamps 0 N eed-based use of luminaires and lighting 4 1 specified for the respective solutions, 5 application 2 D C C onstant lighting control (maintenance alitt Sehkomfort control)

60

120

0
kWh/m2 a

180

Energy consumption in kWh/(m year)

The Lighting Handbook

24

Calculation of energy efciency (LENI)

Visual performance Lighting in conformity with relevant standards is decisive for ensuring that a visual task can be identified and the related activities can be carried out. Consideration of the traditional quality characteristics of lighting has a major impact on visual task performance. Lighting level Uniformity of illuminance Colour rendering Avoiding hard shadows Contrast rendition Physiological glare

Vista In prestigious buildings, for example, light is not only needed for seeing but also enhances the looks of the interior. Light can provide guidance and make people accept the interior on account of the first visual impression they get. Architectural design Mental design Guidance Hierarchy of perception External appearance Material Luminaires protection type Protection against harmful radiation

Visual comfort Light is not only needed in the visual task area, but also for perception in the room. Rooms should be illuminated with uniform brightness and lighting balance. Balanced brightness distribution Varying luminance levels Plasticity/modelling Discomfort glare Uniform illuminance in area around visual task Sense of security Artificial lighting complemented by daylight Use of flicker-free ballasts

The Lighting Handbook

25

Vitality Light significantly influences peoples activity and sense of wellbeing. Moreover, it has a positive impact on their health and may even enhance or influence biological processes. Sense of well-being Activation and stimulation Circadian rhythm Lighting similar to daylight Avoiding danger spots Avoiding thermal radiation Electromagnetic fields

Empowerment Varying visual requirements, visual tasks or periods of use call for options to individually influence ones lighting situation. Sensors and control systems help users adjust the lighting situation to their personal needs. I ndividual influence by switching and dimming C hoice of lighting scene P resence detection D aylight-based control Choice of lighting scenarios Flexibility for layout changes Privacy

Chapter 9 Checklists describes the use of the charts.

The Lighting Handbook

Chapter 2

27

Standard values for indoor and outdoor lighting

Standard values for lighting of indoor and outdoor workplaces and sports facility lighting Indoor workplaces Traffic zones and general areas inside buildings Industrial activities and crafts Offices Retail premises Places of public assembly Educational premises Health care premises Transportational areas Sports facilities

28 29 29 29 34 34 34 35 35 37 38

Outdoor workplaces 40 General circulation areas 40 Airports 40 Building sites 40 Fuel filling service stations 40 Industrial sites and storage areas 40 Offshore facilities for gas and oil extraction 41 Parking areas 41 Petrochemical and other hazardous industries 41 Power, electricity, gas and heat plants 41 Railway and tramways 42 Saw mills 42

The Lighting Handbook

28

Standard values for lighting of indoor and outdoor workplaces and sports facility lighting
Tables and figures were taken from the European standards. Lighting of indoor workplaces, EN12464-1 (June 2011) Lighting of outdoor workplaces, EN12464-2 (October 2007) Sports facility lighting, EN 12193 (April 2008) The maintenance factors can be deter mined on a case-by-case basis, according to the manufacturers specifications (see also chapter 9 Checklists). Where no individual maintenance data is available, the following values are recommended as reference maintenance factors for modern technology and three-yearly maintenance: 0.67 in a c lean atmosphere, and 0.50 in very dirty environments. EN 12464 specifies that the lighting designer must document the maintenance factor and maintenance schedule. UGR L is the upper limit for direct glare. The UGR value calculated in the design process must lie below this. Uniformity U O is the ratio between the lowest (E min) and the mean illuminance level () in the area to be evaluated. The result is a minimum level. R a is the lower limit for the colour rendering index. The R a of the selected lamp must be equal to or greater than this value.

The following limits have been specified in the tables: Illuminance levels must not fall below the m maintenance v alues in the visual task area. If the precise location is not k nown, the limit should be applied to the whole room or a s pecific working area.
Example for an ofce task area:
task area height = 0.75 m

user oor-area 1.00 m

The Lighting Handbook

29

Type of interior, task or activity

Trafc zones and general areas inside buildings Circulation areas within buildings Rest, sanitation and first aid rooms Control rooms Store rooms, cold stores Storage rack areas Industrial activities and crafts Agriculture Bakeries Cement, cement goods, concrete, bricks Ceramics, tiles, glass, glassware Loading and operating of goods, handling equipment and machinery Buildings for livestock Sick animal pens; calving stalls Feed preparation; dairy; utensil washing Preparation and baking Finishing, glazing, decorating Drying Preparation of materials; work on kilns and mixers General machine work Rough forms Drying Preparation, general machine work Enamelling, rolling, pressing, shaping simple parts, glazing, glass blowing Grinding, engraving, glass polishing, shaping precision parts, manufacture of glass instruments Grinding of optical glass, crystal, hand grinding and engraving 200 25 50 200 25 200 25 300 22 500 22 50 28 200 28 300 25 300 25 50 28 300 25 300 25 750 19 750 16 0.40 80 0.40 40 0.60 80 0.60 60 0.60 80 0.70 80 0.40 20 0.40 40 0.60 80 0.60 80 0.40 20 0.60 80 0.60 80 0.70 80 0.70 80 Circulation areas and corridors Stairs, escalators, moving walkways Elevators, lifts Loading ramps/bays Canteens, pantries Rest rooms Rooms for physical exercise Cloakrooms, washrooms, bathrooms, toilets Sick bays Rooms for medical attention Plant rooms, switch gear rooms Telex, post room, switchboard Store and stockrooms Dispatch packing handling areas Gangways: unmanned Gangways: manned Control stations Front of (high-bay) racks m UGR L 100 28 100 25 100 25 150 25 200 22 100 22 300 22 200 25 500 19 500 16 200 25 500 19 100 25 300 25 20 150 22 150 22 200 U O R a 0.40 40 0.40 40 0.40 40 0.40 40 0.40 80 0.40 80 0.40 80 0.40 80 0.60 80 0.60 90 0.40 60 0.60 80 0.40 60 0.60 60 0.40 40 0.40 60 0.60 80 0.40 60

The Lighting Handbook

30

Indoor workplaces

Type of interior, task or activity

Ceramics, tiles, glass, glassware Chemical, plastics and rubber industry Electrical industry Food stuffs and luxury food industry Precision work e.g. decorative grinding, hand painting Manufacture of synthetic precious stones Remote-operated processing installations Processing installations with limited manual intervention Constantly manned work places in processing installations Precision measuring rooms, laboratories Pharmaceutical production Tyre production Colour inspection Cutting, finishing, inspection Cable and wire manufacture Winding: large coils medium-sized coils small coils Coil impregnating Galvanising m UGR L U O R a 0.70 90 0.70 90 0.40 20 0.40 40 0.60 80 0.60 80 0.60 80 0.60 80 0.70 90 0.70 80 0.60 80 0.60 80 0.60 80 0.70 80 0.60 80 0.60 80 0.60 80 0.60 80 0.70 80 0.70 80 0.70 80

1000 16 1500 16 50 150 28 300 25 500 19 500 22 500 22 1000 16 750 19 300 25 300 25 500 22 750 19 300 25 300 25 25 22 19 16

Assembly work: rough e.g. large transformers 300 medium e.g. switchboards 500 fine e.g. telephones, radios, IT products (computers) 750 p recision e.g. measuring equipment, printed circuit boards 1000 Electronic workshops, testing, adjusting Work places and zones in: breweries, malting floors for washing, barrel filling, cleaning, sieving, peeling cooking in preserve and chocolate factories work places and zones in sugar factories f or drying and fermenting raw tobacco, fermentation Sorting and washing of products, milling, mixing, packing Work places and critical zones in slaughter houses, butchers, dairies mills, on filtering floor in sugar refineries Cutting and sorting of fruit and vegetables Manufacture of delicatessen foods, kitchen work, manufacture of cigars and cigarettes Inspection of glasses and bottles, product control, trimming, sorting, decoration

1500 16

200 25 300 25

0.40 80 0.60 80

500 25 300 25 500 22 500 22

0.60 80 0.60 80 0.60 80 0.60 80

The Lighting Handbook

31

Type of interior, task or activity

Food stuffs and luxury food industry Foundries and metal casting Hairdressers Jewellery manufacturing Laundries and dry cleaning Leather and leather goods Metal working and processing Laboratories Colour inspection Man-size underfloor tunnels, cellars, etc. Platforms Sand preparation Dressing rooms Workstations at cupola furnaces and mixers Casting bays Shake out areas Machine moulding Hand and core moulding Die casting Model building Hairdressing Working with precious stones Manufacture of jewellery Watch making (manual) Watch making (automatic) Goods in, marking and sorting Washing and dry cleaning Ironing, pressing Inspection and repairs Work on vats, barrels, pits Fleshing, skiving, rubbing, tumbling of skins Saddlery work, shoe manufacture: stitching, sewing, polishing, shaping, cutting, punching Sorting Leather dyeing (machine) Quality control Colour inspection Shoe making Glove making Open die forging Drop forging Welding Rough and average machining: tolerances 0.1 mm Precision machining; grinding: tolerances < 0.1 mm Scribing, inspection m UGR L U O R a 0.60 80 0.70 90 0.40 20 0.40 40 0.40 80 0.40 80 0.40 80 0.40 80 0.40 80 0.40 80 0.60 80 0.60 80 0.60 80 0.60 90 0.70 90 0.70 90 0.70 80 0.60 80 0.60 80 0.60 80 0.60 80 0.70 80 0.40 40 0.40 80 0.60 80 0.60 90 0.60 80 0.70 80 0.70 90 0.60 80 0.60 80 0.60 80 0.60 80 0.60 80 0.60 80 0.70 80 0.70 80

500 19 1000 16 50 100 25 200 25 200 25 200 25 200 25 200 25 200 25 300 25 300 25 500 22 500 19 1500 16 1000 16 1500 16 500 19 300 25 300 25 300 25 750 19 200 25 300 25 500 22 500 22 500 22 1000 19 1000 16 500 22 500 22 200 25 300 25 300 25 300 22 500 19 750 19

The Lighting Handbook

32

Indoor workplaces

Type of interior, task or activity

Metal working and processing Paper and paper goods Power stations Printers Rolling mills, iron and steel works Wire and pipe drawing shops; cold forming Plate machining: thickness 5 mm Sheet metalwork: thickness < 5 mm Tool making; cutting equipment manufacture Assembly: rough medium fine precision Galvanising Surface preparation and painting Tool, template and jig making, precision mechanics, micromechanics Edge runners, pulp mills Paper manufacture and processing, paper and corrugating machines, cardboard manufacture Standard bookbinding work, e.g. folding, sorting, glueing, cutting, embossing, sewing Fuel supply plants Boiler houses Machine halls Side rooms, e.g. pump rooms, condenser rooms etc.; switchboards (inside buildings) Control rooms Cutting, gilding, embossing, block engraving, work on stones and platens, printing machines, matrix making Paper sorting and hand printing Type setting, retouching, lithography Colour inspection in multicoloured printing Steel and copper engraving Production plants without manual operation Production plants with occasional manual operation Production plants with continuous manual operation Slab storage facilities Furnaces Mill trains; coilers; shear lines Control platforms; control panels Test, measurement and inspection Underfloor man-sized tunnels; belt sections; cellars etc. m UGR L U O R a 0.60 80 0.60 80 0.60 80 0.70 80 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.70 80 80 80 80

300 25 200 25 300 22 750 19 200 300 500 750 25 25 22 19

300 25 750 25 1000 19 200 25 300 25 500 22 50 100 28 200 25 200 25 500 16

0.60 80 0.70 80 0.70 80 0.40 80 0.60 80 0.60 80 0.40 20 0.40 40 0.40 80 0.40 60 0.70 80

500 19 500 19 1000 19 1500 16 2000 16 50 150 28 200 25 50 200 25 300 25 300 22 500 22 50

0.60 80 0.60 80 0.70 80 0.70 90 0.70 80 0.40 20 0.40 40 0.60 80 0.40 20 0.40 20 0.60 40 0.60 80 0.60 80 0.40 20

The Lighting Handbook

33

Type of interior, task or activity

Textile manufacture and processing Vehicle construction and repair Wood working and processing Work places and zones in baths, bale opening Carding, washing, ironing, devilling machine work, drawing, combing, sizing, card cutting, pre-spinning, jute and hemp spinning Spinning, plying, reeling, winding Warping, weaving, braiding, knitting Sewing, fine knitting, taking up stitches Manual design, drawing patterns Finishing, dyeing Drying room Automatic fabric printing Burling, picking, trimming Colour inspection; fabric control Invisible mending Hat manufacturing Body work and assembly Painting, spraying chamber, polishing chamber Painting: touch-up, inspection Upholstery manufacture (manned) Final inspection General vehicle servicing, repair and inspection Automatic processing e.g. drying, plywood manufacturing Steam pits Saw frames Work at joiners bench, glueing, assembly Polishing, painting, fancy joinery Work on wood working machines e.g. turning, fluting, dressing, rebating, grooving, cutting, sawing, sinking Selection of veneer woods Marquetry, inlay work Quality control, inspection m UGR L U O R a 0.60 60

200 25

300 22 500 22 500 22 750 22 750 22 500 22 100 28 500 25 1000 19 1000 16 1500 19 500 22 500 22 750 22 1000 19 1000 19 1000 19 300 22 50 28 150 28 300 25 300 25 750 22

0.60 80 0.60 80 0.60 80 0.70 80 0.70 90 0.60 80 0.40 60 0.60 80 0.70 80 0.70 90 0.70 90 0.60 80 0.60 80 0.70 80 0.70 90 0.70 80 0.70 80 0.60 80 0.40 40 0.40 40 0.60 60 0.60 80 0.70 80

500 19 750 22 750 22 1000 19

0.60 80 0.70 90 0.70 90 0.70 90

The Lighting Handbook

34

Indoor workplaces

Type of interior, task or activity

Ofces Filing, copying, etc. Writing, typing, reading, data processing Technical drawing CAD work stations Conference and meeting rooms Reception desks Archives m UGR L 300 19 500 19 750 16 500 19 500 19 300 22 200 25 U O R a 0.40 80 0.60 80 0.70 80 0.60 80 0.60 80 0.60 80 0.40 80

Retail premises Sales areas Till areas Wrapper tables 300 22 500 19 500 19 0.40 80 0.60 80 0.60 80

Places of public assembly General areas Restaurants and hotels Theatres, concert halls, cinemas Trade fairs, exhibition halls Museums Libraries Public car parks (indoor) Entrance halls Cloakrooms Lounges Ticket offices Reception/cashier desks, porters desks Kitchens Restaurant, dining room, function room Self-service restaurants Buffets Conference rooms Corridors Practice rooms Dressing rooms Seating areas maintenance, cleaning Stage areas construction General lighting 100 22 200 25 200 22 300 22 300 22 500 22 200 22 300 22 500 19 100 25 300 22 300 22 200 22 300 25 300 22 0.40 80 0.40 80 0.40 80 0.60 80 0.60 80 0.60 80 80 0.40 80 0.60 80 0.60 80 0.40 80 0.60 80 0.60 90 0.50 80 0.40 80 0.40 80

Exhibits, insensitive to light Light-sensitive exhibits Bookshelves Reading areas Counters In/out ramps (during the day) In/out ramps (at night) Traffic lanes Parking areas Ticket offices

according to requirements 0.40 80 0.60 80 0.60 80 0.40 40 0.40 40 0.40 40 0.40 40 0.60 80

200 19 500 19 500 19 300 25 75 25 75 25 75 300 19

The Lighting Handbook

35

Type of interior, task or activity

Educational premises Nursery school, play school Educational buildings Play rooms Nurseries Handicraft rooms Classrooms, tutorial rooms Classrooms for evening classes and adults education Lecture halls Black, green wallboards and whiteboards Demonstration tables Art rooms Art rooms in art schools Technical drawing rooms Practical rooms and laboratories Handicraft rooms Teaching workshops Music practice rooms Computer practice rooms (menu driven) Language laboratories Preparation rooms and workshops Entrance halls Circulation areas, corridors Stairs Student common rooms and assembly halls Teachers rooms Library: bookshelves Library: reading areas Stock rooms for teaching materials Sports halls, gymnasiums, swimming pools (general use) School canteens Kitchens m UGR L 300 22 300 22 300 19 300 19 500 19 500 19 500 19 500 19 500 19 750 19 750 16 500 19 500 19 500 19 300 19 300 19 300 19 500 22 200 22 100 25 150 25 200 22 300 19 200 19 500 19 100 25 300 22 200 22 500 22 U O R a 0.40 80 0.40 80 0.60 80 0.60 80 0.60 80 0.60 80 0.70 80 0.70 80 0.60 80 0.70 90 0.70 80 0.60 80 0.60 80 0.60 80 0.60 80 0.60 80 0.60 80 0.60 80 0.40 80 0.40 80 0.40 80 0.40 80 0.60 80 0.60 80 0.60 80 0.40 80 0.60 80 0.40 80 0.60 80

Health care premises Rooms for general use Waiting rooms Corridors: during the day Corridors: cleaning Corridors: during the night Multiple-use corridors Day rooms 200 22 100 22 100 22 50 22 200 22 200 22 0.40 80 0.40 80 0.40 80 0.40 80 0.60 80 0.60 80

The Lighting Handbook

36

Indoor workplaces

Type of interior, task or activity

Rooms for general use Staff rooms Wards, maternity wards Examination rooms (general) Eye examination rooms Ear examination rooms Scanner rooms Delivery rooms Treatment rooms (general) Operating areas Intensive care units Dentists Elevators, lifts for passengers and visitors Service lifts Staff offices Staff rooms General lighting Reading lighting Simple examinations Examination and treatment Night lighting, observation lighting Bathrooms and toilets for patients General lighting Examination and treatment General lighting Examination of the outer eye Reading and colour vision tests with vision charts General lighting Ear examination General lighting Scanners with image enhancers and television systems General lighting Examination and treatment Dialysis Dermatology Endoscopy rooms Plaster rooms Medical baths Massage and radiotherapy Pre-op and recovery rooms Operating theatres m UGR L U O R a 0.60 80 0.60 80 0.60 80 0.60 80 0.40 80 0.70 80 0.60 80 0.70 90 80 0.40 80 0.60 90 0.70 90 0.60 90 90 0.70 90 0.60 90 90 0.60 80 80 0.60 80 0.70 80 0.60 80 0.60 90 0.60 80 0.60 80 0.60 80 0.60 80 0.60 90 0.60 90 0.60 90 0.60 90 0.70 90 90 0.60 90 0.70 90

100 22 200 22 500 19 300 19 100 19 300 19 300 19 1000 19 5 200 22 500 19 1000 19 500 19 1000 500 16 500 19 1000 300 19 50 19 300 19 1000 19 500 19 500 19 300 19 500 19 300 19 300 19 500 19 1000 19

Operating cavity General lighting Simple examinations Examination and treatment Night watch General lighting At the patient Operating cavity White teeth matching 100 19 300 19 1000 19 20 19 500 19 1000

The Lighting Handbook

37

Type of interior, task or activity

Laboratories and pharmacies Decontamination rooms Autopsy rooms and mortuaries General lighting Colour inspection Sterilisation rooms Disinfection rooms General lighting Autopsy tables and dissecting tables m UGR L U O R a 0.60 80 0.70 90 0.60 80 0.60 80 0.60 90 90

500 19 1000 19 300 22 300 22 500 19 5000

Transportational areas Airports Railway installations Arrival and departure halls, baggage claim areas Connecting areas, escalators, travelators Information desks, check-in desks Customs and passport control desks Waiting areas Luggage store rooms Security check areas Air traffic control towers Testing and repair hangars Engine test areas Measuring areas in hangars Covered platforms and passenger subways (underpasses) Fully enclosed platforms, large number of persons Pedestrian underpasses, small number of persons Pedestrian underpasses, large number of persons Ticket halls and concourses Ticket and luggage offices and counters Waiting rooms Entrance halls, station halls Signal boxes, technical rooms Access tunnels Maintenance and repair bays 200 22 150 22 500 19 500 19 200 22 200 25 300 19 500 16 500 22 500 22 500 22 100 200 50 28 100 28 200 28 300 19 200 22 200 200 28 50 300 22 0.40 80 0.40 80 0.70 80 0.70 80 0.40 80 0.40 80 0.60 80 0.60 80 0.60 80 0.60 80 0.60 80 0.40 40 0.50 60 0.50 40 0.50 40 0.50 40 0.50 80 0.40 80 0.40 80 0.40 60 0.40 20 0.50 60

The Lighting Handbook

38

Indoor workplaces

Type of interior, task or activity

Sports facilities The following details apply to competition class I (lower requirements apply to classes II and III) m and R a data according to European Standard EN 12193 General school sports data from EN 12464 An R a level of 80 should be preferred For lighting for training purposes, usually an UGR L level of 22 should be observed m Sports facilities Aerobics 500 Archery 200 Ra 60 60 60 60 60 80 60 60 60 60 80 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60

Athletics (all disciplines) 500 Badminton 750 Basketball 750 Billiards 750

Boccia 300 Boules 300 Bowling Bowls Boxing (competition/training) 200 500

2000/300 500 750 1500 300/200 750 500 200 750 750 750 750 750 500

Climbing Cricket Cricket nets Curling (target/playing areas)

Cycling Dancing (fitness) Darts Fencing Figure skating Fistball Floorball Football (indoor) Gymnastics

Gymnastics (floor exercises, apparatus work) 500 Handball Hockey Ice hockey 750 750 750

Ice speed skating (400 m and skating rink) 500 Judo Kendo/Karate Netball Ninepins 750 750 750 200

The Lighting Handbook

39

Type of interior, task or activity

m Sports facilities Petanque 300 Racketball Riding Roller skating Shooting School sports 750 500 500 200 750 Ra 60 60 60 60 60 60 80 80 60 60 80 60 60 60 60 60

School sports (general use) 300 Snooker Squash Swimming 750 750 500

Swimming (school level) 300 Table tennis Tennis Volleyball 750 750 750

Weight lifting 750 Wrestling 750

The Lighting Handbook

40

Outdoor workplaces

Type of outdoor workplace, task or activity

General circulation areas at outdoor workplaces Airports Building sites Fuel lling stations Industrial sites and storage areas m Ra 20 20 20 20

Walkways exclusively for pedestrians 5 Traffic areas for slowly moving vehicles max. (10 km/h), e.g. bicycles, trucks and excavators 10 Regular vehicle traffic (max. 40 km/h) 20 Pedestrian passages, vehicle turning, loading and unloading points 50 Hangar aprons 20 Terminal aprons 30 Loading areas 50 Fuel depots 50 Aircraft maintenance stands 200 Clearance, excavation and loading 20 Construction areas, drain pipes mounting, transport, auxiliary and storage tasks 50 Framework element mounting, light reinforcement work, wooden mould and framework mounting, electric piping and cabling 100 Element jointing, demanding electrical, machine and pipe mountings 200 Vehicle parking and storage areas 5 Entry and exit driveways: dark environment (i.e. rural areas and suburbs) 20 Entry and exit driveways: light environment (i.e. cities) 50 Air pressure and water checking points and other service areas 150 Meter reading areas 150 Short term handling of large units and raw materials, loading and unloading of solid bulk goods 20 Continuous handling of large units and raw materials, loading and unloading of freight, lifting and descending location for cranes, open loading platforms 50 Reading of addresses, covered loading platforms, use of tools, ordinary reinforcement and casting tasks in concrete plants 100 Demanding electrical, machine and piping installations, inspection 200

20 40 40 40 60

20 20

40 40

20 20 20 20 20

20

20 20 60

The Lighting Handbook

41

Type of outdoor workplace, task or activity

Offshore facilities for gas and oil extraction Parking areas Light traffic, e.g. parking areas of shops, terraced and apartment houses; cycle parks 5 Medium trafc, e.g. parking areas of department stores, ofce buildings, plants, sports and multipurpose building complexes 10 Heavy traffic, e.g. parking areas of schools, churches, major shopping centres, major sports and multipurpose building complexes 20 20 m Ra 20 20 20 20 40 40 40 40 20 20 40 40 40 40 40

Sea surface below the platform 30 Ladders, stairs, walkways 100 Boat landing areas, transport areas 100 Helicopter landing areas 100 Drill towers 100 Processing areas 100 Piping depot/deck 150 Test stations, shakers, drillheads 200 Pump areas 200 Lifeboat areas 200 Drill floors, drill surfaces, platforms at drill tower 300 Sludge chambers, sampling 300 Crude oil pumps 300 Facility areas 300 Rotary tables 500

20

20

Petrochemical and other hazardous industries Power, electricity, gas and heat plants Pedestrian movements within electrically safe areas 5 Handling of servicing tools, coal 20 Overall inspection 50 General servicing work and reading of instruments 100 Wind tunnels: servicing and maintenance 100 Repair of electric devices 200 20 20 20 40 40 60 Handling of servicing tools, utilisation of manually regulated valves, starting and stopping motors, lighting of burners 20 Filling and emptying of container trucks and wagons with risk free substances, inspection of leakage, piping and packing 50 Filling and emptying of container trucks and wagons with dangerous substances, replacements of pump packing, general service work, reading of instruments 100 Fuel loading and unloading sites 100 Repair of machines and electric devices 200 20 20

40 20 60

The Lighting Handbook

42

Outdoor workplaces

Type of outdoor workplace, task or activity

Railways and tramways Railway areas including light railways, tramways, monorails, miniature rails, metro, etc. Saw mills Timber handling on land and in water, sawdust and chip conveyors 20 Sorting of timber on land or in water, timber unloading points and sawn timber loading points, mechanical lifting to timber conveyor, stacking 50 Reading of addresses and markings of sawn timber 100 Grading and packaging 200 Feeding into stripping and chopping machines 300 20 m Ra

Tracks in passenger station areas, including stabling 10 Railway yards: flat marshalling, retarder and classification yards 10 Hump areas 10 Freight track, short duration operations 10 Open platforms, rural and local trains, small number of passengers 15 Walkways 20 Level crossings 20 Open platforms, suburban and regional trains with large number of passengers or inter-city services with small number of passengers 20 Freight track, continuous operation 20 Open platforms in freight areas 20 Servicing trains and locomotives 20 Railway yards handling areas 30 Coupling areas 30 Stairs, small and medium-size stations 50 Open platforms, inter-city services 50 Covered platforms, suburban or regional trains or inter-city services with small number of passengers 50 Covered platforms in freight areas, short duration operations 50 Covered platforms, inter-city services 100 Stairs, large stations 100 Covered platforms in freight areas, continuous operation 100 Inspection pit 100

20 20 20 20 20 20 20

20 20 20 40 20 20 40 20 40 20 40 40 40 40

20 40 40 40

The Lighting Handbook

43

Extracts from: NORM [Austrian standard] EN 12464-1 Light and lighting Lighting of workplaces Part 1: indoor workplaces (2011-07-01) NORM EN 12464 Part -2, Light and lighting Lighting of workplaces Part 2: outdoor workplaces (2007-10-01) NORM EN 1246412193 Light and lighting Sports facility lighting (2008-04-01) published with permission by the Austrian Standards Institute, A-1020 Vienna, Heinestrasse 38 For ordering standards and products or research on the subject, please go to www.on-norm.at

The Lighting Handbook

Chapter 3

Lighting application

What is lighting quality? Three levels of lighting quality Application areas Light for Offices and Communication Light for Education and Science Light for Presentation and Retail Light for Hotel and Wellness Light for Art and Culture Light for Health and Care Light for Industry and Engineering Light for Faades and Architecture

47 47 48 48 50 52 54 56 58 60 62

The Lighting Handbook

What is lighting quality?

The ELI Ergonomic Lighting Indicator considers as many as five criteria of ergonomic quality. Individual criteria are evaluated on the basis of specific checklists. The more individual aspects are fulfilled, the higher the rating. See chapter 9 Checklists.

47

Three levels of lighting quality

Visual requirements Adequate visibility of details (visual acuity, contrast) Adequate visibility of shapes (three-dimensional) Adequate visibility of colours and colour variations Promptness of adequate visibility Adequate visibility over time/visual performance Guidance of attention Order, differentiability Physical safety Object safety Emotional requirements Spatial orientation Keeping track of time Orientation about what is happening Privacy, communication Personal territory Self-representation, external representation Justice Sense of security Self check Mental stimulation Mental recovery Familiarity, surprise (no monotony) Structuring space according to shapes Structuring space according to rhythms (symmetries) Structuring space according to modules Enhancing the architectures character and mood Emphasising special architectural (design) features Biological requirements Physical stimulation Physical recovery Circadian rhythms Protection from radiation Physiological effect

The Lighting Handbook

48

Application areas
Application area Light for Ofces and Communication

Working and feeling at ease Making work easier

Examples Complying with standards (adjusting illuminance levels to tasks) Avoiding glare by light Lighting design in the overall architectural context Taking CI into account Adjusting biologically effective light to the circadian day/night rhythm Daylight as preferred source of light Artificial lighting using Tunable White Staff cost analysis in comparison with investment and operating costs Result: lighting solutions must be subject to peoples demands Light enhances peoples performance and creativity Structuring and orientation in space through lighting design for vertical surfaces, transit areas, pools of light etc. Arranging groups using lighting management Adjustment through lighting management Taking into account changing work media (such as tablets): no high luminance levels at steep angles Keeping demographic trends in mind Higher illuminance levels at old age Lighting management for individual control options Glare limitation at all angles for flexible utilisation of space Lighting management: free-standing luminaire concepts and re-grouping of ceiling solutions

Creating an identity Promoting health

Employees as a cost factor

Technology and exibility Creating different zones

Bolstering activity

Preserving individuality

Being flexible

The Lighting Handbook

49

Effectiveness and efciency Sustainability

Examples Increases the value of buildings Lighting management: daylight-based control or presence-based control Efficient luminaires, lighting concepts All visual tasks and zones of the building Integrating the lighting management system into higher-level building services Short payback periods of new technologies Wireless control technology Perfect integration into lighting management system Unaffected by frequent switching and dimming Life-cycle assessment shows benefits: reduced energy consumption, long service life, low maintenance effort

Integral approach

Rational refurbishment Added value thanks to LEDs

Lighting management as customer benet Lighting demands change with the users age and specific visual tasks. A lighting management system meets all challenges to optimum extent. Concentrated work and increasing communication place changing demands on the lighting situation. Additional, biologically effective components of artificial lighting that complement daylight at appropriate times of day work in harmony with our internal body clock and are invigorating. Using time-based management, daylightbased control and presence-based control, the system achieves a high level of automation. This is associated with maximum energy savings and flexibility for adjustments. Where staff members can individually control the lighting situation in their work environment, the technology is accepted most easily. This requires sufficient control options and small groups of luminaires with appropriately allocated responsibilities.

The Lighting Handbook

50

Application areas

Application area Light for Education and Science

Environmental aspects Use of daylight Efficient luminaires and intelligent control Ergonomic compatibility Performance and concentration

Examples Energy efficiency through lighting management LED solutions are highly efficient Frequent dimming and switching does not affect the LEDs service life Standards cover basic visual requirements such as glare or illuminance Emotional components enhance concentration Open room ambience thanks to brightening up of ceiling and walls Feeling at ease enhances peoples performance Light stabilises the inner biological clock, measurably stimulates hormonal processes Medical evidence shows that light enhances cognitive performance Blackboard lighting: high visual demands because of accommodation required from the eye for close and distant vision when reading and copying from the blackboard Teamwork

Feeling at ease and health

Adjusting light to activities and visual tasks

The Lighting Handbook

51

New teaching methods

Examples Flexible seating arrangement More teamwork and communication Face recognition requires well-balanced direct/indirect

Mobility and communication

components
Quickly retrievable, flexible luminaire grouping and

scenes
Presence-based control in case of extensive periods

of use (such as corridor zones at universities in the evening) New learning methods and teaching materials
New technologies Increasingly screen-based work, also on tablets:

glare control at flat and steep angles

Lighting management: flexible use of rooms,

Variety and flexibility

dynamically changing light (daylight and artificial lighting) creates variety Lighting scenes at the touch of a button
Clearly laid out control units with selection of scenes

Lighting management as customer benet New teaching methods and media technologies require flexible room usage and frequent adjustment of lighting situations. These can be implemented by the press of a button using intuiti v e control units with predefined scenes for working in small groups or teacher-centred teaching, a reduced level for data projector presentations or higher vertical illuminance levels for blackboard and flip charts. Daylight is stimulating and enhances peoples sense of well-being and performance. Using daylight-based control and presencebased control, maximum energy savings are achieved without any compromises in terms of lighting quality. Blinds control enhances the contrasts for presentation media and additionally increases room comfort, since glare and thermal output are minimis e d.

The Lighting Handbook

52

Application areas

Application area Light for Presentation and Retail

Setting the scene Stimulating desires

Examples Guiding perception: direction of light, luminance levels and light colours rich in contrast matched to the goods on display Emotional lighting design through illumination of faades and shop windows High-precision accent lighting Excellent colour rendering: brilliance and authenticity Long-distance effect, orientation and enhanced room depth perception thanks to illuminated peripheral areas, vertical surfaces and shelf rear walls Presenting objects in greater detail Miniaturised lighting systems focus peoples attention on the goods displayed Diffuse light to lend sleek lines to highly reflective objects Presenting objects authentically with a three-dimensional effect: interplay of diffuse and directed light LED solutions with high colour rendering and matching colour temperature Gentle illumination of fresh goods to boost sales LED incorporating revolutionary Tunable Food and Tunable White technology Choice of various colour temperatures in one luminaire Formerly: filters and lamps had to be changed LED is virtually free from IR and UV radiation No filters or protective devices

Brand communication Authenticity Creating accents Directing the gaze

Reducing lighting distances

Modelling objects

Naturalness Emphasising freshness

Adjusting colour temperature

Gentle illumination

The Lighting Handbook

53

Sustainability Increasing efficiency

Examples Linear LED solutions instead of fluorescent lamps Vertical luminance levels prevail over horizontal lighting design

Reducing energy consumption LED combined with lighting management Monitoring ancillary areas via presence detectors Replacing the lighting system Comparing operating costs against investment costs Increased lighting quality with higher efficiency possible (LED technology)

Lighting management as customer benet Lighting scenes are adjusted to various activi t ies using intuitive control points from task lighting at the POS terminals to gentle colour changes required for the lounge. Thanks to increasing energy awareness, more and more dimmable luminaires are used in retail spaces. Positive material effects of goods and architecture are leveraged by possible changes in colour temperature combined with luminance levels (Tunable White). Skilfully controlled lighting solutions are characterised by high levels of comfort and flexibility as well as low maintenance effort. For example, perfect adjustment of the light spectrum to the illuminated object is achieved without complicated replacement of filters. Using adequate control points, timelines or daylight-based control, ambient lighting is gently modified. The use of daylight not only helps to save energy, but makes room zones appear especially attract ive. Highly emotional illumination of goods and surprise effects can be achieved using static and dynamic lighting scenes.

The Lighting Handbook

54

Application areas

Application area Light for Hotels and Wellness

New technologies Networking

Examples Lighting management system Lighting scenes: multi-functional use of seminar rooms and conference halls Glare control at steep angles for smartphones and tablets Illumination of faade and entrance area Choice of luminaires reflecting the hotels design language New designs thanks to LED technology Specially designed control units with intuitive lighting scenes and pictographs for hotels Extensive product portfolio Taking regional influences into account Global planning Transnational distribution network Regional adaptation Knowledge of national regulations

Flexible use of screens Exacting design aspirations Enhancing architecture Decorative luminaires Attractive control units Globalisation Variety of options Service on site and multi-cultural competence

The Lighting Handbook

55

Responsibility Sustainable products Efficient luminaires and opti mised lighting management Safety and security Spa and wellness Enhancing health and well-being, relaxation

Examples Environmentally certified luminaires Sufficient control options and central off of the entire unit next to the room door Integration of emergency lighting Orientation in corridors and car parks

Gentle and dynamic changes in light colour Creating specific pools of light and dark zones in the spa area

Lighting management as customer benet When it comes to hotel rooms, the guests individual wishes have top priority. In terms of lighting, intuitive control units allow to create personal settings: using blinds control, artificial lighting and daylight can be conveniently adjusted to a variety of room requirements and visual demands depending on whether the guest wants to watch TV, put on make-up or read. Dynamic lighting scenes, flexibly defined via timelines or controlled according to weather situation and time of day, have an influence on the guests well-being mainly in restaurants and wellness areas. Moreover, they optimise the adaptation conditions for the eye when entering the building, depending on the lighting situation outdoors, which provides security and orientation. Predefined lighting scenes in conference areas allow for multiple changes in media, providing the right light at the press of a button. Integration of emergency lighting into the higher-level lighting management system allows central monitoring of the system.

The Lighting Handbook

56

Application areas

Application area Light for Art and Culture

Use of daylight Enhancing architecture and promoting a sense of well-being Lighting management for energy efficiency and gentle illumination of objects Creating scenes Diffuse low-shadow ambient lighting Adjusting illuminance and colour temperatures Creating accents Directing peoples gaze and creating exciting situations

Examples Lighting management: utilising daylight to optimum effect Presence-based control around the exhibits Reduced radiation time

Linear luminaires with gently illuminating LEDs Tunable White technology enhances the quality of perception and is gentle on the exhibits Selecting appropriate spectrum of light and optimum light distribution

High-precision accent lighting LED spotlights and modelling Fibre-glass products Illumination that is gentle on exhibits Setting the lighting stage Lighting art LED combined with lighting management LED luminaires with marginal UV and IR radiation The more reddish the LEDs colour temperature (the lower the Kelvin values), the lower the burden on the exhibits

The Lighting Handbook

57

Lighting management as customer benet A lighting management system makes sure that exhibits which are sensitive to light are exposed only to the amount of light that is absolutely necessary: exactly that luminance level or light colour (Tunable White) that are required for good perception. Thanks to presence-based control, illumination is restrict e d to the time when visitors are present. Times for switching on and off can be specified for particular times of day. Blinds management and daylight sensors allow just the amount of daylight that is absolutely necessary as a balance between architecture, human well-being, gentle illumination of exhi b its and energy costs. Unobtrusively and with central monitoring, the emergency lighting system is integrated into the lighting management system, ensuring reliable visual conditions in an emergency.

The Lighting Handbook

58

Application areas

Application area Light for Health and Care

Health and activity Quality for patients and persons in need of care Feeling at ease and supporting the inner clock

Examples Taking into account dementia patients Avoiding mirror effects and reflections (delusions) In many healthcare facilities, no daylight an important means of stabilising the inner clock is available Little time is spent outdoors Compensation by artificial lighting: well-adjusted changes in light colours and illuminance levels High intensity in pools of light Bedside lighting Age-appropriate lighting scene concept in line with healthcare requirements Emergency lighting Providing orientation Avoiding heavy shadows and dark zones Pleasant corridor design using indirect light components on ceiling and walls Increase in illuminance levels: at the press of a button at the patients bedside or via additional light components High colour rendering index Individual settings, intuitive operation Special illumination to meet high demands (operating theatres and intensive-care units) Stimulation of night shift workers through high illuminance levels Modular lighting and medical supply units adapt flexibly to suit the way a room is being used

Enhancing comfort and providing security Reliability and functionality Visual comfort and security for patients and residents

Supporting diagnosis and treatment Optimising doctors and nurses working conditions

Flexibility

The Lighting Handbook

59

Eco-friendly and economically efcient Added value for operators and investors Optimising energy consumption Enhancing the health and care facilitys image Integral approach

Examples Daylight-based control and lighting scenes that can be called up individually enhance comfort and increase efficienc y Efficient luminaires and light sources Corridor lighting with presence-based control and LED unaffected by frequent switching and dimming High-quality appearance of faade, parking spaces, entrance and waiting areas Central lighting control system with monitoring, including the emergency lighting system

Lighting management as customer benet Successful lighting solutions in residential care homes and hospitals offer intuitive age-appropriate control options that are also suitable for use by disabled persons. Using a lighting management system, a variety of lighting scenes required for residential and nursing purposes can be called up at the press of a button. Due to age-related changes in the eye, the demand for light increases with age. For more sophisticated visual tasks, the artificial lighting can be individually adjusted by nursing staff and patients. As a result of process e s of degradation in the eye, biologically highly effective bluish components are filtered out. The inner clock and the associated sleeping and resting patterns must therefore be supported by spending time outdoors or by biologically effective artificial lighting with high intensity levels or with a large bluish component at defined times of the day. Timelines defined within the scope of the lighting management system make the interplay of artificial lighting and daylight perfect at any time of day.

The Lighting Handbook

60

Application areas

Application area Light for Industry and Engineering

Sustainability

Examples

Reducing energy consumption Up to 24 working hours, often with little daylight, require highly efficient technologies and CO 2 emissions Primarily use of daylight, also to enhance well-being Presence-based control of ancillary areas Positioning companies as environmentally committed by obtaining certificates Facilitating maintenance and replacing the lighting system Large-scale room dimensions result in high maintenance effort Reduced effort thanks to durable and efficient LED solutions and lighting management systems Taking into account not only the workstation, but also well-balanced luminance distribution in the room Focussing the lighting design on special requirements for individual task areas Individual lighting control enhances well-being Variable production facilities require flexibility, quick adaptation of luminaires or luminaire groups Low-maintenance luminaires that are easy to clean offer few surfaces on which dirt can settle Materials resistant to cleaning agents and disinfectants Explosion-proof luminaires Sense of security: vertical luminance levels for opening up spaces Special emphasis on dangerous zones

Productivity Empowerment and increased performance

Cleanliness and security

The Lighting Handbook

61

Functionality Variety of options for rooms with high ceilings

Examples Uniform general lighting using linear fluorescent lamps or LEDs for typical room heights Illumination of high bays: pinpointed high-pressure discharge lamps require compromises because of poor integration into the lighting management system (ignition and dimming behaviour) Reduced uniformity More shadows Lighting solution on a one-stop basis, from the car park to workstations to storage facilities More open architecture for creating brand identity Clear arrangement of luminaires, in compliance with architectural zones, important for night-time effect Faade lighting

Integral design using lighting management throughout the whole building Transparency and image

Lighting management as customer benet Especially in the industrial sector, the energysaving potential is very high, for because of shift and night-time working as well as in the absence of daylight, the lighting system is used extensively. Therefore investing in a lighting control system will pay for itself on a very short time-scale. Lighting management perfectly complies with the required flexibility in production facili t ies. As maintenance factors must be taken into account, the design of new systems requires over-dimensioning. Functions such as daylight-based control or Maintenance Control counteract this additio n al energy consumption by continuously adjusting the lamp output depending on the daylight situation or service life. Integral lighting solutions are created by close interlacing of the control system and the luminaire portfolio, as perfectly implemented in the TECTON continuous-row lighting system. Maintenance and monitoring are optimised in combination with integration of the emergency lighting system. In addition, interfaces with other building services ensure convenient and cost-efficient operation of buildings.

The Lighting Handbook

62

Application areas

Application area Light for Faades and Architecture

Faade lighting as a marketing factor Setting the stage for cities

Examples Variety of LED luminaires: different night-time appearance Accent lighting in compliance with master plans to enhance public spaces Durable, highly efficient LED solutions Promotion of corporate identity through night-time illumination of buildings has an influence on choice of site and residence Tourists stay longer

Promotion of the economy and tourism

Responsibility for nature, resources and the environment Sustainable lighting Intelligent lighting management Night-time switch-off at specific times Targeted direction of light to avoid spill light Aim: balance between building illumination and environmental aspects Integrated LED faade lighting or short distance from luminaire to faade for discreet energy efficiency Vertical luminance levels ensure orientation at night

Security aspects

The Lighting Handbook

63

Three approaches Architectural: emphasis and structure

Examples Emphasis on faade elements High-precision accent lighting for special architectural features Adjustment of light colour to materials Maintaining the faades character 24/7 Lighting scenario is subject to architecture Building looks different at night Static or dynamic lighting scenarios using colours replace traditional accent lighting Creative lighting patterns and textures reinforce emotional connection to the building LED media faades produce a distinctive long-distance effect LEDs can be used to convey information with unequivocal contents (images, text) Interactivity: media faades respond to their environment

Emotional: drawing attention and making the architecture appear different Communicative: creating brands and conveying information

Lighting management as customer benet LED technology combined with lighting control resulted in a revolution in faade lighting. Media faades are used to convey messages. In this respect, dynamic faade design in particular seeks to direct peoples attention and convey information From an environmental viewpoint, spill light at night is a hot issue. Much more important, however, seems to be the avoidance of unnecessary switch-on times by defining feasible operating hours. Ultimately, faade illumination interacts with people and should therefore be used only in the evening and morning hours with more public footfall. This allows to emphasise the identity of companies and municipalities, to structure outdoor spaces at night and to support night-time perception, taking environmental goals into account.

The Lighting Handbook

Chapter 4

Technology

LED technology Functions and types of LEDs LED features Important LED key figures Technology used in Zumtobels LED modules

66 66 66 67 70

Light control technology 72 Optics 72 Technology and application in products 74

The Lighting Handbook

66

LED technology
Functions and types of LEDs An LED (light-emitting diode) is an electronic semiconductor component that emits light when a current flows through it. The wavelength of the light depends on the semiconductor material and its doping. The spectrum of LEDs offers a major benefit: only light (electromagnetic radiation in the visible range) and no ultraviolet or infrared radiation is emitted. LED features Long service life (e.g. 50000 hours at 70% luminous flux) Light is emitted only in the visible range; i.e. no UV or infrared radiation Compact size High luminous efficiency (lm/W) Good to excellent colour rendering index (R a) Luminous flux and service life highly temperat ure-sensitive No environmentally harmful materials (e.g. mercury) Resistant to vibrations and impact Saturated colours 100 % luminous flux after switching on No ignition, boosting or cooling time High-precision digital dimming via PWM (pulse-width modulation) No shifting of colour locations during dimming

Basically, there are three types of LED: Standard through-hole LED: often used as indicator light source, although with low light output. Due to their shorter service life, higher probability of failure and sensitivity to UV radiation, they are not used in lighting technology. SMD (surface mounted device) LED: an LED that is reflow-soldered to the surface of a printed circuit board (using a reflow oven). Basically, it consists of an LED chip protected by silicon coating mounted in or on a housing or a ceramic plate with contacts. CoB (chip on board) LED: the LED chip is mounted directly on the printed circuit board. This allows a dense arrangement of chips close to each other.

The Lighting Handbook

67

Important LED key gures Luminous ux and efciency A critical issue when comparing LED luminaires of various suppliers is the indication of luminous flux levels. In catalogues you will find details regarding the luminous flux and efficiency of individual LEDs at a junction temperature of 25 C in the LED chip, details regarding the luminous flux levels of the LED boards used, or details regarding the luminous flux levels of luminaires and luminaire efficiency levels, including the power loss of

ballasts and any potential loss of efficiency through lighting optics, such as lenses, reflec tors or mixing chambers. Zumtobels catalogue data include the luminai r es overall luminous flux (lm) and system efficiency (lm/W). These figures indica te the actually available luminous flux emanating from the luminaire.

The Lighting Handbook

68

LED technology

Temperature and service life The luminous flux of an LED will decrease over time, like that of other lamps. This ageing process speeds up at higher tem peratures. This is why the heat produced by an LED must be dissipated efficiently. Therefore, reliable thermal management is indispensable for an LED to have a long service life.

An LEDs service life is determined taking this drop in luminous flux into account. As there is no standardised procedure in this respect, every manufacturer specifies the service life of its LEDs individually. The prognostic methods are based on laboratory tests of varying duration and cannot be compared for the most part. Usually, a luminous flux level of 70 % is assum e d. However, some manufacturers also refer to 50 % or failure. These specific features should be observed when select ing and comparing products.

100 90 Relative luminous flux (%) 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 20000 40000 60000 80000 100000 120000

55C 80C 100C 125C

Operating time (h)

The Lighting Handbook

69

White light quality and binning In the production of LED chips, LEDs of diffe r ent production batches have different properties with respect to intensity, colour temperature, colour location, or with respect to forward voltage. The properties of each individual LED are measured after manufacturing and allocated to a group showing the same features. These correspond to finely differentiated para m eters which are divided into so-called bins. Depending on the application and the product, these features are weighted differentl y. By using specific binning groups, colour and brightness tolerances not just of the light emitted by individual luminaires, but also on visible luminous surfaces are reduced to a minimum. Thus, illuminated surfaces and light emitting panels of luminaires are given a uniform appearance. This selection is especial l y important when it comes to single LED products and applications with maximum white light quality such as museums.

In practice, MacAdam ellipses are often used to give users an idea of how far individual LED modules differ with respect to colour perception. MacAdam ellipses describe the colour distan c es on the xy coordinates in the standardised colour table. In theory, we talk about 1 MacAdam as soon as there is a visual difference with respect to colour percept ion. A colour difference between individual LED modules of one luminaire and between individual LEDs, i.e. individual luminaires in case of spotlights, of 2 MacAdam ellipses is at present considered the maximum of technical feasibility. The colour difference between wide-angle luminaires with high luminous flux levels (replacing fluorescent lamps) is considered excellent at 4 MacAdam ellipses.

2700 K 3000 K 3500 K 4000 K 4500 K 5000 K 5700 K 6500 K

4 step MacAdam

The Lighting Handbook

70

LED technology

Technology used in Zumtobels LED modules Colour temperature and CCT Colour temperature (CT) Colour coordinates of the Planckian radiator (Planckian curve) Real light sources often deviate from this: correlated colour temperature (CCT) Judd straight lines: all points on these lines have the same correlated colour temperature. This means that different colour coordinates can have the same CCT. Stable White Invariable colour temperature Specific initial colour temperature (incl. tolerance range) Most frequent colour temperature at Zumtobel: 3000 K, 4000 K No readjustment in the course of the LEDs service life Temperature-based readjustment to keep the colour temperature constant Constant colour temperature during dimming

0.9 0.8 0.7

520 540 560

0.9 0.8 0.7

520 540 560

0.6 500 0.5 y 0.4 10000 0.3 490 0.2 0.1 480 380 0.2 0.3 TC(K) 6000 580 2500 4000 3000 2000 1500 600 620 700

0.6 500 0.5 y 0.4 10000 0.3 490 0.2 0.1 0.4 x 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.0 480 470 460 0.1 380 0.2 0.3 TC(K) 6000 580 2500 600 620 700

4000 3000

2000 1500

470 460 0.0 0.0 0.1

0.0

0.4 x

0.5

0.6

0.7

0.8

The Lighting Handbook

71

Selectable White Colour coordinates to be selected Predefined, fixed colour coordinates or colour temperatures Steps adjustable using sliders Use: Tunable Food: for illuminating food in supermarkets XPO: shelf lighting with selectable colour temperature (3000 K, 4000 K, 5000 K)

Tunable White Tunable colour temperature Continuous alteration of the colour tempera t ure between 2700 K and 6500 K Highly constant luminous flux across the entire colour temperature range Constant colour temperature during dimming Colour temperatures close to the Planckian curve Can be addressed statically or dynamically

0.9 0.8 0.7

520 540 560

0.9 0.8 0.7

520 540 560

0.6 500 0.5 y 0.4 10000 0.3 490 0.2 0.1 480 380 0.2 0.3 TC(K) 6000 580 2500 4000 3000 2000 1500 600 620 700

0.6 500 0.5 y 0.4 10000 0.3 490 0.2 0.1 0.4 x 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.0 480 470 460 0.1 380 0.2 0.3 TC(K) 6000 580 2500 600 620 700

4000 3000

2000 1500

470 460 0.0 0.0 0.1

0.0

0.4 x

0.5

0.6

0.7

0.8

The Lighting Handbook

72

Light control technology

Optics The direction of light is based on three fundamental principles: reflection, refraction and diffraction. These principles are applied to define the photometric properties of luminaires in terms of lighting patterns. High-precision light direction structures made of tried-and-tested as well as innovative materials extend the range with a view to both optics and design.

Reection In physics, reflection is the change in direction of a wavefront at an interface between two media with a differing refractive index so that the wavefront returns to the medium from which it originated.

higher refractive index

lower refractive index

Specular reection Nearly all light is reflected according to the law of reflection (incident angle = reflected angle). The aim is to reflect as much light as possible, absorbing only little of it.

Lambertian reectance Nearly all light is reflected diffusely: light is reflected in all directions, in accor d ance with Lamberts law, so that the reflecting surface appears equally bright from any direction of view. Here, too, the aim is to reflect as much light as possible and absorb only little of it.

Total reection A beam of light coming from a medium with a higher refractive index that hits the boundary to a medium with a lower refractive index will be reflected away from the incident slot. If the incident angle is further increased, total reflection will occur at a critical angle. This means that the light beam does not pass out from the material with a higher refractive index, but is reflected back.

The Lighting Handbook

73

Refraction Refraction indicates the change in direction of a wave due to a spatial change in its rate of propagation. For light waves in particular this phenomenon is described by the refraction index of a medium. At the transition between two media with a differing refraction index, the beam therefore changes direction according to Snells law of refraction.

Medium 1

Medium 2

Light refraction in materials with different optical properties

Light refraction against structures such as microprisms or microlenses

Light refraction against very fine structures for thorough mixing of light

Diffraction If light encounters periodic structures with expansions in the wavelength of light, it is diffracted (see illustration). Such structures may be transmission grids, reflection grids (phase grids) or holographic grids, for example. Diffraction of chromatic light results in an unfolding of the light spectrum.

The Lighting Handbook

74

Light control technology

Technology and application in products

Technology Cross louvre

Illustration of the principle

Functional principle The combination of patented upper reflector and louvre directs the light beams to the ceiling crosswise.

Mixing-chamber lens system

The LEDs spectral components are united in the mixing chamber to produce white light, focussed by the lens and directed to the high-precision reflector.

Reflector/lens system

The LEDs narrow-beam light is emitted through a lens and a bi-symmetrical reflector so that a narrow l y targeted beam pattern is produced.

Rotating lens

A cascading lens system redirects the vertical light beams, producing unilaterally asymmetrical distribution of light.

Lasered light guide panel

The texture applied on a transparent plastic panel using a laser results in refraction of the light injected. Thanks to the textures varying density, the entire light guide panel can be uniformly illuminated.

The Lighting Handbook

75

Application in products

Application hints/benets The structural design of the light control unit results in a light output ratio of the luminaire of up to 98 %. Wide-angle distribution of indirect light allows uniform illumination of the ceiling even at short suspension heights.

ELEEA The division into mixing chamber and optic results in high modularity when using various reflectors, and hence a variety of beam patterns from narrow-beam to wide-angle.

IYON The special lighting technology allows luminaire spacings along the escape route of up to 23 m. Thanks to uniform floor illumination, perfect visual conditions are ensured even in emergency mode.

RESCLITE Escape With an installed load of only 0.5 W, the spot illuminates up to 12m of escape route. The lens can be adjusted in increments of 90. By using two lenses, escape route illumination can be doubled and even escape route illumination around the corner can be implemented.

ERI (Escape Route Illumination) in ONLITE CROSSIGN and ONLITEPURESIGN This technology allows unilateral injection of light resulting in an increase in efficiency while at the same time ensuring perfect uniformity.

ONLITE PURESIGN

The Lighting Handbook

76

Light control technology

Technology and application in products

Technology Micro-pyramidal optic

Illustration of the principle

Functional principle The light is injected into the MPO panel laterally or from above. The light beams are precisely redirected resulting in defined distribution of light.

Micro-lens optic

The lens structure applied to a carrier film ensures parallelisation of incident light and thus produces linear light distribution.

Lens optic

The direction of light through the lens reduces the optics volume and allows for uniform appearance of the luminaire even at varying beam angles.

Highly reflective plastic materials

Light chamber made of highly reflective highpurity plastic boasting a reflection factor of 98 %.

The Lighting Handbook

77

Application in products

Application hints/benets The luminance of the light source is reduced across the entire light emitting panel. The lamps are invisible at any angle, so that the luminaires can be flexibly arranged with respect to the workstation.

AERO, MELLOW LIGHT V, LIGHT FIELDS A specific percentage of light emanates at a wider angle from the light emitting panel. The result is an increase in vertical illuminance and an improvement of face/object recognition and wall illumination as compared to louvre luminaires.

MELLOW LIGHT V Thanks to high-precision direction of light, both horizontal and vertical illuminance levels can be optimised and spill light avoided. Hence, there is no need for additional reflectors.

TECTON LED Homogenisation of the luminance curve and increase in the luminaires optical light output ratio.

MELLOW LIGHT V

The Lighting Handbook

Chapter 5

Lamps

Introduction History of electric lighting, overview The most important light sources

80 82

Performance characteristics of light sources 88 Overview of light sources Application hints Lamp designations Technical data (lamp table) 92 94 102 104

The Lighting Handbook

80

Introduction History of electric lighting, overview

History of electric lighting Our ancestors had to make do with natural sunlight for many thousands of years. The story of how humans first learned to use light begins 500000 years ago when they first tamed fire. It then became possible to use light and heat purposefully, and artificial lighting has extended the natural day length ever since. Wood, tallow, fat and oil were burned to provide light for many years. It was industrialisation that brought really revolutionary changes in its wake: first gas, then elec tricity became the dominant method of distributing energy and producing light. Artificial electric lighting has been an almost ubiquitous feature of everyday life for more than 130 years now. Our modern lifestyle is not viable without artificial lighting. We live in a 24-hour society and spend most of our time indoors. Even our outdoor environment is illuminated, either for traffic management purposes or to obtain decorative effects. Demand for artificial lighting is therefore huge, and we have high expectations of it: we expect artificial lighting to be available any time, anywhere and in the required quality and we expect it to be produced affordably and in eco-friendly ways. Modern light sources are now highly efficient and produce good-quality light. Lighting in Europe nevertheless still accounts for 14 % of all energy consumption (and around 19 % of worldwide energy consumption). Professional lighting accounts for approximately 80 % of this figure, and lighting in private homes accounts for roughly 20 %. That is equivalent to the emission of climaterelevant greenhouse gases amounting to roughly 600 million tonnes of CO 2 a year. Saving energy that is used for lighting therefore also saves CO 2. The EU has set ambitious targets intended to limit global warming to no more than 2 C compared with pre-industrial levels: 20 % by 2020 and 40 % by 2030 compared with 1990 emission levels. The lighting industry has come up with a wide variety of different types of lamps since 1879 when Thomas Alva Edison invented the incandescent lamp and manufactured it on an industrial scale. Individual lamps differ in terms of their design and output and, especially, the way in which they produce light. The most important criteria for modern light sources are lighting quality and efficiency low energy consumption and a long service life. Light production Light can be produced in a large number of different ways naturally or artificially. Light is produced cost-effectively by using four main groups of light sources: Thermal light sources Low-intensity discharge lamps High-intensity discharge lamps Semiconductor light sources

The Lighting Handbook

81

Light production

Thermal radiation Thermal light sources

Gas discharge Discharge lamps

Electroluminescence Semiconductor light sources

Incandescent lamps

Halogen incandescent lamps

Low-intensity discharge lamps

High-intensity discharge lamps

Light emitting diodes

Standard, reflector, special types

12 V 230 V Standard, reflector, cap at both ends

Fluorescent lamps, compact fluorescent lamps, energy-saving lamps

Metal halide lamps, sodium discharge lamps, mercury discharge lamps

LED lamps, LED modules, OLED

The Lighting Handbook

82

The most important light sources

QT12

QR-CBC

QR111

QA60

QT-DE

QPAR51

QPAR64

Halogen incandescent lamps Mains voltage or low voltage Service life and luminous efficiency better than incandescent lamps Dimmable Brilliant light Excellent colour rendering Use: retail and domestic areas, hospitality and decorative applications Functional description Current flows through a filament and heats it up in exactly the same way as in an incandescent lamp. This is why these lamps relea s e relatively large amounts of heat. The halogen cycle boosts the efficiency and prolongs the service life of these lamps compared with conventional incandescent lamps. Low-voltage lamps are very compact and therefore ideally suitable for directing light precisely, but they do need a transformer. Due to European legislation, only the most energy-efficient versions of this lamp group are permitted. More efficient alternatives include compact fluorescent lamps with built-in electronic ballasts or LED lamps.

The Lighting Handbook

83

T26

T16

T16-I

T16-D

T16-R(I)

Fluorescent lamps High to very high luminous efficiency (especially T16 HE) Good to very good colour rendering Long service life Wide selection of standard ranges Dimmable Use: efficient wide-area lighting Functional description An alternating electrical field between two electrodes in the discharge tube produces invisible UV radiation. The tubes white fluorescent coating converts this radiation into high-quality, visible light. These lamps need ignitors and current limiting; these functions are combined in an electronic ballast. The luminous flux of fluorescent lamps is highly dependent on their operating position and ambient temperature. Lamps that use amalgam technology are optimised for use in environments where there are fluctuating temperatures (see page 94).

The Lighting Handbook

84

The most important light sources

TC-SEL

TC-DEL

TC-TEL(I)

TC-L(I)

Compact uorescent lamps Compact designs High luminous efficiency Excellent colour rendering Wide selection of standard ranges Dimmable Use: commercial and prestigious areas, hospitality Functional description These lamps are compact versions of tubular or toroidal fluorescent lamps and opera te in a very similar way. The luminous flux of these lamps is highly dependent on their operating position and ambient temperature. Lamps that use amalgam technology are optimised for use in environments where there are fluctuating temperatures (see page 99).

The Lighting Handbook

85

HIT-TC-CE

HIT-CE

HIT-DE-CE

HIPAR

HIE

HIT

Metal halide lamps High luminous efficiency Good to very good colour rendering Good colour stability in case of lamps with ceramic discharge tubes Usually not dimmable Use: industrial bays, spotlighting, floodlighting systems, retail areas Functional description Metal halide lamps maintain an extremely compact electric arc in a discharge tube. Lighting quality is determined by the composition of the materials the lamp contains. An ignitor is needed to start the lamp and the current must be limited by a ballast. Electronic ballasts can advantageously be used for low-power lamps. Lamps with a ceramic discharge tube offer the best lighting quality, efficiency and service life.

The Lighting Handbook

86

The most important light sources

HST-CRI

HSE

HST

HST-DE

High-pressure sodium discharge lamps High luminous efficiency and long service life Satisfactory to poor colour rendering Yellowish light colour Can be dimmed in steps Use: industrial bays, street lighting, outdoor illumination Colour-improved (Philips SDW): Warm, white light Excellent colour rendering Use: retail areas Functional description Discharge in the elongated ceramic discharge tube is determined by sodium. The light therefore has a yellow hue and is only suitable for specific applications. Philips colour-improved SDW produces very good quality white light and is a popular choice for lighting in retail spaces. An ignitor is generally needed to start the lamp. The current must be limited by a ballast.

The Lighting Handbook

87

Bonding wire

Bubble

LED chip Board LED lamp LED module

Light emitting diodes (LEDs) Very efficient light production Wide selection of standard ranges Can be switched and dimmed as required Very long service life Good to very good colour rendering Very good production of coloured light Use: LEDs can be used for both functional and decorative lighting in indoor and outdoor locations. Functional description Light emitting diodes are modern semiconductor devices. Their characteristics are determin e d by their materials, mechanical design and operating mode. The active semiconductor layer, in which radiation is produced, is sandwiched between a positive and a negative substrate inside the LED. Actual coloured light is produced, depending on which materials are chosen. Nowa days, high-quality white light is produced by blue LEDs with yellow luminescent substances. A mixture of RGB (red, green, blue) also produces white. The smallest LED chips have a side length of approx. 250 m (1 micrometre = 1 one thousandth of a millimetre). As a rule, they are powered via appropriate DC converters. Their very long service life of over 10000 hours demands optimised thermal management in order to prevent overheating. Today, LEDs are already some of the most efficient light sources for general lighting. They are completely superseding traditional light sources in many applications.

More information about LEDs can be found in Chapter 4 Technology.

The Lighting Handbook

88

Performance characteristics of light sources

Choosing the right lamp an important rst decision Choosing the right lamp depends on what is required of the lighting (see Chapter 2). Incandescent lamps were highly popular for private domestic use for many years. Because of their poor efficiency and short service life, they are now being replaced by more environmentally compatible alternatives of higher quality such as LED lamps. Discharge lamps are the perfect choice for professional applications thanks to their efficient operating mode. LED light sources are taking over in all application areas because of their high luminous efficiency and long service life. They can legitimately be regarded as the light source of the future. Thus it is part of the expertise of the lighting designer to find the most suitable lamp for a lighting task. The performance characteristics of lamps are essentially defined by the following concepts:

Electrical power

Luminous flux/ lum. efficiency

Service life

Drop in luminous flux

Light colour

Light source parameters

Operating position

Dimming capability

Re-start time

Warm-up time

Colour rendering

The Lighting Handbook

89

Performance characteristics Electric power The electric power is the power consumed by a light source. The system power takes the power consumption of the control gear as well as that of the light source into account. Luminous ux/luminous efciency Luminous flux defines the total quantity of light emitted from a light source. The unit used is the lumen [lm]. The ratio of luminous flux to the required electric power gives the luminous efficiency [lm/W]. The system luminous efficiency also takes the ballasts losses into account. Luminous efficiency describes the efficiency of a light source and is now one of the most important performance characteristics of all. Service life The average service life (mortality) is usually quoted; this is the time after which half of the lamps will statistically still be service able (in other words half of the lamps will have failed). This test is subject to standardised operating conditions. Lamp manufacturers display this failure rate by curves. In Chapter8 Technology, they are shown as maintenance factors (LSF). Special service-life data apply to some light sources such as LEDs. Drop in luminous ux The initial luminous flux of a new lamp decreases over its time of operation (lumen maintenance), due to the ageing of its chemical and physical components. Lamp manufacturers display this drop in luminous flux by curves. In Chapter 8 Technology, they are shown as maintenance factors (LLWF). Light colour The light colour describes the colour impres s ion made by a white light source as relatively warm (ww = warm) or relatively cool (nw = intermediate, tw = cool). It is affect e d by the red and blue colour components in the spectrum. Colour code The colour code is a three-digit numerical value (e.g. 840) that describes the lighting quality of a white light source. The first digit denotes colour rendering, the second and third digits denote colour temperature (light colour). Example: 840 -> 8xx colour rendering index > 80 -> x40 colour temperature 4000 K

The Lighting Handbook

90

Performance characteristics of light sources

Colour rendering The spectral components of the light determine how well various object colours can be reproduced. The higher the colour rendering index (R a or CRI), or the lower the colour rendering group number, the better the colour rendering in comparison with the optimum reference light. The maximum colour rendering index value is 100. Values in excess of 80 are considered to be very good. Eight test colour samples (R1 to R 8) are used for the general colour rendering index, and there are another 6 more vivid high-saturation colours (R 9 to R14). The general colour rendering index is calculated for a light source relative to a known reference light source. Colour fields can only convey an impression of the original reflection patterns.

Light R 1 greyish red Dark R 2 greyish yellow Strong R 3 yellow green Moderate R 4 yellowish green

Light R 5 blueish green

R 6 Light blue R 7 Light violet Light R 8 reddish purple

R 9 Strong red a R 10 Strong yellow

R 12 Strong blue Light R 13 yellowish pink Moderate R 14 olive green (leaf)

R 11 Strong green

The Lighting Handbook

91

Warm-up time Discharge lamps in particular need between 30 seconds and several minutes to warm up and output the full luminous flux. Re-start High-pressure discharge lamps need to cool down for several minutes before they can be started again. Dimmability As well as incandescent and halogen incandescent lamps, almost all fluorescent and compact fluorescent lamps can be dimmed as required nowadays. Most manufacturers metal halide lamps continue to be incompatible with dimming because dimming may have uncontrolled effects on lighting quality and lamp service life. The new series of special models for indoor and outdoor applications constitute an exception. The output of sodium vapour lamps and high-pressure mercury lamps can be restricted in stages. LED light sources can be switched and dimmed as required.

Operating position Manufacturers specify the permitted operating positions for their lamps. For some metal halide lamps, only certain operating positions are allowed so as to avoid unstable operating states. Compact fluorescent lamps may usually be used in any operating position; however, important properties such as the lumi n ous flux vs. temperature curve may vary with the position.

45 30 105 h 105 admissible s 45 not admissible p 30

The Lighting Handbook

92

Overview of light sources

Comparison of technical data of the most important lamp types

Thermal light sources

Gas discharge lamps Low-pressure

Incandescent lamps Halogen incandescent lamps

Fluorescent lamps Compact fluorescent lamps Energy-saving lamps

Applications Light production Output Lamp voltage Cap Luminous flux Luminous efficiency Energy efficiency class Service life Light colour Colour rendering Notes

Private and semi-professional applications Filament is heated until it glows Low, 15 to 400 W 230 V, 12 V E27, E14, GY6,35, GU5,3, G9, R7s 100 to 9000 lm 10 to 25 lm/W C, D, E, F 1000 to 5000 hours Warm approx. 2500 to 3000 K Very good (CRI = 100 ) Transformer is required in case of low-voltage lamps Grey = Worst in class

Private and professional applications Current flows through conductive gas (contains mercury) Low to moderate, 5 to 80 W 230 V, > 110 V E27, E14, G13, G5 G24/GX24-d/-q, 2G11 and others 250 to 6150 lm 50 to 100 lm/W A, B 10,000 to 24000 hours Warm, intermediate, cool approx. 2500 to 8000 K Very good (CRI = 80 to 95 ) Ballast is usually required

Italic = Best in class

The Lighting Handbook

93

Semiconductor light sources High-pressure Mercury-vapour lamps Metal halide lamps High-pressure sodium discharge lamps Professional applications Electric arc in a conductive gas (contains mercury) Low to very high, 20 to 1000 W > 80 V E27, E40, G12, G8,5, GU6,5 and others 1600 to 110,000 lm 40 to 100 lm/W (sometimes > 120 lm/W ) Not defined 8000 to 15000 hours Warm, intermediate, cool approx. 2500 to 8000 K Poor to very good (CRI = < 40 to 95 ) Ballast is required Light emitting diodes (individual LEDs) LED modules LED lamps Private and professional applications Photons are produced in a solid material (semiconductor) Very low to high, 0.2 W (individual LED) to 100 W (LED module) 230 V, 12/24 V E27, E14 or without cap Up to 5000 lm 60 to 140 lm/W A 25000 to 50000 hours Warm, intermediate, cool approx. 2700 to 6500 K Good to very good (CRI = 70 to > 90 ) Converter is required in case of modules

The Lighting Handbook

94

Application hints
T16 uorescent lamps In comparison with thicker T26 lamps (diameter: 26 mm), modern T16 lamps (diameter: 16 mm) show several different properties that must be taken into account for application.

Luminous ux temperature curve As for all fluorescent lamps, the lamps luminous flux is temperature-dependent. The maximum value is obtained at an optimum ambient temperature, with losses increasing at higher and lower temperatures. The T16 basically follows the same curve as the T26, but the maximum occurs not at an ambient temperature of 20 to 25 C but at about 35 C. Reason: the cool spot of T16 is not located in the centre of the lamp, but typically at one end of the tube where the manufacturer has fixed its seal. The rated luminous flux is generally specified for an ambient temperature of 25 C. For the T16, the maximum value therefore lies above this rated value. Thus luminaire efficiencies may have levels greater than 1.
% 100 80 T26 58 W T16

Amalgam technology Special T16-I lamps with amalgam technology are available in order to ensure that the luminous flux is slightly less temperature dependent. Adding amalgam (a mercury compound) makes it possible to compensate for the decrease in luminous flux at relatively high and low temperatures.
% 100 80 T16-I (amalgam lamp)

Luminous flux

60 40 20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 Relative luminous ux % Min. relative luminous ux in % 50 60 70 80 C

Ambient temperature

Luminous flux

60 40 20 -20

T26 36 W (dashed line)

20

40

60

80 C

Ambient temperature

The Lighting Handbook

95

CSO Cool Spot Optimizer The photometric data of luminaires apply at a standard temperature of 25 C. Where a different ambient temperature prevails, the lamps luminous flux is also affected. In fluorescent lamps, the luminous flux declines in particular at lower temperatures. In order to increase the efficiency of luminaires fitted with T16 lamps, the so-called Cool Spot Optimizer (CSO) may be used. The CSO may only be used in conventional T16 28/54 W and 35/49/80 W lamps using cold-spot technology, and must be fitted at the lamp end (see picture).

Example: FZ 1/54 without CSO at 0 C LB approx. 60% FZ 1/54 with CSO at 0 C LB approx. 90% In this example, the luminous flux produced is therefore increased by 50 % and the number of luminaires required is reduced by one third, owing to the CSO. For lighting design purposes, an appropriately adjusted planned luminous flux has to be calculated.

The CSO produces a temperature increase on the lamp of roughly 10 to 20 . This results in a corresponding shift to the left of the curve as shown in the diagram. At cooler temperatures, the lamp produces significantly more light than a lamp without a CSO. Note: the CSO cannot be used in the case of amalgam lamps.

The Lighting Handbook

96

Application hints

Lamp orientation Due to the non-identical design of the two electrodes (tube ends) the way in which one or more T16 fluorescent lamps is/are fitted in luminaires makes a difference. Generally speaking, the seals, and hence the cool spots, must always be identically oriented. This means that side-by-side, multi-lamp luminair e s, when used vertically, should ideally point downwards. It may be sensible to break this rule in cooler environments, depend i ng on the type of luminaire.

Single-lamp Normal and higher ambient temperatures

Multi-lamp

Cool ambient temperature

=T he grey rectangle denotes the lamp manufacturers seal and marks the position of the cool spot

The Lighting Handbook

97

Further details for TETRIS and continuous-row arrangements Particular attention is needed for special lamp arrangements like in TETRIS (TECTON or SLOT luminaires) or in continous-row lighting systems. The so-called TETRIS arrangement provides for lamps overlapping several centimetres.

This enables to compensate for the dark zone at the lamps ends. In order to provide for maximum uniformity, it is recommended to also align all lamps identically. The last lamp/s, however, should be turned so as to make the lamp end head towards the centre of the luminaire.
TETRIS single-lamp TETRIS twin-lamp

Differentiated features TETRIS T16 continuousrow luminaire, single lamp Single-lamp, diagonally overlapping arrangement Length of the single-lamp continuous-row luminaire consists of length of the luminaire (1096/1396mm) x the number of luminaires + 75 mm Differentiated features TETRIS T16 continuousrow luminaire, twin lamp Twin-lamp, parallel overlapping arrangement Length of the twin-lamp continuous-row luminaire consists of length of the luminaire (1171/1471 mm) x the number of luminaires + 75 mm TETRIS twin-lamp, 28/54 W, cannot be installed using a feeder

The Lighting Handbook

98

Application hints

In a continuous-row lighting system, the maximum total luminous flux is achieved if the lamp ends are placed next to each other, if possible. For cool environments, here too it may make sense to arrange the lamp/s differently.

single- and twin-lamp

The Lighting Handbook

99

Compact uorescent lamps Amalgam technology The luminous flux of compact fluorescent lamps strongly depends on ambient temperature. Amalgam technology offers huge benefits because these lamps are often used in narrow and therefore very warm luminaires such as downlights. In the same way as with T16-I lamps, using special lamps with amalgam technology makes the luminous flux somewhat less temperature dependent. Adding amalgam (a mercury compound) makes it possible to compensate for the decrease in luminous flux at relatively high temperatures in particular. Amalgam lamps are available for both TC-LI and TC-TELI designs. A luminous flux versus temperature curve for amalgam lamps is shown in the T16 section by way of example (see page 94). In the case of compact fluorescent lamps it is not always easy to tell whether a lamp uses amalgam technology. The precise manufacturers designation must be examined. Lamp orientation The luminous flux of compact fluorescent lamps is highly dependent on their operating position. The correct use of lamps in a luminaire can therefore maximise a luminaires light output ratio. Standard types have a cool spot in the exposed lamp bend, so that self-heating and convection may lead to a temperature rise here. In amalgam lamps, the cool spot lies in the lamp base. In compact luminaires with horizontal lamp arrangement (e.g. downlights), it is therefore recommended to fit the lamps with electrodes uppermost wherever possible. The marking of lamps does not allow for standard identification of the electrodes position. This is why the lamp is fitted with that side facing upwards where adjacent tubes are not connected with each other these are the two tube ends with the electrodes inside.

The Lighting Handbook

100

Application hints

Initial operation of new uorescent and compact uorescent lamps Brand-new fluorescent and compact fluorescent lamps must be carefully prepared prior to first-time use, especially in dimming systems, and before metrological testing. Ageing New lamps should be operated for 100hours, i.e. roughly 4 days, at 100 % output (without dimming) and without switching them if possible. Lamps that have not been aged may fail prematurely in dimming systems. Stabilisation Lamps that have been aged must be allowed to burn in for at least 30 to 60 minutes without dimming or switching them before measuring the illuminance level and lighting quality of a lighting installation. Lamps that have not been stabilised may exhibit poor starting behaviour, flicker and produce non-uniform brightness and light colours.

The Lighting Handbook

101

Metal halide lamps Lamp start Suitable ignitors are needed in order to generate an ignition voltage that is sufficient to start metal halide lamps. Modern ignitors also prevent cyclic attempts to start old lamps that are reluctant to start. These should be replaced without delay in order to prevent subsequent damage. Glass covers In general, metal halide lamps require a glass cover to protect people and property in the event of the lamp exploding. It is the manufacturers responsibility to decide whether to permit individual lamp types to be used in uncovered luminaires. The detailed information from the manu facturer must be observed without fail. Service life behaviour There are sometimes very significant differences in the average service life (lamp survival factor LSF) and decrease in luminous flux (lamp luminous flux maintenance factor LLWF) of different types of lamps, depending on their frequency of switching or operating position. The manufacturers data also needs to be referred to. Some typical details can be found in the maintenance factor tables from page 246 onwards. In the case of high-intensity discharge lamps in particular, it is especially important to replace lamps no later than by the end of their design service life (maintenance interval). Continued use may result in damage to lamps and control gear and consequently to luminaires!

The Lighting Handbook

102

Lamp designations

Various systems are used to designate lamps. Lamp manufacturers use their own product name for each lamp. And there are standards and non-proprietary documents that use general designations. The LBS* coding system, which was devised by the Central Association of German Electrical and Electronic Industries (ZVEI), provides an extremely useful overview. Every general lighting lamp can be precisely designated according to the LBS coding system by an abbreviation consisting of letters and numbers.

Many luminaire manufacturers use the LBS coding system to specify appropriate lamps for their luminaires regardless of the names used by lamp manufacturers. This makes sense because many lamps are standardised and are therefore interchangeable regar d less of make. International standards use another system ILCOS**. The table below compares the designations used in various systems.

LBS (ZVEI) A60 QR-CBC QPAR TC TC-T TC-L T16 T26 HME HIT HST

ILCOS IAA HRGI HEGPAR FS FSM FSD FDH-G5-16 FD-G13-26 QE MT ST, STM, XX

OSRAM TR DECOSTAR S HALOPAR DULUX S DULUX T DULUX L FH, FQ L HQL HQI-T, HCI-T NAV-T

PHILIPS CLASSIC TONE MASTERline PAR PL-S PL-T PL-L TL5 HE, HO TLD HPL MHN/W-T, CDM-T SON-T, SDW-T

GE A1 Precise MR PAR BIAX S BIAX T BIAX L T5 XL T8 H Arcstream T, Kolarc T, CMH Lucalox T

SYLVANIA Normal Professional Hi-Spot Lynx CF-S Lynx CF-T Lynx CF-L FHE, FHO F HSL HSI-T, CMI-T SHP-T

* LBS = L ampen-Bezeichnungs-System [Lamp Code System], a standardised system for designating electric lamps for general lighting (luminaire manufacturers) ** ILCOS = I nternational L amp CO ding S ystem (lamp manufacturers), Standard IEC TS 61231/DIN 49805

The Lighting Handbook

103

Example of general description of a uores c ent lamp using the LBS coding system:

The LBS lamp coding system makes it possible to designate a fluorescent lamp precisely.

T16 35 W/830
.30 8.. = Colour temperature 30 00 K (warm white) = Colour rendering index 8 0 to 8 9

35 W = Nominal wattage 35 W L.. = Low-pressure discharge lamp .M. = Mercury vapour (LM)T = Tubular 16 = 16 mm tube diameter

Redundant or unambiguous details may sometimes be omitted, for instance LM for low-pressure mercury vapour discharge lamp as in this example.

Besides this basic data, further details can be specified depending on the lamp: bulb colour, clear or frosted, radiation angle in case of reflector lamps, description of cap/lampholder, permissible voltage etc.

The Lighting Handbook

104

Technical data (lamp table) Table of contents

Halogen incandescent lamps for 230 V 106111 PAR 106 QT 108 QT-DE 110 Halogen incandescent lamps for 12 V (low voltage) 110119 QT 110 QR/QR-CBC 112 QR111 116 Fluorescent lamps 118127 T16 118 T26 122 Compact fluorescent lamps 126133 TC-S 126 TC-D 126 TC-T 128 TC-L 130 TC-F 132

The Lighting Handbook

105

Induction lamps

132

Metal halide lamps 132151 HIT 2070 W 132 HIT 100150 W 136 HIT >150 W 138 HIT-DE 142 HIE 144 HIPAR 146 High-pressure sodium lamps 150157 HST 150 HST-DE 154 HSE 154

The Lighting Handbook

106

Technical data (lamp table)

Designation (ZVEI/LBS) Wattage [W] Max. dimensions [mm] Length x 55 x 51 55 x 51 55 x 51 55 x 51 7985 x 50 51 x 51 55 x 51 51 x 51 53/55 x 51 53 x 51 55 x 51 53/55 x 51 88/91 x 65 88/91 x 65 88/91 x 65 62 x 64 64 x 66 53/55 x 51 53 x 51 53/55 x 51 91 x 64.5 91 x 64.5 62 x 64 61 x 64 62 x 64 62 x 64 GU10 GU10 GU10 GU10 E14 GU10 GU10 GU10 GU10 GU10 GU10 GU10 E27 E27 E27 GU10 GU10 GZ10 GZ10 GZ10 E27 E27 GU10 GU10 GU10 GZ10 Luminous flux levels [lm] Max. lighting intensity [cd] 200 570 570 400 950 550 900 350 10001300 900 600 500600 30004300 1000 10001100 1500 1900 10001300 900 550600 3200 1100 2500 1900 1000 2500 warm warm warm warm warm warm warm warm warm warm warm warm warm warm warm warm warm warm warm warm warm warm warm warm warm warm Luminous effic.** [lm/W] Light col.***

Cap

Halogen incandescent lamps for 230 V (PAR lamps) QPAR1636 QPAR1630 QPAR1635 QPAR1636 QPAR1625 QPAR1625 QPAR1630 QPAR1650 QPAR1625 QPAR1635 QPAR1636 QPAR1650 QPAR2010 QPAR2025 QPAR2030 QPAR2025 QPAR2030 QPAR-CB1625 QPAR-CB1635 QPAR-CB1650 QPAR-CB2010 QPAR-CB2030 QPAR2025 QPAR2030 QPAR2050 QPAR-CB2025 20 28 35 35 40 40 40 40 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 75 50 50 50 50 50 75 75 75 75

* Core type ** (without control gear)

The Lighting Handbook

107

Colour tempera- Colour Rendering tures [K] Index CRI/R a

OSRAM

PHILIPS

SYLVANIA

GE

approx. 2700 approx. 2900 approx. 2900 approx. 2700 approx. 2900 approx. 2900 approx. 2900 approx. 2900 approx. 2900 approx. 2900 approx. 2700 approx. 2900 approx. 2900 approx. 2900 approx. 27502900 approx. 2900 approx. 2900 approx. 2900 approx. 2900 approx. 2900 approx. 2900 approx. 2900 approx. 2900 approx. 2900 approx. 2900 approx. 2900

100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100

HALOPAR ECO 64819 FL HALOPAR 16 64820 FL HALOPAR ECO 64823 FL HALOPAR 16 64824FL HALOPAR 20 64832 SP HALOPAR 20 64832 FL HALOPAR 20 64830 FL HALOPAR 16 64826FL HALOPAR 20 64836SP HALOPAR 20 64836FL HALOPAR 16 64830FL

HalogenA PAR16 TWISTline Alu 40 W TWISTline Alu 40 W TWISTline Alu 50 W TWISTline Alu 50 W PAR20 HalogenA PRO 50 W PAR20 HalogenA PRO 50 W TWISTline Dichro 50 W TWISTline Dichro 50 W

HI-SPOT 50/25 HI-SPOT ES 50 HI-SPOT ES 50 HI-SPOT 63 50 W/ SP10 HI-SPOT 63 50 W/ FL25 HI-SPOT ES 63 HI-SPOT ESD 50 HI-SPOT ESD 50 HI-SPOT ES 63 HI-SPOT ES 63 HI-SPOT ESD 63

Q20MR16/230/FL Q35MR16/230/FL 40PAR16/230/FL Q50MR16/230/SP Q50MR16/230/FL Q50MR16/230/FL 50PAR20/230/SP 50PAR20/230/FL

*** warm: up to 3300 K intermediate: 3300 to 5300 K cool: above 5300 K

The Lighting Handbook

108

Technical data (lamp table)

Designation (ZVEI/LBS)

Wattage [W]

Max. dimensions [mm] Length x 62 x 64 91 x 97 91 x 97 110 x 70 110 x 70 Length x 43 x 14 43 x 14 43 x 14 43 x 14 43 x 14 43 x 14 43 x 14 51 x 14

Cap

Luminous flux levels [lm] Max. lighting intensity [cd]

Luminous effic.** [lm/W]

Light col.***

Halogen incandescent lamps for 230 V (PAR lamps) QPAR-CB2050 QPAR-CB3010 QPAR-CB3030 QPAR-CB3510 QPAR-CB3524 75 75 75 75 75

GZ10 E27 E27 GZ10 GZ10

1000 69007500 22002400 12000 5000 Luminous flux levels [lm]

warm warm warm warm warm

Halogen incandescent lamps for 230 V QT14/c QT14/c QT14/c QT14/c QT14/c QT14/c QT14/c QT14/c 20 25 28 33 40 42 48 60

G9 G9 G9 G9 G9 G9 G9 G9

200 250260 340 460 490 630 740 820980

10 12 14 12 15 15 16

warm warm warm warm warm warm warm warm

QT18/c

40 53 60 60 70 100 105 150

67 x 18 86 x 18 67 x 18 86 x 18 86 x 18 86 x 18 86 x 18 86 x 18

B15d B15d B15d B15d B15d B15d B15d B15d

590 850 980 980 1200 1800 1900 2870

15 16 16 16 17 18 18 19

warm warm warm warm warm warm warm warm

QT 18

QT18/c QT18/c QT18/c QT18/c QT18/c QT18/c QT18/c

* Core type ** (without control gear)

The Lighting Handbook

109

Colour tempera- Colour Rendering tures [K] Index CRI/R a

OSRAM

PHILIPS

SYLVANIA

GE

approx. 2900 approx. 2900 approx. 2900 2800 2800

100 100 100 100 100

HALOPAR 30 64845 SP HALOPAR 30 64845 FL

HI-SPOT ESD 63 HI-SPOT 95 75 W/ SP10 DIC HI-SPOT 95 75 W/FL30 DIC HI-SPOT ESD 111 (AG) 75 W/10 HI-SPOT ESD 111 (AG) 75 W/24

28002900 28002900 28002900 28002900 28002900 28002900 28002900 28002900

100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100

HALOPIN ECO 66720 HALOPIN 66725 HALOPIN ECO 66733 HALOPIN 66740 HALOPIN ECO 66748 HALOPIN 66660, HALOPIN ECO 66760 HALOLUX CERAM ECO 64491 HALOLUX CERAM ECO 64492 HALOLUX CERAM ECO 64406 HALOLUX CERAM ECO 64494 HALOLUX CERAM ECO 64496 HALOLUX CERAM ECO 64499

EcoHalogen Clickline 28 W EcoHalogen Clickline 42 W

G9 25 W 230 V Clear G9 40 W 230 V Clear G9 60W 230 V Clear

28002900 28002900 28002900 28002900 28002900 28002900 28002900 28002900

100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100

Capsuleline ES 53 W Capsuleline ES 70 W Capsuleline PRO MV 100 W Capsuleline 105 W

*** warm: up to 3300 K intermediate: 3300 to 5300 K cool: above 5300 K

The Lighting Handbook

110

Technical data (lamp table)

Designation (ZVEI/LBS)

Wattage [W]

Max. dimensions [mm] Length x 105 x 32 105 x 32 105 x 32 105 x 32 105 x 32 Length/ contact gap

Cap

Luminous flux levels [lm]

Luminous effic.** [lm/W]

Light col.***

Halogen incandescent lamps for 230 V QT32/c QT32/c QT32/c QT32/c QT32/c 70 100 105 150 205

E27 E27 E27 E27 E27

1200 1800 1980 2870 4200

17 18 19 19 20

warm warm warm warm warm

QT-DE12
QT-DE 12

48 80 100 120 120 130 160 200 230/240 330

74.9 74.9 74.9 74.9 114.2 114.2 114.2 114.2 114.2 114.2 Length x 33 x 9 33 x 9.5 33 x 9.5 33 x 99.5 33 x 9.5 33 x 9.5 33 x 9.5 33 x 99.5 44 x 12 44 x 12

R7s R7s R7s R7s R7s R7s R7s R7s R7s R7s

750815 1450 1900 2300 23002800 2440 31003300 40004200 49005000 7000

17 18 19 19 19 19 21 20 22 21

warm warm warm warm warm warm warm warm warm warm

QT-DE12 QT-DE12 QT-DE12 QT-DE12 QT-DE12 QT-DE12 QT-DE12 QT-DE12 QT-DE12

Halogen incandescent lamps for 12 V (low voltage) QT-LP ax9/c

QT-LP 9

5 5 7 10 10 14 20 20 20 25

G4 G4 G4 G4 G4 G4 G4 G4 GY6,35 GY6,35

60 60 107 120140 140 240 320 300320 300320 500

12 12 15 1214 14 17 16 1516 1516 20

warm warm warm warm warm warm warm warm warm warm

QT-LP tr9/c QT-LP ax9/c QT-LP ax9/c QT-LP tr9/c QT-LP ax9/c QT-LP tr9/c QT-LP ax9/c QT-LP ax12/c
QT-LP 12

QT-LP ax12/c

* Core type ** (without control gear)

The Lighting Handbook

111

Colour tempera- Colour Rendering tures [K] Index CRI/R a

OSRAM

PHILIPS

SYLVANIA

GE

approx. 2900 approx. 2900 approx. 2900 approx. 2900 approx. 2900

100 100 100 100 100

HALOLUX CERAM ECO 64400 HALOLUX CERAM ECO 64401 HALOLUX CERAM ECO 64402 HALOLUX CERAM ECO 64404 HALOLINE

EcoClassic30 70 W EcoClassic30 105 W

PLUSline ES 48 W ES 80 W ES 120 W ES 120 W ES 160 W ES 230 W DE ECO 48 W DE ECO 80 W DE ECO 120 W DE ECO 120 W DE ECO 160 W DE ECO 230 W K12 C100 W R7S K11 C130 W R7s K9 C200 W R7s K1 C330 W R7s

approx. 3000 approx. 3000 approx. 3000 approx. 3000 approx. 3000 approx. 3000 approx. 3000 approx. 3000 approx. 3000 approx. 3000

100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100

64684 ECO 64690 ECO 64695 ECO 64696 ECO 64698 ECO 64701 ECO HALOSTAR

approx. 3000 approx. 3000 approx. 3000 approx. 3000 approx. 3000 approx. 3000 approx. 3000 approx. 3000 approx. 3000 approx. 3000

100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100

STARLITE 64405S ECO 64417 STARLITE 64415S STANDARD 64415 ECO 64423 STANDARD 64425 STARLITE 64425S STARLITE 64427S ECO 64429

CAPSULEline Pro 5 W

12 V/5 W LP UV-STOP 22165

Q10T2.5/12 V G4 35705 Q20T2.5/12 V G4 35710 Q20T3/12 V GY6,35 35696

CAPSULEline Pro 5 W 12 V/10 W LP UV-STOP 22241

CAPSULEline Pro 20 W 12 V/20 W LP UV-STOP 22242 CAPSULEline Pro 20 W EcoHalogen 20 W

*** warm: up to 3300 K intermediate: 3300 to 5300 K cool: above 5300 K

The Lighting Handbook

112

Technical data (lamp table)

Designation (ZVEI/LBS)

Wattage [W]

Max. dimensions [mm] Length x 44 x 12 44 x 12 44 x 12 44 x 12 44 x 12 44 x 12 44 x 12 44 x 12 31 x 9 33 x 9 31 x 9 33 x 9 33 x 9 44 x 12

Cap

Luminous flux levels [lm]

Luminous effic.** [lm/W]

Light col.***

Halogen incandescent lamps for 12 V (low voltage) QT-LP ax12/c

QT-LP 12

35 35 50 50 60 75 90 100 5 10 10 20 35 20

GY6,35 GY6,35 GY6,35 GY6,35 GY6,35 GY6,35 GY6,35 GY6,35 G4 G4 G4 G4 G4 GY6,35

600860 600 8001200 930 1650 13501575 1800 2550 60 140 140 350400 650 300

1725 17 1624 19 28 1821 20 26 12 14 14 1820 19 15

warm warm warm warm warm warm warm warm warm warm warm warm warm warm

QT-LP tr12/c QT-LP ax12/c QT-LP tr12/c QT-LP ax12/c QT-LP ax12/c QT-LP ax12/c QT-LP ax12/c QT-tr9/c
QT-LP 9

QT-ax9/c QT-tr9/c QT-ax9/c QT-ax9/c QT-ax12/c

QT-LP 12

QT-ax12/c QT-tr12/c QT-ax12/c QT-tr12/c QT-ax12/c QT-tr12/c QT-ax12/c QT-tr12/c QT16 24 V

35 35 50 50 75 75 100 100 150

44 x 12 44 x 12 44 x 12 44 x 12 44 x 12 44 x 12 44 x 12 44 x 12 50 x 16 Length x

GY6,35 GY6,35 GY6,35 GY6,35 GY6,35 GY6,35 GY6,35 GY6,35 GY6,35

650 550 9001000 850 13501600 1350 21502300 2100 3200 Max. lighting intensity [cd]

19 16 1820 17 1821 18 2223 21 21

warm warm warm warm warm warm warm warm warm

QR-CBC51/10
QR-CB 51

14

45 x 51

GU5,3

2800

warm

* Core type ** (without control gear)

The Lighting Handbook

113

Colour tempera- Colour Rendering tures [K] Index CRI/R a

OSRAM HALOSTAR

PHILIPS

SYLVANIA

GE

approx. 3000 approx. 3000 approx. 3000 approx. 3000 approx. 3000 approx. 3000 approx. 3000 approx. 3000 approx. 3000 approx. 3000 approx. 3000 approx. 3000 approx. 3000 approx. 3000

100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100

STARLITE 64432S, ECO 64432 STANDARD 64432 STARLITE 64440S, ECO 64440 STANDARD 64440 ECO 64447 STARLITE 64450S STARLITE 64458S

CAPSULEline Pro 35 W, 12 V/35 W LP UV-STOP Q35T3/12 V GY6,35 EcoHalogen 35 W 21021 35699

CAPSULEline Pro 50 W 12 V/50 W LP UV-STOP Q50T3/12 V GY6,35 21022 35700 CAPSULEline Pro 75 W CAPSULEline Pro 100 W 12 V/10 W 21990 12 V/20 W 21991 12 V/35 W 21992 Q75T3/12 V GY6,35 35701 M9 42959 M11 34674 M47/Q20 G4 34715, M35/Q20 G4 34714 M76/Q20/GY6,35 34712, M312/Q20/GY6,35 34713 M95/Q35/GY6,35 34708 M74/Q50/GY6,35 34703 M32/Q50/GY6,35 34702 M73/Q75/GY6,35 34683 M313/Q75/GY6,35 34682 M180 34664 M28/EVA/Q100/ GY6,35/1234676

approx. 3000 approx. 3000 approx. 3000 approx. 3000 approx. 3000 approx. 3000 approx. 3000 approx. 3000 approx. 3000

100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100

24 V 64465U DECOSTAR 51

12 V/35 W 21920 12 V/50 W 21993 12 V/75 W 21994 12 V/100 W 21995

approx. 3000

100

ECO 48855 SP

*** warm: up to 3300 K intermediate: 3300 to 5300 K cool: above 5300 K

The Lighting Handbook

114

Technical data (lamp table)

Designation (ZVEI/LBS)

Wattage [W]

Max. dimensions [mm] Length x 45 x 51 45/51 x 51/50 45/46 x 51

Cap

Luminous flux levels [lm] Max. lighting intensity [cd]

Luminous effic.** [lm/W]

Light col.***

Halogen incandescent lamps for 12 V (low voltage) QR-CBC51/36

QR-CB 51

14 20 20

GU5,3 GU5,3 GU5,3

480 60006500 40006000

warm warm warm

QR-CBC51/8 QR-CBC51/10

QR-CBC51/24 QR-CBC51/36

20 20

45 x 51 45/51 x 51/50

GU5,3 GU5,3

13002300 4501000

warm warm

QR-CBC51/38

20

45 x 51

GU5,3

7801000

warm

QR-CBC51/60

20

45 x 51

GU5,3

350450

warm

QR-CBC51/8 QR-CBC51/24 QR-CBC51/36 QR-CBC51/60 QR-CBC51/8 QR-CBC51/10

30 30 30 30 35 35

51 x 50 51 x 50 51 x 50 51 x 50 51 x 50 45 x 51

GU5,3 GU5,3 GU5,3 GU5,3 GU5,3 GU5,3

11000 3350 1600 750 14000 540012500

warm warm warm warm warm warm, intermediate warm, intermediate

QR-CBC51/24

35

45/51 x 51/50

GU5,3

17004400

QR-CBC51/36

35

45/51 x 51/50

GU5,3

10002200

warm, intermediate

QR-CBC51/60

35

45/51 x 51/50

GU5,3

7001100

warm

QR-CBC51/8 QR-CBC51/24

45 45

51 x 50 51 x 50

GU5,3 GU5,3

16000 5450

warm warm

* Core type ** (without control gear) The Lighting Handbook

115

Colour tempera- Colour Rendering tures [K] Index CRI/R a

OSRAM DECOSTAR 51

PHILIPS

SYLVANIA

GE

approx. 3000 30003150 2925, 3100, 3200

100 100 100

ECO 48855 FL STANDARD 44860 SP TITAN 46860 SP ECO 48860 SP ECO 48860 FL ECO 48860 WFL

MASTERline ES 20 W ACCENTline Pro 20 W BRILLIANTline Pro 50 mm 20 W MASTERline ES 20 W BRILLIANTline Pro 50 mm 20 W ACCENTline Pro 20 W BRILLIANTline Pro 50 mm 20 W MASTERline ES 20 W

Superia ESX

Precise Bright MR16 M268/ESX/CG

3000, 3200 30003150

100 100

Precise Bright MR16 M269/FRA/CG Precise Bright MR16 M269/BAB/CG

2925, 3100, 3200

100

STANDARD 44860WFL TITAN 46860WFL STANDARD 44860VWFL TITAN 46860VWFL IRC 48860VWFL STANDARD 44865SP TITAN 46865SP ECO 48865SP STANDARD 44865FL TITAN 46865FL ECO 48865FL STANDARD 44865WFL TITAN 46865WFL ECO 48865WFL STANDARD 44865VWFL TITAN 46865VWFL ECO 48865VWFL

Superia BAB

3100, 3200

100

BRILLIANTline Pro 50 mm 20 W

3150 3150 3150 3150 3150 3100, 3200, 4100

100 100 100 100 100 100

MASTERline ES 30 W MASTERline ES 30 W MASTERline ES 30 W MASTERline ES 30 W MASTERline ES 35 W ACCENTline Pro 35 W BRILLIANTline Pro 50 mm 35 W DIAMONDline Pro 35 W BRILLIANTline Pro 50 mm 35 W MASTERline ES 35 W DIAMONDline Pro 35 W ACCENTline Pro 35 W BRILLIANTline Pro 50 mm 35 W MASTERline ES 35 W DIAMONDline Pro 35 W BRILLIANTline Pro 50 mm 35 W MASTERline ES 35 W MASTERline ES 45 W MASTERline ES 45 W

Superia FMT

3000, 3100, 3150, 3200, 4100

100

Precise Bright MR16 M270/FRA/CG

3000-3200, 4100

100

Superia FMW

Bright MR16 M281/ FMW/CG

3100, 3150, 3200

100

3150 3150

100 100

*** warm: up to 3300 K intermediate: 3300 to 5300 K cool: above 5300 K The Lighting Handbook

116

Technical data (lamp table)

Designation (ZVEI/LBS)

Wattage [W]

Max. dimensions [mm] Length x 51 x 50 51 x 50 45 x 51 45 x 51

Cap

Luminous flux levels [lm] Max. lighting intensity [cd]

Luminous effic.** [lm/W]

Light col.***

Halogen incandescent lamps for 12 V (low voltage) QR-CBC51/36

QR-CB 51

45 45 50 50

GU5,3 GU5,3 GU5,3 GU5,3

2850 1300 10100 640015000

warm warm warm warm, intermediate warm, intermediate warm, intermediate warm

QR-CBC51/60 QR-CBC51/8 QR-CBC51/10

QR-CBC51/24

50

45 x 51

GU5,3

27005700

QR-CBC51/36

50

45 x 51

GU5,3

12002200

QR-CBC51/60

50

45 x 51

GU5,3

9501430

QR-CBC51/15 QR-CBC51/25 QR-CBC51/42

75 75 75

45 x 51 45 x 51 45 x 51

GU5,3 GU5,3 GU5,3

9800 4600 1950

warm warm warm

QR111/4
QR 111

35 30/35 35 50 45/50 45/50 60/65 60/65 60/65 75 75

61 x 111 57 x 111 58 x 111 61 x 111 57/63 x 111 58/63 x 111 57 x 111 58 x 111 58 x 111 57/63 x 111 58/63 x 111

G53 G53 G53 G53 G53 G53 G53 G53 G53 G53 G53

45000 23000 25004500 50000 2000035000 40005800 4500048000 8500 2800 30000 5300

warm warm warm warm warm warm warm warm warm warm warm

QR111/8 QR111/24 QR111/4 QR111/8 QR111/24 QR111/8 QR111/24 QR111/45 QR111/8 QR111/24

* Core type ** (without control gear)

The Lighting Handbook

117

Colour tempera- Colour Rendering tures [K] Index CRI/R a

OSRAM DECOSTAR 51

PHILIPS

SYLVANIA

GE

3150 3150 3000 3100, 3200, 4100

100 100 100 100

STANDARD 44870SP TITAN 46870SP ECO 48870SP STANDARD 44870FL TITAN 46870FL ECO 48870FL STANDARD 44870WFL TITAN 46870WFL ECO 48870WFL STANDARD 44870VWFL TITAN 46870VWFL ECO 48870VWFL HALOSPOT 111

MASTERline ES 45 W MASTERline ES 45 W ACCENTline Pro 50 W BRILLIANTline Pro 50 mm 50 W DIAMONDline Pro 50 W BRILLIANTline Pro 50 mm 50 W DIAMONDline Pro 50 W ACCENTline Pro 50 W BRILLIANTline Pro 50 mm 50 W DIAMONDline Pro 50 W BRILLIANTline Pro 50 mm 50 W

Superia EXT

Precise Bright MR16 M249/EXT/CG

3000, 3100, 3200, 4100

100

Superia EXZ

Precise Bright MR16 M250/EXZ/CG

3000, 4100

100

Superia EXZ

Precise Bright MR16 M250/EXZ/CG

3000, 3100, 3200

100

Superia FNV

Precise Bright MR16 M280/FNV/CG

3050 3050 3050

100 100 100

Precise ConstantColor MR16 EYF/CG Precise ConstantColor MR16 EYJ/CG Precise ConstantColor MR16 EYC/CG

approx. 3000 approx. 3000 approx. 3000 approx. 3000 approx. 3000 Approx. 3000 approx. 3000 approx. 3000 approx. 3000 approx. 3000 approx. 3000

100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100

41832 SSP 48832 ECO SP 41832 FL, 48832 ECO FL 41835 SSP 41835 SP, 48835 ECO SP 41835 FL, 48835 ECO FL 48837 ECO SP 48837 ECO FL 48837 ECO WFL 41840 SP 41840 FL

MASTERline111 30 W ALUline PRO 50 W, MASTERline111 45 W ALUline PRO 50 W, MASTERline111 45 W MASTERline111 60 W MASTERline111 60 W MASTERline111 60 W ALUline PRO 75 W ALUline PRO 75 W

AR111 35 W SP AR111 35 W FL AR111 50 W SP AR111 50 W FL AR111 75 W SP AR111 75 W FL

*** warm: up to 3300 K intermediate: 3300 to 5300 K cool: above 5300 K

The Lighting Handbook

118

Technical data (lamp table)

Designation (ZVEI/LBS)

Wattage [W]

Max. dimensions [mm] Length x 55 x 111 57/63 x 111 58/63 x 111 55 x 111 Length

Cap

Luminous flux levels [lm] Max. lighting intensity [cd]

Luminous effic.** [lm/W]

Light col.***

Halogen incandescent lamps for 12 V (low voltage) QR111/45

QR 111

75 100 100 100

G53 G53 G53 G53

1700 48000 8500 2800 Luminous flux levels [lm] ****

warm warm warm warm

QR111/8 QR111/24 QR111/45

Fluorescent lamps
T 16

T16* T16 T16 T16* T16 T16 T16* T16 T16 T16* T16 T16 T16 T16 T16* T16 T16 T16* T16

14 14 14 21 21 21 28 28 28 35 35 35 24 24 24 24 24 39 39

549 549 549 849 849 849 1149 1149 1149 1449 1449 1449 549 549 549 549 549 849 849

G5 G5 G5 G5 G5 G5 G5 G5 G5 G5 G5 G5 G5 G5 G5 G5 G5 G5 G5

12001250 11001150 1080 19001920 17501775 1700 26002640 24002460 2350 33003325 30503100 3000 1400 13001400 17001750 15701650 1550 31003220 28502990

8689 7982 77 9091 8385 81 9394 8688 84 9495 8789 86 58 5458 7173 6569 6569 7983 7377

warm, intermed. cool cool warm, intermed. cool cool warm, intermed. cool cool warm, intermed. cool cool inter mediate cool warm, intermed. cool cool warm, intermed. cool

* Core type** (without control gear) **** Rated values at 25 C (maximum levels are achieved at approx. 35 C)

The Lighting Handbook

119

Colour tempera- Colour Rendering tures [K] Index CRI/R a

OSRAM HALOSPOT 111

PHILIPS

SYLVANIA

GE

approx. 3000 approx. 3000 approx. 3000 approx. 3000

100 100 100 100

41840 WFL 41850 SP 41850 FL 41850 WFL LUMILUX

ALUline PRO 100 W ALUline PRO 100 W MASTER TL5 HE 14 W/8.. TL5 HE 14 W/865 TL5 HE 21 W/8.. TL5 HE 21 W/865 TL5 HE 28 W/8.. TL5 HE 28 W/865 TL5 HE 35 W/8.. TL5 HE 35 W/865 TL5 HO 24 W/9.. de Luxe TL5 HO 24 W/965 de Luxe TL5 HO 24 W/8.. TL5 HO 24 W/865 TL5 HO 39 W/8.. TL5 HO 39 W/865

T5 Luxline Plus FHE 14 W/8.. FHE 14 W/865 FHE 21 W/8.. FHE 21 W/865 FHE 28 W/8.. FHE 28 W/865 FHE 35 W/8.. FHE 35 W/865 FHO 24 W/8.. FHO 24 W/865 FHO 39 W/8.. FHO 39 W/865

AR111 75 W WFL AR111 100 W SP AR111 100 W FL AR111 100 W WFL T5 LongLast F14 W/T5/8../LL F14 W/T5/865/LL F21 W/T5/8../LL F21 W/T5/865/LL F28 W/T5/8../LL F28 W/T5/865/LL F35 W/T5/8../LL F35 W/T5/865/LL F24 W/T5/8../LL F24 W/T5/865/LL F39 W/T5/8../LL F39 W/T5/865/LL

2700, 3000, 3500, 4000 6500 8000 2700, 3000, 3500, 4000 6500 8000 2700, 3000, 3500, 4000 6500 8000 2700, 3000, 3500, 4000 6500 8000 4000, 5000 6500 2700, 3000, 3500, 4000 6500 8000 2700, 3000, 3500, 4000 6500

80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89 90...100 90...100 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89

T5 HE 14 W/8.. T5 HE 14 W/865 Cool Daylight T5 HE 14 W/880 SKYWHITE T5 HE 21 W/8.. T5 HE 21 W/865 T5 HE 21 W/880 SKYWHITE T5 HE 28 W/8.. T5 HE 28 W/865 T5 HE 28 W/880 SKYWHITE T5 HE 35 W/8.. T5 HE 35 W/865 T5 HE 35 W/880 SKYWHITE T5 HO 24 W/940 Cool White T5 HO 24 W/965 Cool Daylight T5 HO 24 W/8.. T5 HO 24 W/865 T5 HO 24 W/880 SKYWHITE T5 HO 39 W/8.. T5 HO 39 W/865

*** warm: up to 3300 K intermediate: 3300 to 5300 K cool: above 5300 K

The Lighting Handbook

120

Technical data (lamp table)

Designation (ZVEI/LBS) Fluorescent lamps

T 16

Wattage [W]

Max. dimensions [mm] Length

Cap

Luminous flux levels [lm]

Luminous effic.** [lm/W]

Light col.***

Luminous flux levels [lm] **** G5 G5 G5 G5 G5 G5 G5 G5 G5 G5 G5 G5 G5 G5 G5 34503700 34503750 416543004450 39504100 40504100 3700 35503800 34503800 4450 40504250 40004250 3800 61506550 57006300 5550 Luminous flux levels [lm] ***** 7076 7077 858891 8184 8384 76 6670 6470 82 7579 7479 70 7782 7179 69 inter mediate cool warm, intermed. cool cool cool inter mediate cool warm, intermed. cool cool cool warm, intermed. cool cool

T16 T16 T16* T16 T16 T16 T16 T16 T16* T16 T16 T16 T16* T16 T16

49 49 49 49 49 49 54 54 54 54 54 54 80 80 80

1449 1449 1449 1449 1449 1449 1149 1149 1149 1149 1149 1149 1449 1449 1449

T16-I (amalgam) T16-I (amalgam) T16-I (amalgam) T16-I (amalgam) T16-I (amalgam) T16-D T16-D

24 39 54 49 80 14 21

549 849 1149 1449 1449 582 882

G5 G5 G5 G5 G5 G5 G5

1900 3400 47504850 43004650 66506800 1200 1900

79 87 8890 8895 8385 86 90

warm, intermed. warm, intermed. warm, intermed. warm, intermed. warm, intermed. w., interm. w., interm.

* Core type** (without control gear) **** Rated values at 25 C (maximum levels are achieved at approx. 35 C)

The Lighting Handbook

121

Colour tempera- Colour Rendering tures [K] Index CRI/R a

OSRAM LUMILUX

PHILIPS MASTER TL5 HO 49 W/9.. de Luxe TL5 HO 49 W/965 de Luxe TL5 HO 49 W/8.. TL5 HO 49 W/865 TL5 HO ActiViva Active 49 W/817 TL5 HO 54 W/9.. de Luxe TL5 HO 54 W/965 de Luxe TL5 HO 54 W/8.. TL5 HO 54 W/865 TL5 HO ActiViva Active 54 W/817 TL5 HO 80 W/8.. TL5 HO 80 W/865

SYLVANIA T5 Luxline Plus FHO 49 W/8.. FHO 49 W/865 FHO 54 W/8.. FHO 54 W/865 FHO 80 W/8.. FHO 80 W/865

GE T5 LongLast F49 W/T5/8../LL F49 W/T5/865/LL F54 W/T5/8../LL F54 W/T5/865/LL F80 W/T5/8../LL F80 W/T5/865/LL

4000, 5000 6500 2700, 3000, 3500, 4000 6500 8000 17000 4000, 5000 6500 2700, 3000, 3500, 4000 6500 8000 17000 2700, 3000, 3500, 4000 6000, 6500 8000

90...100 90...100 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89 90...100 90...100 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89

T5 HO 49 W/940 Cool White T5 HO 49 W/965 Cool Daylight T5 HO 49 W/8.. T5 HO 49 W/865 T5 HO 49 W/880 SKYWHITE T5 HO 54 W/940 Cool White T5 HO 54 W/965 Cool Daylight T5 HO 54 W/8.. T5 HO 54 W/865 T5 HO 54 W/880 SKYWHITE T5 HO 80 W/8.. T5 HO 80 W/865 T5 HO 80 W/880 SKYWHITE

3000, 4000 3000, 4000 3000, 4000 3000, 4000 3000, 4000 3000, 4000 3000, 4000

80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89

T5 HO 24 W/8.. CONSTANT T5 HO 39 W/8.. CONSTANT T5 HO 54 W/8.. CONSTANT T5 HO 49 W/8.. CONSTANT T5 HO 80 W/8.. CONSTANT T5 HE 14 W/8.. SLS T5 HE 21 W/8.. SLS

TL5 HO TOP 54 W/840 TL5 HO TOP 49 W/840 TL5 HO TOP 80 W/840

***** R ated values at 25 C (more than 90 % of rated luminous flux are achieved in the range between +15 and +60 C)

*** warm: up to 3300 K intermediate: 3300 to 5300 K cool: above 5300 K

The Lighting Handbook

122

Technical data (lamp table)

Designation (ZVEI/LBS) Fluorescent lamps T16-D T16-D T16-D T16-D

Wattage [W]

Max. dimensions [mm] Length

Cap

Luminous flux levels [lm]

Luminous effic.** [lm/W]

Light col.***

Luminous flux levels [lm] **** G5 G5 G5 G5 2600 1750 3100 4450 93 73 79 82 w., interm. w., interm. w., interm. w., interm.

28 24 39 54

1182 582 882 1182

T 16

T16-LL (long life)* T16-LL (long life) T16-LL (long life)* T16-LL (long life) T16-LL (long life)* T16-LL (long life)

54 54 49 49 80 80

1149 1149 1449 1449 1449 1449

G5 G5 G5 G5 G5 G5

4450 4100 43104375 4100 61506240 5700 Luminous flux levels [lm]

82 76 89 84 7778 71

w., interm. cool w., interm. cool w., interm. cool

T16-R* T16-R T16-R* T16-R T16-R* T16-RI (amalgam)* T16-R T16-RI (amalgam)*

22 22 40 40 55 55 55 60

225 225 300 300 300 300 300 375 Length

2GX13 2GX13 2GX13 2GX13 2GX13 2GX13 2GX13 2GX13

18001900 1800 3300, 3400 3300 4200 4200 3990 5000 Luminous flux levels [lm]

8286 82 8385 83 76 76 73 83

w., interm. cool w., interm. cool w., interm. w., interm. cool w., interm.

T26
T 26

18 18 18 18 18 18 30

590 590 590 590 590 590 895

G13 G13 G13 G13 G13 G13 G13

900950 11001200 1150 1350 1300 1300 1920

5053 5056 4856 75 72 72 64

inter mediate w., interm., cool cool warm, intermed. intermed., cool cool warm

T26 T26 T26* T26 T26 T26

* Core type** (without control gear) **** Rated values at 25 C (maximum levels are achieved at approx. 35 C)

The Lighting Handbook

123

Colour tempera- Colour Rendering tures [K] Index CRI/R a

OSRAM LUMILUX

PHILIPS

SYLVANIA

GE

3000, 4000 3000, 4000 3000, 4000 3000, 4000

80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89

T5 HE 28 W/8.. SLS T5 HO 24 W/8.. SLS T5 HO 39 W/8.. SLS T5 HO 54 W/8.. SLS

MASTER

2700, 3000, 4000 6500 2700, 3000, 4000 6500 2700, 3000, 4000 6500

80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89

T5 HO 54 W/8.. XT T5 HO 54 W/865 XT T5 HO 49 W/8.. XT T5 HO 49 W/865 XT T5 HO 80 W/8.. XT T5 HO 80 W/865 XT

TL5 HO Xtra 54 W/8.. TL5 HO Xtra 49 W/8.. TL5 HO Xtra 80 W/8..

T5 Circline

2700, 3000, 4000 6500 2700, 3000, 4000 6500 2700, 3000, 4000 2700, 3000, 4000 6500 3000, 4000

80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89

T5 FC 22 W/8.. T5 FC 22 W/865 Cool Daylight T5 FC 40 W/8.. T5 FC 40 W/865 Cool Daylight T5 FC 55 W/8.. T5 FC 55 W/865 Cool Daylight

TL5 C 22 W/8.. TL5 C 40 W/8.. TL5 C 55 W/8.. TL5 C 60 W/8..

FC22 W/T5/8.. FC40 W/T5/8.. FC55 W/T5/8..

5000, 6500 3000, 4000, 5000, 5400 6500 2700, 2950, 3000, 3400, 3500, 4000 5000, 6000, 6300, 6500 8000 3000

98 90...100 90...100 80...89 80...89 80...89 90...100

L 18 W/950 COLOR proof DE LUXE L 18 W/9.. DE LUXE L 18 W/ 965 L 18 W/8.. L 18 W/860 L 18 W/880 SKYWHITE DE LUXE L 30 W/ 930

TL-D 18 W/9.. Graphica TL-D 18 W/9.. de Luxe TL-D 18 W/965 de Luxe

TL-D SUPER 80 18 W/8.. F18 W/8.. LUXLINE plus F18 W/8.. Polylux XL TL-D SUPER 80 18 W/8.. TL-D ActiViv Natural 18 W/880 F18 W/860 LUXLINE plus F18 W/860 Polylux XL

*** warm: up to 3300 K intermediate: 3300 to 5300 K cool: above 5300 K

The Lighting Handbook

124

Technical data (lamp table)

Designation (ZVEI/LBS) Fluorescent lamps T26*

T 26

Wattage [W]

Max. dimensions [mm] Length

Cap

Luminous flux levels [lm]

Luminous effic.** [lm/W]

Light col.***

30 30 30 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 58 58 58 58 58 58

895 895 895 970 970 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500

G13 G13 G13 G13 G13 G13 G13 G13 G13 G13 G13 G13 G13 G13 G13 G13 G13

24002450 23002350 2350 2600 3100 21002340 27002900 28002850 3350 3250 29003100 33503670 43504600 4550 5200 5000 49005000

8082 7778 78 72 86 5865 6167

warm, intermed. cool cool cool warm, intermed. intermed., cool w., interm., cool cool

T26 T26 T26-1m T26-1m* T26 T26 T26 T26* T26 T26 T26 T26 T26 T26* T26 T26

93 90 8186 5863 6066 78 90 86 8486

warm, intermed. intermed., cool cool intermed., cool w., interm., cool cool warm, intermed. intermed., cool cool

T26-LL (long life) T26-LL (long life) T26-LL (long life) T26-LL (long life) T26-LL (long life) T26-LL-1m (long life)

18 18 18 18 30 36

590 590 590 590 895 970

G13 G13 G13 G13 G13 G13

1350 1250 1350 1250 2400 3050

75 69 75 69 80 85

w., interm. cool w., interm. cool w., interm. w., interm.

* Core type ** (without control gear)

The Lighting Handbook

125

Colour tempera- Colour Rendering tures [K] Index CRI/R a

OSRAM LUMILUX

PHILIPS MASTER TL-D SUPER 80 30 W/8.. TL-D SUPER 80 30 W/865 TL-D SUPER 80 36 W-1/8..

SYLVANIA

GE T5 Circline

2700, 2950, 3000, 3400, 4000 6000, 6500 8000 5400 2700, 3000, 4000 5000, 6500 3000, 4000, 5000, 5400 6500 2700, 2950, 3000, 3400, 3500, 4000 5000, 6000, 6300, 6500 8000 5000, 6500 3000, 4000, 5000, 5400 6500 2700, 2950, 3000, 3400, 3500, 4000 5000, 6000, 6300, 6500 8000

80...89 80...89 80...89 90...100 80...89 98 90...100 90...100 80...89 80...89 80...89 98 90...100 90...100 80...89 80...89 80...89

L 30 W/8.. L 30 W/860 L 30 W/ 880 SKYWHITE DE LUXE L 36 W/954-1 L 36 W/8..-1

F30 W/8.. LUXLINE plus F30 W/860 LUXLINE plus F36 W/8.. LUXLINE plus F36 W/860 LUXLINE plus

F30 W/8.. Polylux XL F36 W/8.. Polylux XL F36 W/860 Polylux XL

L 36 W/950 COLOR TL-D 36 W/9.. Graphica proof DE LUXE L 36 W/9.. DE LUXE L 36 W/965 L 36 W/8.. L 36 W/860 L 36 W/ 880 SKYWHITE TL-D 36 W/9.. de Luxe TL-D 36 W/965 de Luxe TL-D SUPER 80 36 W/8.. TL-D SUPER 80 36 W/8.. TL-D ActiViv Natural 36 W/880

L 58 W/950 COLOR TL-D 58 W/9.. Graphica proof DE LUXE L 58 W/9.. DE LUXE L 58 W/ 965 L 58 W/8.. L 58 W/860 L 58 W/ 880 SKYWHITE TL-D 58 W/9.. de Luxe TL-D 58 W/965 de Luxe

TL-D SUPER 80 58 W/8.. F58 W/8.. LUXLINE plus F58 W/8.. Polylux XL TL-D SUPER 80 58 W/8.. TL-D ActiViv Natural 58 W/880 MASTER TL-D F58 W/860 LUXLINE plus F58 W/860 Polylux XL

3000, 4000 6500 3000, 4000 6500 3000, 4000 3000, 4000

80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89

L 18 W/8.. XT L 18 W/865 XT L 18 W/8.. XXT L 18 W/865 XXT

TL-D Xtra 18 W/8.. TL-D Xtra 18 W/865 TL-D Xtreme 18 W/8.. TL-D Xtreme 18 W/865 TL-D Xtra 30 W/8.. TL-D Xtra 1m 36 W/8..

*** warm: up to 3300 K intermediate: 3300 to 5300 K cool: above 5300 K

The Lighting Handbook

126

Technical data (lamp table)

Designation (ZVEI/LBS) Fluorescent lamps T26-LL-1m (long life)
T 26

Wattage [W]

Max. dimensions [mm] Length

Cap

Luminous flux levels [lm]

Luminous effic.** [lm/W]

Light col.***

36 36 36 36 36 58 58 58 58

970 1200 1200 1200 1200 1500 1500 1500 1500 Max. length acc. to IEC

G13 G13 G13 G13 G13 G13 G13 G13 G13

3000 33003430 32003250 32503300 31503250 52005320 5000 51505200 5000

83 9295 8990 9092 8890 9092 86 8990 86

w., interm. w., interm. cool cool w., interm. w., interm. cool w., interm. cool

T26-LL (long life) T26-LL (long life) T26-LL (long life) T26-LL (long life) T26-LL (long life) T26-LL (long life) T26-LL (long life) T26-LL (long life)

Compact fluorescent lamps (plug-in cap) TC-S

TC

5 7 7 9 9 11 11 5 7 9 11 11

85 115 145 145 145 215 215 85 115 145 215 215

G23 G23 G23 G23 G23 G23 G23 2G7 2G7 2G7 2G7 2G7

250 400425 425 600 570600 900 900 250265 400425 600 900 900

50 5761 61 67 6367 82 82 5053 5761 67 82 82

w., interm. w., interm. cool w., interm. cool w., interm. cool w., interm. w., interm. w., interm. w., interm. cool

TC-S TC-S TC-S TC-S TC-S TC-S TC-SEL TC-SEL TC-SEL TC-SEL TC-SEL

TC-D
TC-D

10 10 13 13 18 18 26

95 95 130 130 150 150 170

G24d-1 G24d-1 G24d-1 G24d-1 G24d-2 G24d-2 G24d-3

600 600 900 900 1200 1200 1800

60 60 69 69 67 67 69

warm, intermed. cool warm, intermed. cool warm, intermed. cool warm, intermed.

TC-D TC-D TC-D TC-D TC-D TC-D

* Core type ** (without control gear)

The Lighting Handbook

127
Colour tempera- Colour Rendering tures [K] Index CRI/R a

OSRAM LUMILUX

PHILIPS MASTER TL-D TL-D Xtreme 1m 36 W/8.. TL-D Xtra 36 W/8.. TL-D Xtra 36 W/865 TL-D Xtreme 36 W/8.. TL-D Xtreme 36 W/865 TL-D Xtra 58 W/8.. TL-D Xtra 58 W/865 TL-D Xtreme 58 W/8.. TL-D Xtreme 58 W/865 MASTER PL-S 2 pins 5 W/8.. 2 pins 7 W/8.. 2 pins 9 W/8.. 2 pins 11 W/8.. 4 pins 5 W/8.. 4 pins 7 W/8.. 4 pins 9 W/8.. 4 pins 11 W/8.. MASTER PL-C

SYLVANIA

GE

3000, 4000 3000, 4000 6500 6500 3000, 4000 3000, 4000 6500 3000, 4000 6500

80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89

L 36 W/8.. XT L 36 W/865 XT L 36 W/8.. XXT L 36 W/865 XXT L 58 W/8.. XT L 58 W/865 XT L 58 W/8.. XXT L 58 W/865 XXT DULUX

Lynx S 5 W/8.. S 7 W/8.. S 9 W/8.. S 11 W/8.. SE 5 W/8.. SE 7 W/8.. SE 9 W/8.. SE 11 W/8..

Biax F5BX/8.. F7BX/8.. F7BX/865 F9BX/8.. F9BX/865 F11BX/8.. F11BX/865 F5BX/8../4p F7BX/8../4p F9BX/8../4p F11BX/8../4p F11BX/865/4p

2700, 3000, 4000 2700, 3000, 3500, 4000 6500 2700, 3000, 3500, 4000 6500 2700, 3000, 3500, 4000 6500 2700, 4000 2700, 3000, 4000 2700, 3000, 4000 2700, 3000, 4000 6500

80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89

S 5 W/8.. S 7 W/8.. S 9 W/8.. S 9 W/865 S 11 W/8.. S/E 7 W/8.. S/E 9 W/8.. S/E 11 W/8..

2700, 3000, 3500, 4000 6500 2700, 3000, 3500, 4000 6500 2700, 3000, 3500, 4000 6500 2700, 3000, 3500, 4000

80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89

D 10 W/8.. D 13 W/8.. D 13 W/865 D 18 W/8.. D 18 W/865 D 26 W/8..

2 pins 10 W/8.. 2 pins 13 W/8.. 2 pins 18 W/8.. 2 pins 26 W/8..

D 10 W/8.. D 13 W/8.. D 13 W/865 D 18 W/8.. D 18 W/865 D 26 W/8..

F10DBX/8.. F10DBX/865 F13DBX/8.. F13DBX/865 F18DBX/8.. F18DBX/865 F26DBX/8..

*** warm: up to 3300 K intermediate: 3300 to 5300 K cool: above 5300 K

The Lighting Handbook

128

Technical data (lamp table)

Designation (ZVEI/LBS) Compact fluorescent lamps (plug-in cap) TC-D

TC-D

Wattage [W]

Max. dimensions [mm] Max. length acc. to IEC

Cap

Luminous flux levels [lm]

Luminous effic.** [lm/W]

Light col.***

26 18 26 10 10 13 13 18 18 26 26 18 26 13 18 18 26 26 13 18 26 11 13 14 17 18 26 32

170 150 170 95 95 130 130 150 150 170 170 150 170 90 110 110 130 130 116 110 130 127 90 127 149 110 130 145

G24d-3 G24d-2 G24d-3 G24q-1 G24q-1 G24q-1 G24q-1 G24q-2 G24q-2 G24q-3 G24q-3 G24q-2 G24q-3 GX24d-1 GX24d-2 GX24d-2 GX24d-3 GX24d-3 GX24d-1 GX24d-2 GX24d-3 GR14q-1 GX24q-1 GR14q-1 GR14q-1 GX24q-2 GX24q-3 GX24q-3

17101800 1200 1800 600 600 900 900 1200 1140 1800 1710 1200 1800 900 1200 1200 1800 1800 900 1200 1800 810 900 1050 1250 1200 1800 2400

6669 67 69 60 60 69 69 67 63 69 66 67 69 69 67 67 69 69 69 67 69 74 69 75 74 67 69 75

cool w., interm. w., interm. warm, intermed. cool warm, intermed. cool warm, intermed. cool warm, intermed. cool w., interm. w., interm. w., interm. warm, intermed. cool warm, intermed. cool warm, intermed. warm, intermed. warm, intermed. w., interm. w., interm. w., interm. w., interm. w., interm. w., interm. w., interm.

TC-D-LL (long life) TC-D-LL (long life) TC-DEL* TC-DEL TC-DEL* TC-DEL TC-DEL* TC-DEL TC-DEL* TC-DEL TC-DEL-LL (long life) TC-DEL-LL (long life) TC-T

TC-T

TC-T TC-T TC-T TC-T TC-TI (amalgam) TC-TI (amalgam) TC-TI (amalgam) TC-TEL

TC-TEL GR

TC-TEL TC-TEL TC-TEL TC-TEL TC-TEL TC-TEL

* Core type ** (without control gear)

The Lighting Handbook

129

Colour tempera- Colour Rendering tures [K] Index CRI/R a

OSRAM DULUX

PHILIPS MASTER PL-C 2 pins 18 W/8.. Xtra 2 pins 26 W/8.. Xtra 4 pins 10 W/8.. 4 pins 13 W/8.. 4 pins 18 W/8.. 4 pins 26 W/8.. 4 pins 18 W/8.. Xtra 4 pins 26 W/8.. Xtra 2 pins 13W/8.. 2 pins 18 W/8.. 2 pins 26 W/8.. 4 pins 13 W/8.. PL-R Eco 14 W/8../4P PL-R Eco 17 W/8../4P 4 pins 18 W/8.. 4 pins 26 W/8.. 4 pins 32 W/8..

SYLVANIA Lynx D 26 W/865 DE 10 W/8.. DE 13 W/8.. DE 13 W/860 DE 18W/8.. DE 18 W/860 DE 26W/8.. DE 26 W/860 T 18 W/8.. T 26 W/8..

GE Biax F26DBX/865 F10DBX/8../4p F10DBX/865/4p F13DBX/8../4p F13DBX/865/4p F18DBX/8../4p F26DBX/8../4p F26DBX/865/4p F13TBX/8../A/2p F18TBX/8../A/2p F26TBX/8../A/2p

6500 3000, 4000 3000, 4000 2700, 3000, 3500, 4000 6500 2700, 3000, 3500, 4000 6000, 6500 2700, 3000, 3500, 4000 6000, 6500 2700, 3000, 3500, 4000 6000, 6500 3000, 4000 3000, 4000 2700, 3000, 4000 2700, 3000, 3500, 4000 6500 2700, 3000, 3500, 4000 6500 2700, 3000, 3500, 4000, 6500 2700, 3000, 3500, 4000 2700, 3000, 3500, 4000 3000, 4000 2700, 3000, 4000 3000, 4000 3000, 4000 2700, 3000, 4000 2700, 3000, 4000 2700, 3000, 4000

80...89 8090 80...89 80...89 8090 80...89 8090 80...89 8090 80...89 8090 8090 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89

D 26 W/865 D/E 10 W/8.. D/E 13 W/8.. D/E 18 W/8.. D/E 18 W/865 D/E 26 W/8.. D/E 26 W/865 D/E 18 W/8.. XT D/E 26 W/8.. XT T 13 W/8.. PLUS T 18 W/8.. PLUS T 26 W/8.. PLUS T/E 11 W/8.. HE T/E 13 W/8.. PLUS T/E 14 W/8.. HE T/E 17 W/8.. HE T/E 18 W/8.. PLUS T/E 26 W/8.. PLUS T/E 32 W/8.. PLUS

*** warm: up to 3300 K intermediate: 3300 to 5300 K cool: above 5300 K

The Lighting Handbook

130

Technical data (lamp table)

Designation (ZVEI/LBS) Compact fluorescent lamps (plug-in cap) TC-TEL

TC-TEL GR

Wattage [W]

Max. dimensions [mm] Max. length acc. to IEC

Cap

Luminous flux levels [lm]

Luminous effic.** [lm/W]

Light col.***

42 57 13 18 26 32 42 57 70 57 70 32 42 57

155 179 90 110 130 145 155 181 219 179 219 148 155 179

GX24q-4 GX24q-5 GX24q-1 GX24q-2 GX24q-3 GX24q-3 GX24q-4 GX24q-5 GX24q-6 GX24q-5 GX24q-6 GX24q-3 GX24q-4 GX24q-5

3200 4300 900 1200 1800 22002400 3200 4300 5200 4300 5200 2400 3200 4300

76 75 69 67 69 6975 76 75 74 75 74 75 76 75

w., interm. w., interm. warm, intermed. warm, intermed. warm, intermed. warm, intermed. warm, intermed. w., interm. w., interm. w., interm., cool w., interm., cool w., interm. w., interm. w., interm.

TC-TEL TC-TELI (amalgam) TC-TELI (amalgam)* TC-TELI (amalgam)*

TC-T

TC-TELI (amalgam)* TC-TELI (amalgam)* TC-TELI (amalgam)* TC-TELI (amalgam) TC-QELI (amalgam) TC-QELI (amalgam) TC-TEL-LL (long life) TC-TEL-LL (long life) TC-TEL-LL (long life)

TC-L*
TC-L

16 18 18 22 24 24 26 28 36 36 36

317 225 225 411 320 320 533 565 415 415 415

2GX11 2G11 2G11 2GX11 2G11 2G11 2GX11 2GX11 2G11 2G11 2G11

1500 950 1200 2055 1500 1800 2470 2700 2350 2900 27502880

94 53 67 93 63 75 95 96 5367 81 7680

w., interm. w., interm., cool warm, intermed. w., interm. w., interm., cool warm, intermed. w., interm. w., interm. w., interm., cool warm, intermed. cool

TC-L TC-L* TC-L* TC-L TC-L* TC-L* TC-L* TC-L TC-L* TC-L

* Core type ** (without control gear) The Lighting Handbook

131

Colour tempera- Colour Rendering tures [K] Index CRI/R a

OSRAM DULUX

PHILIPS MASTER PL-C 4 pins 42 W/8.. 4 pins 57 W/8.. 4 pins 18 W/8.. TOP 4 pins 26 W/8.. TOP 4 pins 32 W/8.. TOP 4 pins 42 W/8.. TOP 4 pins 57 W/8.. TOP 4 pins 32 W/8.. Xtra 4 pins 42 W/8.. Xtra 4 pins 57 W/8.. Xtra MASTER PL-L

SYLVANIA Lynx TE 18 W/8.. TE 26 W/8.. TE 32 W/8.. TE 42 W/8..

GE Biax F13TBX/8../A/4P F18TBX/8../A/4P F26TBX/8../A/4P F32TBX/8../A/4P F42TBX/8../A/4P/EOL F57QBX/8../A/4P/EOL F70QBX/8../A/4P/EOL

2700, 3000, 4000 2700, 3000, 4000 2700, 3000, 3500, 4000, 4100 2700, 3000, 3500, 4000, 4100 2700, 3000, 3500, 4000, 4100 2700, 3000, 3500, 4000, 4100 2700, 3000, 3500, 4000, 4100 2700, 3000, 4000 3000, 4000 2700, 3000, 3500, 4000 3000, 3500, 4000 3000, 4000 3000, 4000 3000, 4000

80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89

T/E 42 W/8.. PLUS T/E 26 W/8.. CONSTANT T/E 32 W/8.. CONSTANT T/E 42 W/8.. CONSTANT T/E 32 W/8.. XT

3000, 4000 3000, 4000, 5400 2700, 3000, 3500, 4000 3000, 4000 3000, 4000, 5400 2700, 3000, 3500, 4000 3000, 4000 3000, 4000 3000, 4000, 5400 2700, 3000, 3500, 4000 6500

80...89 90...100 80...89 80...89 90...100 80...89 80...89 80...89 90...100 80...89 80...89

L 16 W/8.. HE DE LUXE L 18 W/9.. L 18 W/8.. L 22 W/8.. HE DE LUXE L 24 W/9.. L 24 W/8.. L 26 W/8.. HE L 28 W/8.. HE DE LUXE L 36 W/9.. L 36 W/8.. L 36 W/865

18 W/8../4P 24 W/8../4P 36 W/8../4P 36 W/865/4P

L 18 W/8.. L 24 W/8.. L 36 W/8..

F18BX/8.. F24BX/8.. F36BX/8..

*** warm: up to 3300 K intermediate: 3300 to 5300 K cool: above 5300 K The Lighting Handbook

132

Technical data (lamp table)

Designation (ZVEI/LBS) Compact fluorescent lamps (plug-in cap) TC-L

TC-L

Wattage [W]

Max. dimensions [mm] Max. length acc. to IEC

Cap

Luminous flux levels [lm]

Luminous effic.** [lm/W]

Light col.***

36 40 40 40 40 55 55 55 55 80 40 55 80 18 24 36 40 55 18 24 36

415 535 535 535 535 535 535 535 535 565/568 535 535 568 225 320 415 535 535 122 165 217 Length x width x height

2G11 2G11 2G11 2G11 2G11 2G11 2G11 2G11 2G11 2G11 2G11 2G11 2G11 2G11 2G11 2G11 2G11 2G11 2G10 2G10 2G10

2600 2950 3500 3325 3150 4000 4800 45004550 4300 60006500 3500 4800 6500 1200 1800 2900 3500 4800 1100 1700 2800 Luminous flux levels [lm]

72 74 88 83 79 73 87 8283 78 7581 88 87 81 67 75 81 88 87 61 71 78

cool cool warm, intermed. cool cool w., interm., cool warm, intermed. cool cool w., interm. inter mediate inter mediate inter mediate w., interm. w., interm. w., interm. w., interm. w., interm. w., interm. w., interm. w., interm.

TC-L TC-L* TC-L TC-L TC-L TC-L* TC-L TC-L TC-L* TC-LI (amalgam) TC-LI (amalgam) TC-LI (amalgam) TC-L-LL (long life) TC-L-LL (long life) TC-L-LL (long life) TC-L-LL (long life) TC-L-LL (long life) TC-F* TC-F* TC-F*

Induction lamps LMT-SIHf

LMT-SIHf/ ENDURA

70 100 150

315 x 139 x 75 315 x 139 x 75 415 x 139 x 75 Total length (OSRAM+PHILIPS)

Osram Osram Osram

6500 8000 12000 Max. luminous fluxes on recommended ballast

93 80 80

w., interm. w., interm. w., interm.

LMT-SIHf LMT-SIHf

Metal halide lamps HIT-TC-CE

HIT

20 20

5255 5157

PGJ5 GU6,5

1650 16001800

83 8090

warm warm

HIT-TC-CE

* Core type ** (without control gear) The Lighting Handbook

133

Colour tempera- Colour Rendering tures [K] Index CRI/R a

OSRAM DULUX

PHILIPS MASTER PL-L 40 W/8../4P 55 W/8../4P 55 W/865/4P 80 W/8../4P 24 W/8../4P Xtra (Polar) 36 W/8../4P Xtra (Polar) 40 W/8../4P Xtra 55 W/8../4P Xtra (Polar)

SYLVANIA Lynx LE 40 W/8.. LE 55 W/8.. F 18 W/8.. F 24 W/8.. F 36 W/8..

GE Biax F40BX/8.. F55BX/8.. F55BX/865

8000 5400 2700, 3000, 3500, 4000 6500 8000 3000, 4000, 5400 2700, 3000, 3500, 4000 6500 8000 2700, 3000, 4000 4000 4000 6500 3000, 4000 3000, 4000 3000, 4000 3000, 4000 3000, 4000 2700, 3000, 4000 2700, 3000, 4000 2700, 3000, 4000

80...89 90...100 80...89 80...89 80...89 90...100 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89 80...89

L 36 W/880 DE LUXE L 40 W/954 L 40 W/8.. L 40 W/865 L 40 W/880 DE LUXE L 55 W/9.. L 55 W/8.. L 55 W/865 L 55 W/880 L 80 W/8.. L 40 W/840 CONSTANT L 55 W/840 CONSTANT L 80 W/840 CONSTANT L 18 W/8.. XT L 24 W/8.. XT L 36 W/8.. XT L 55 W/8.. XT F 18 W/8.. F 24 W/8.. F 36 W/8.. ENDURA

3000, 4000 3000, 4000 3000, 4000

80...89 80...89 80...89

70 W/8.. 100 W/8.. 150 W/8.. POWERSTAR/ POWERBALL

MASTERcolour CDM-Tm Mini 20 W/830 CDM-Tm Mini GU6,5 20 W/830

ConstantColour

3000 3000

80...89 80...89

HCI-TF 20/830 WDL PB

CMH20/T/UVC/830/ GU6,5

*** warm: up to 3300 K intermediate: 3300 to 5300 K cool: above 5300 K The Lighting Handbook

134

Technical data (lamp table)

Designation (ZVEI/LBS) Metal halide lamps HIT-TC-CE

HIT

Wattage [W]

Max. dimensions [mm] Total length (OSRAM+PHILIPS)

Cap

Luminous flux levels [lm] Max. luminous fluxes on recommended ballast

Luminous effic.** [lm/W]

Light col.***

20 20 20 20 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 50 50 50 50

85 8185 103 88103 55 52 5257 57 8185 8185 85 81 8185 100103 90100 103 100 88103 85 103 152156 156

G8,5 G8,5 G12 G12 PGJ5 GU6,5 GU6,5 GU6,5 G8,5 G8,5 G8,5 G8,5 G8,5 G12 G12 G12 G12 G12 G8,5 G12 E27 E27

2050 16001800 2050 16501800 3000 3400 33003900 3400 30003700 2800 4300 35004000 31003500 32003800 28004000 4300 4000 31503600 50005400 5400 41505350 4800

103 8090 103 8390 86 97 94111 97 91106 80 123 100114 8997 94109 80114 123 114 90103 100108 108 83100 96

warm warm warm warm warm inter mediate warm warm inter mediate warm warm warm warm, intermed. inter mediate warm warm warm warm, intermed. w., interm. w., interm. warm warm

HIT-TC-CE HIT-CE HIT-CE HIT-TC-CE HIT-TC-CE HIT-TC-CE HIT-TC-CE HIT-TC-CE HIT-TC-CE HIT-TC-CE HIT-TC-CE HIT-TC-CE HIT-CE HIT-CE HIT-CE HIT-CE HIT-CE* HIT-TC-CE HIT-CE HIT-CE HIT-CE

* Core type ** (without control gear)

The Lighting Handbook

135

Colour tempera- Colour Rendering tures [K] Index CRI/R a

OSRAM POWERSTAR/ POWERBALL

PHILIPS MASTERcolour CDM-TC Evolution 20 W/930 CDM-TC 20 W/830 CDM-T Evolution 20 W/930 CDM-T 20 W/830 CDM-Tm Mini 35 W/830 CDM-Tm Elite Mini 35 W/930 GU6,5 CDM-TC 35 W/942, CDM-TC Elite 35 W/942 CDM-TC Evolution 35 W/930 CDM-TC Elite 35 W/930 CDM-TC 35 W/830 CDM-T 35 W/942, CDM-T Elite 35 W/942 CDM-T Elite 35 W/930 CDM-T Evolution 35 W/930 CDM-T 35 W/830 CDM-TC Elite 50 W/9.. CDM-T Elite 50 W/9.. CityWhite CDO-TT (Plus) 50 W/828

SYLVANIA

GE ConstantColour

3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 4200 3000 3000 4200 3000 3000 3000 3000, 4200 4200 3000 3000 3000 3000, 4200 3000, 4200 3000, 4200 2800, 3000 3000

90...100 80...89 90...100 80...89 80...89 90...100 90...100 90...100 90...100 90...100 90...100 90...100 80...89 90...100 90...100 90...100 90...100 80...89 90...100 90...100 80...89 70...79

HCI-TC 20 W/830 WDL PB HCI-TF 35/930 WDL PB HCI-TC 35/942 NDL PB HCI-TC 35/930 WDL PB Shoplight HCI-TC 35/930 WDL PB Plus HCI-TC 35/830 WDL PB HCI-T 35/942 NDL PB HCI-T 35/930 WDL PB Shoplight HCI-T 35/930 WDL PB Plus HCI-T 35/830 WDL PB HCI-TT 50/830 WDL PB

CMH20/TC/ UVC/U/830/G8,5 Plus CMH20/T/UVC/830/ G12 Plus CMH35/T/UVC/942/ GU6,5 CMH35/T/UVC/930/ GU6,5 (Ultra)

CMI-TC 35 W/WDL UVS

CMH35/TC/ UVC/U/942/G8,5 CMH35/TC/ UVC/U/930/G8,5 Ultra CMH35/TC/ UVC/U/8../G8,5 Plus CMH35/T/UVC/U/942/ G12 CMH35/T/UVC/U/930/ G12 Ultra

CMI-T 35 W/WDL UVS CMH35/T/UVC/U/8../ G12 (Plus) CMH50/TTUVC/730/ E27 STREETWISE

*** warm: up to 3300 K intermediate: 3300 to 5300 K cool: above 5300 K

The Lighting Handbook

136

Technical data (lamp table)

Designation (ZVEI/LBS) Metal halide lamps HIT-TC-CE

Wattage [W]

Max. dimensions [mm] Total length (OSRAM+PHILIPS)

Cap

Luminous flux levels [lm] Max. luminous fluxes on recommended ballast

Luminous effic.** [lm/W]

Light col.***

70

8188

G8,5

59007400

84106

inter mediate warm warm

HIT-TC-CE HIT-TC-CE

70 70

8185 81

G8,5 G8,5

63007650 62007800

90109 92111

HIT-TC-CE HIT-TC-CE HIT-CE HIT-CE* HIT-CE*

70 70 70 70 70

8185 85 100103 100 88100103

G8,5 G8,5 G12 G12 G12

62006900 6000 63007750 64007800 58007500

9294 86 90111 91111 83107

warm intermed. warm, intermed. warm inter mediate warm intermed. intermed. warm warm intermed. warm w., interm. warm inter mediate warm warm warm warm

HIT-CE* HIT-CE HIT-CE HIT-CE HIT-CE HIT-CE HIT-CE HIT HIT HIT-CE HIT-CE HIT-CE HIT-CE HIT-CE

70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 100 100 100 100 100

88100103 103 156 150156 156 149 149 7690 90 105 110 105 209210 211

G12 G12 E27 E27 E27 PG12-2 PG12-2 G12 G12 G12 G12 G12 E40 E40

62007300 6000 6300 60007500 7800 5800 5800 52005800 5200 9300 1050011000 9500 880010700 10900

89104 86 90 86107 111 83 83 7479 74 93 105110 95 88107 109

* Core type ** (without control gear)

The Lighting Handbook

137

Colour tempera- Colour Rendering tures [K] Index CRI/R a

OSRAM POWERSTAR/ POWERBALL

PHILIPS MASTERcolour CDM-TC 70 W/942, CDM-TC Elite 70 W/942 (Light Boost) CDM-TC Elite 70 W/930 (Light Boost) CDM-TC 70 W warm (925) CDM-TC 70 W/830 CDM-TC 70 W fresh (740) CDM-T Elite 70 W/9.. (/930 Light Boost) CDM-T 70 W warm (925)

SYLVANIA

GE ConstantColour

4200

90...100

HCI-TC 70/942 NDL PB HCI-TC 70/930 WDL PB Shoplight HCI-TC 70/930 WDL PB Plus HCI-TC 70/830 WDL PB HCI-T 70/930 WDL PB Shoplight HCI-T 70/930 WDL PB Plus HCI-T 70/942 NDL PB HCI-T 70/830 WDL PB HCI-TT 70/830 WDL PB HQI-T 70/ UVS HCI-T 100/942 NDL PB HCI-T 100/830 WDL PB HCI-TT 100/830 WDL PB

CMH70/TC/ UVC/U/942/G8,5 CMH70/TC/ UVC/U/930/G8,5 Ultra (White) CMH70/TC/ UVC/U/830/G8,5 Plus CMH70/T/UVC/U/930/ G12 Ultra (White)

3000 2500, 3000

90...100 90...100

3000 4000 3000, 4200 2500, 2950, 3000 4200

80...89 70...79 90...100 90...100 90...100

CMI-TC 70 W/WDL UVS

CDM-T 70 W/942, CDM-T CMI-T 70 W/NDL UVS CMH70/T/UVC/U/942/ G12 Elite 70 W/942 (Light Boost) CDM-T 70 W/830 CDM-T 70 W fresh (740) CDM-TT 70 W/942 CityWhite CDO-TT 70 W/828 CDM-TP 70 W/942 CDM-TP 70 W/830 CDM-T Elite 100 W/9.. CityWhite CDO-TT Plus 100 W/828 CMI-T 70 W/WDL UVS CMH70/T/UVC/U/830/ G12 HSI-T 70 W/... UVS CMH70/TT/UVC/830/ E27 CMH70/TTUVC/730/ E27 STREETWISE ARC70/T/U/842/G12 ARC70/T/U/730/G12 CMH100/TT/UVC/830/ E40 CMH100/TTUVC/730/ E27 STREETWISE

3000 4000 4200 2800, 3000 3000 4200 3000 3000, 4200 3000 4200 3000 3000 2800, 3000 3000

80...89 70...79 90...100 80...89 70...79 90...100 80...89 80...89 70...79 90...100 90...100 80...89 80...89 70...79

*** warm: up to 3300 K intermediate: 3300 to 5300 K cool: above 5300 K

The Lighting Handbook

138

Technical data (lamp table)

Designation (ZVEI/LBS) Metal halide lamps HIT-CE* HIT-CE HIT-CE* HIT-CE HIT-CE HIT HIT-CE HIT-CE HIT-CE

Wattage [W]

Max. dimensions [mm] Total length (OSRAM+PHILIPS)

Cap

Luminous flux levels [lm] Max. luminous fluxes on recommended ballast

Luminous effic.** [lm/W]

Light col.***

150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150

98110 110 98110 149 149 7684 211 209 204211

G12 G12 G12 PGX12-2 PGX12-2 G12 E40 E40 E40

1270014500 15000 1300015000 13000 12000 1150013000 12000 15000 1350016500

8587 100 90100 87 80 7787 80 100 90110

inter mediate warm warm warm intermed. w., interm. intermed. inter mediate warm, intermediate

HIT-CE HIT-CE HIT-CE HIT-CE HIT-CE HIT-CE HIT-CE HIT-CE* HIT-CE

150 210 210 250 250 250 250 250 250

211 186 186 135 175 175 135 260 226260

E40 PGZ18 PGZ18 G12 G22(GY22) G22(GY22) G12 E40 E40

16300 23000 24150 23000 25300 26600 22000 25000 200002600028300

109 110 115 92 101 106 88 100 80113

warm inter mediate warm warm inter mediate warm inter mediate inter mediate warm

HIT HIT HIT HIT

250 250 250 250

219225257 257 220 246257

E40 E40 E40 E40

1900020000 20000 21000 2050021000

7680 80 84 8284

intermed., cool intermed. intermed. inter mediate

* Core type ** (without control gear) The Lighting Handbook

139

Colour tempera- Colour Rendering tures [K] Index CRI/R a

OSRAM POWERSTAR/ POWERBALL

PHILIPS MASTERcolour CDM-T 150 W/942 CDM-SA/T 150 W/942 CDM-T Elite 150 W/930 CDM-T 150 W/830 CDM-TP 150 W/830 CDM-TP 150 W/942 CDM-TT 150 W/942 CityWhite CDO-TT Plus 150 W/828

SYLVANIA

GE ConstantColour

4200 3000 3000 3000 4200 3000, 4000, 4200 4200 4200 3000, 4200

90...100 90...100 80...89 80...89 90...100 80...89 90...100 90...100 80...89

HCI-T 150/942 NDL PB HCI-T 150/830 WDL PB HQI-T 150/ HCI-TT 150/830 WDL PB

CMI-T 150W/NDL UVS CMI-T 150 W/WDL UVS HSI-T 150 W/... UVS

CMH150/T/ UVC/U/942/G12 CMH150/T/ UVC/U/830/G12 ARC150/T/U/8../G12 CMH150//UVC O/T/U/942/E40 CMH150/UVC/ T/U/842/E40 CMH150/TT/UVC/ 830/E40 CMH150//UVC O/T/U/830/E40 CMH150/TTUVC/730/ E40 STREETWISE CMH250/TT/UVC/ 942/E40 CMH250/TT/UVC/ 830/E40, KRC250/CMH/830/ T/H/E40 ARC250/T/.../960/E40 ARC250/T/H/742/E40

3000 4200 3000 3000 4200 3000 4200 4200 2800, 3000

70...79 90...100 90...100 80...89 90...100 90...100 90...100 90...100 80...89

HCI-TM 250/942 NDL MD/HR PB HCI-TM 250/930 WDL MD/HR PB HCI-TT 250/830 WDL PB

CDM-TMW Elite 210 W/942 CDM-TMW Elite 210 W/930 CDM-T 250 W/830 G12 CDM-T 250 W/942 G12 CityWhite CDO-TT Plus 250 W/828

5200, 5400, 6000 4500 4200 4000, 4500, 4600

90...100 90...100 70...79 60...69

HQI-T 250/D PRO

MASTER HPI-T PLUS 250 W/645

HSI-T 250 W/D HSI-THX 250 W HSI-TSX 250 W

*** warm: up to 3300 K intermediate: 3300 to 5300 K cool: above 5300 K The Lighting Handbook

140

Technical data (lamp table)

Designation (ZVEI/LBS) Metal halide lamps HIT-CE HIT-CE HIT-CE HIT-CE HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT

Wattage [W]

Max. dimensions [mm] Total length (OSRAM+PHILIPS)

Cap

Luminous flux levels [lm] Max. luminous fluxes on recommended ballast

Luminous effic.** [lm/W]

Light col.***

315 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 600 1000 1000 1000 1000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000

186 175 175 278 270 270285 270 260 270286 180 382 180 340 345382 430 430 430 430 430 Length x diameter

PGZ18 G22(GY22) G22(GY22) E40 E40 E40 E40 E40 E40 G22(GY22) E40 G22(GY22) E40 E40 E40 E40 E40 E40 E40

35500 43000 43000 41000 36000 3150035000 2500028000 35000 3200040000 58000 81000 97000 85000 85000110000 180000 180000 189000210000 190000 240000

113 108 108 103 90 7988 6370 88 80100 97 81 97 85 85110 90 90 95105 95 120

inter mediate inter mediate warm warm inter mediate cool cool intermed. inter mediate cool intermed. cool cool intermed. cool cool intermed. intermed. inter mediate

HIT-CE HIT-CE* HIT-CE HIT-CE* HIT-CE

45 60 60 90 90

132 x 19 132 x 19 132 x 19 143 x 19 143 x 19

PGZ12 PGZ12 PGZ12 PGZ12 PGZ12

44554950 64207020 67807200 945010350 1000010450

99110 107117 113120 105115 111116

warm inter mediate warm inter mediate warm

* Core type ** (without control gear)

The Lighting Handbook

141

Colour tempera- Colour Rendering tures [K] Index CRI/R a

OSRAM POWERSTAR/ POWERBALL

PHILIPS MASTERcolour CDM-TMW Elite 315 W/942 MASTER HPI-T PLUS 400 W/645 HPI-T 1000 W/643 HPI-T 2000 W/64.

SYLVANIA

GE ConstantColour

4200 4200 3000 3000 4200 5500, 5900 6000 4200 3500, 4000, 4200, 4300, 4500 6100 4000 6100 7250 3500, 4300 7250 7250 4200, 4600 4400 4400

90...100 90...100 90...100 80...89 90...100 90...100 90...100 70...79 60...69 90...100 90...100 90...100 90...100 65 90...100 90...100 60...69 60...69 60...69

HCI-TM 400/942 NDL (HR) PB HCI-TM 400/930 WDL (HR) PB HQI-BT 400/D PRO HQI-T 400/N HQI-TM 600/D (HR) PB HQI-TM 1000/D (HR) PB HQI-T 1000/D HQI-T 1000/N HQI-T 2000/D HQI-T 2000/D/I HQI-T 2000/N HQI-T 2000/N 230V HQI-T 2000/N/E SUPER

HSI-THX 400 W HSI-T 400 W/D HSI-TSX 400 W HSI-T 1000 W/4K

CMH400/TT/UVC/830/ E40 KRC400/T/.../960/E40 ARC400/T/H/742/E40

2800 4000 2800 4000 2800

6066 8183 6773 7277 5866

CosmoWhite CPO-TW Xtra 45 W/728 CosmoWhite CPO-TW 60 W/840 CosmoWhite CPO-TW Xtra 60 W/728 CosmoWhite CPO-TW 90 W/840 CosmoWhite CPO-TW Xtra 90 W/728

*** warm: up to 3300 K intermediate: 3300 to 5300 K cool: above 5300 K

The Lighting Handbook

142

Technical data (lamp table)

Designation (ZVEI/LBS) Metal halide lamps HIT-CE* HIT-CE

Wattage [W]

Max. dimensions [mm] Total length (OSRAM+PHILIPS)

Cap

Luminous flux levels [lm] Max. luminous fluxes on recommended ballast

Luminous effic.** [lm/W]

Light col.***

140 140

150 x 19 150 x 19 Length/ contact gap

PGZ12 PGZ12

1512016100 16500

108115 118

inter mediate warm

HIT-DE-CE
HIT-DE

35 70 70 70 70 150 150 150 150 250 250 400 400 1000 1000 1000 1000 1800 2000

114.2 114.2 114.2 114.2 114.2 132 132 132138 132138 162 162 206 206 187 187 294 294 364 369

RX7s RX7s RX7s RX7s RX7s RX7s-24 RX7s-24 RX7s-24 RX7s-24 Fc2 Fc2 Fc2 Fc2 Cable Cable Cable Cable Cable Cable

3400 58006700 58007000 51006500 55006200 1200014400 1300014800 1100013500 1200013800 21500 2000022000 3100037000 36000 90000 90000 90000 100000 155000 200000

97 8396 8397 7393 7989 8096 8897 7390 8092 86 8088 7893 90 90 90 90 100 86 100

warm inter mediate warm w., interm., cool warm, intermed. inter mediate warm, intermed. w., interm., cool warm, intermed. intermed. warm, intermed. cool intermed. cool intermed. cool inter mediate cool cool

HIT-DE-CE HIT-DE-CE* HIT-DE HIT-DE HIT-DE-CE HIT-DE-CE* HIT-DE HIT-DE HIT-DE HIT-DE HIT-DE HIT-DE HIT-DE HIT-DE HIT-DE HIT-DE HIT-DE HIT-DE

* Core type ** (without control gear)

The Lighting Handbook

143

Colour tempera- Colour Rendering tures [K] Index CRI/R a

OSRAM

PHILIPS MASTERcolour

SYLVANIA

GE

4000 2800

7580 66

POWERSTAR/ POWERBALL

CosmoWhite CPO-TW 140 W/840 CosmoWhite CPO-TW 140 W/728

ConstantColour CDM-TD 70 W/942 CDM-TD 70 W/830 CDM-TD 150 W/942 CDM-TD 150 W/8.. (Essential) MHN-TD 250 W/842 MASTER MHN-LA 1000 W/956 XWH MASTER MHN-LA 1000 W/842 XWH MASTER MHN-SA 1800 W/956 (P)SFC MASTER MHN-SA 2000 W/956 400 V XW CMI-TD 70 W/NDL CMI-TD 70 W/WDL HSI-TD 75 W/ UVS CMI-TD 150 W/NDL CMH35/TD/UVC/830/ RX7s CMH70/TD/UVC/942/ RX7s CMH70/TD/UVC/830/ RX7s ARC70/TD(UVC)/7../ RX7s CMH150/TD/UVC/942/ RX7s-24

3000 4200 3000 3000, 4000, 4200, 5200, 5600, 6500 3000, 3500, 4200, 4300 4200 3000, 4200 3000, 4200, 5600, 6500 3000, 3200, 3500, 4200 5500 3200, 4000, 4200, 5200 5500-6000 4200 6100 4400 5600 4200 5600 5600

80...89 90...100 80...89 80...89 70...79 90...100 80...89 80...89 70...79 90...100 80...89 90...100 80...89 90...100 80...89 90...100 80...89 90...100 90...100

HCI-TS 70/942 NDL PB HCI-TS 70 W/830 WDL PB HQI-TS 70/ EXCELLENCE HCI-TS 150 W/942 NDL PB HCI-TS 150 W/830 WDL PB HQI-TS 150/ EXCELLENCE HQI-TS 250/D (PRO) HQI-TS 250/ UVS HQI-TS 400/D (PRO) HQI-TS 400/NDL HQI-TS 1000/D/S (PRO) HQI-TS 1000/NDL/S

CMI-TD 150 W/WDL CMH150/TD/UVC/830/ RX7s-24 HSI-TD 150 W/ UVS HSI-TD 250 W/ .K (UVS) ARC150/TD(UVC)/7../ RX7s-24 ARC250/TD/8../Fc2

*** warm: up to 3300 K intermediate: 3300 to 5300 K cool: above 5300 K

The Lighting Handbook

144

Technical data (lamp table)

Designation (ZVEI/LBS) Metal halide lamps HIT-DE

HIT-DE

Wattage [W]

Max. dimensions [mm] Length/ contact gap

Cap

Luminous flux levels [lm] Max. luminous fluxes on recommended ballast

Luminous effic.** [lm/W]

Light col.***

2000 2000 2000 2000 2000

187 364 187 274364 274 Length x

Cable Cable Cable Cable Cable

210000230000 190000 225000 205000220000 230000 Max. luminous fluxes on recommended ballast

105115 95 113 103110 115

cool cool inter mediate intermed., cool intermed.

HIT-DE HIT-DE HIT-DE HIT-DE

HIE-CE-P
HIE

35 50 50 70 70 70 70 70 100 100 100 100 100 150 150

138 x 54 138 x 54 156 x 71 156 x 71 138 x 54 141 x 55 141 x 55 138 x 54 138 x 54 186 x 76 141 x 55 141 x 55 138 x 54 138 x 54 227 x 91

E27 E27 E27 E27 E27 E27 E27 E27 E27 E40 E27 E27 E27 E27 E40

3200 4000 4900 60007230 6700 62006600 62006600 5000 8500 87009400 73007700 73007700 8100 13700 1230015100

91 80 98 86103 96 8994 8994 71 85 8794 7377 7377 81 91 82101

warm warm warm warm warm inter mediate warm warm warm warm inter mediate warm warm warm warm

HIE-CE-P HIE-CE HIE-CE HIE-CE-P HIE-P HIE-P HIE HIE-CE-P HIE-CE HIE-P HIE-P HIE HIE-CE-P HIE-CE

* Core type ** (without control gear)

The Lighting Handbook

145

Colour tempera- Colour Rendering tures [K] Index CRI/R a

OSRAM POWERSTAR/ POWERBALL

PHILIPS MASTERcolour MASTER MHN-LA 2000 W/956 400 V XWH MASTER MHN-LA 2000 W/842 400 V XWH

SYLVANIA

GE ConstantColour

61006200 5600 4400 4200, 5400 4200

90...100 90...100 8089 80...89 6069

HQI-TS 2000/D/S (High Flux) HQI-TS 2000/NDL/S HQI-TS 2000/N/L

3000 3000 2800 2900, 3000 3000 3000 3000 2830, 3000 4200 3000 3000 3000 2830, 3000

80...89 80...89 89 8089 80...89 80...89 70...79 70...79 80...89 8089 80...89 70...79 70...79 80...89 8089

HCI-E/P 35/830 WDL PB coated HCI-E/P 50/830 WDL PB coated HCI-E/P 70/830 WDL PB coated HQI-E/P 70/NDL clear/coated HQI-E/P 70/WDL clear/coated HCI-E/P 100/830 WDL PB coated HQI-E/P 100/NDL clear/coated HQI-E/P 100/WDL clear/coated HCI-E/P 150/830 WDL PB coated

CityWhite CDO-ET Plus 50/828 CityWhite CDO-ET Plus 70/828 CityWhite CDO-ET Plus 100/828 CityWhite CDO-ET Plus 150/828

HSI-MP 75 W/CO U-E27 HSI-MP 100 W/CO U-E27

CMH70/E/UVC/U/830/ E27 /C /D CMH100/E/ UVC/U/830/E27 /C /D CMH150/E/ UVC/U/830/E27 /C /D

*** warm: up to 3300 K intermediate: 3300 to 5300 K cool: above 5300 K

The Lighting Handbook

146

Technical data (lamp table)

Designation (ZVEI/LBS) Metal halide lamps HIE-P

HIE

Wattage [W]

Max. dimensions [mm] Length x

Cap

Luminous flux levels [lm] Max. luminous fluxes on recommended ballast

Luminous effic.** [lm/W]

Light col.***

150 150 150 250 250 250 250 400 400 400 400 1000

141 x 55 141 x 55 138 x 54 226 x 90 227 x 90 227 x 91 211/226 x 90 290 x 120 282 x 120 285 x 120 284290 x 122 380 x 165 Length x

E27 E27 E27 E40 E40 E40 E40 E40 E40 E40 E40 E40

1140012000 1140012000 12500 1700019000 23500 19500 1800025500 2300031000 39000 4000042000 3000042500 100000 Max. lighting intensity [cd]

7680 7680 83 6876 94 78 72102 5878 98 100105 75106 100

inter mediate warm warm intermed., cool warm intermed. intermed., cool cool warm inter mediate w., interm., cool intermed.

HIE-P HIE HIE (-P)* HIE* HIE HIE (-P)* HIE (-P)* HIE* HIE HIE (-P)* HIE

HIPAR16/12* HIPAR16/25* HIPAR16/40* HIPAR16/12*

20 20 20 35

55 x 51 55 x 51 55 x 51 55 x 50

GX10 GX10 GX10 GX10

9000 2900 1500 16000

warm warm warm warm, intermediate inter mediate warm, intermediate

HIPAR16/15* HIPAR16/25*

35 35

65 x 50 65 x 50

GX10 GX10

12000 5500

* Core type ** (without control gear)

The Lighting Handbook

147

Colour tempera- Colour Rendering tures [K] Index CRI/R a

OSRAM POWERSTAR/ POWERBALL

PHILIPS MASTERcolour MASTER HPI PLUS 250 W/7.. BU(-P) MASTER HPI PLUS 400 W/7 BU(-P)

SYLVANIA

GE ConstantColour

4200 3000 3000 5200, 6000 3000 4000 3700, 3800, 4300, 6700 5000, 6000 3000 38004000 3000, 3700, 4300, 4500, 6700 3800

80...89 70...79 70...79 90...100 8089 70...79 60...69 90...100 8089 6069 60...69 60...69

HQI-E/P 150/NDL clear/coated HQI-E/P 150/WDL clear/coated HQI-E(/P) 250/D (PRO/coated) HQI-E(/P) 400/D coated HQI-E 400/N (clear/coated) HQI-E 1000/N

HSI-MP 150 W/CO U-E27 HSI-SX 250 W/CO HSI-SX 400 W/CO

ARC250/D/.../960/E40 CMH250/E/U/830/E40 ARC250/D/H/740/E40 KRC400/D/.../960/E40 CMH400/E/U/830/E40

3000 3000 3000 3000, 4000

8089 8089 8089 90...100

CMH20/MR16/UVC/830/ GX10/SP CMH20/MR16/UVC/830/ GX10/FL CMH20/MR16/UVC/830/ GX10/WFL CMH35/MR16/UVC/930/ GX10/SP (ULTRA), CMH35/MR16/UVC/942/ GX10/SP CMH35/MR16/V60// UVC/930/GX10/FL (ULTRA), CMH35/MR16/V60// UVC/942/GX10/FL

4200 3000, 4200

90...100 90...100

CDM-Rm Mini 35 W/942 GX10 15 CDM-Rm Mini 35 W/942 GX10 25

*** warm: up to 3300 K intermediate: 3300 to 5300 K cool: above 5300 K

The Lighting Handbook

148

Technical data (lamp table)

Designation (ZVEI/LBS) Metal halide lamps HIPAR16/40*

Wattage [W]

Max. dimensions [mm] Length x

Cap

Luminous flux levels [lm] Max. lighting intensity [cd]

Luminous effic.** [lm/W]

Light col.***

35

55 x 50

GX10

3000

warm, intermediate

HIPAR16/40* HIPAR16/25* HIPAR16/40* HIPAR16/60* HIPAR20/10* HIPAR20/25* HIPAR20/10 HIPAR20/25* HIPAR20/30 HIPAR20/10 HIPAR20/25* HIPAR20/30 HIPAR30/10* HIPAR30/25* HIPAR30/10 HIPAR30/25* HIPAR30/30 HIPAR30/10 HIPAR30/30

35 50 50 50 20 20 35 35 35 35 35 35 20 20 35 35 35 35 35

65 x 50 65 x 50 65 x 50 65 x 50 92 x 64 92 x 64 95 x 65 95 x 65 95 x 65 95 x 65 95 x 65 95 x 65 124 x 95 124 x 95 125 x 97 125 x 97 125 x 97 120 x 95 120 x 95

GX10 GX10 GX10 GX10 E27 E27 E27 E27 E27 E27 E27 E27 E27 E27 E27 E27 E27 E27 E27

2800 11500 7000 3000 13000 3750 1600021500 6950 40005000 2200023000 7500 50005400 19800 4900 3600036700 10200 7000 52000 7800

inter mediate warm warm warm warm warm inter mediate inter mediate inter mediate warm warm warm warm warm inter mediate inter mediate inter mediate warm warm

* Core type ** (without control gear) The Lighting Handbook

149

Colour tempera- Colour Rendering tures [K] Index CRI/R a

OSRAM POWERSTAR/ POWERBALL

PHILIPS MASTERcolour

SYLVANIA

GE ConstantColour

3000, 4200

90...100

CMH35/MR16/V60/ UVC/930/GX10/WFL (ULTRA), CMH35/MR16/V60/ UVC/942/GX10/WFL CMH20PAR20/ UVC/830/E27/SP CMH20PAR20/ UVC/830/E27/FL CMH35/PAR20/ UVC/942/E27/SP10 CMH35/PAR20/ UVC/942/E27/FL25 CMH35/PAR20/ UVC/830/E27/SP CMH35/PAR20/ UVC/830/E27/FL CMH20PAR30/UVC/830/ E27/SP10 CMH20PAR30/ UVC/830/E27/FL25 CMH35/PAR30/ UVC/942/E27/SP10 CMH35/PAR30/ UVC/942/E27/FL25

4200 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 4200 4200 4200 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 4200 4200 4200 3000 3000

90...100 90...100 90...100 90...100 8089 8089 90...100 90...100 90...100 80...89 80...89 80...89 8089 8089 90...100 90...100 90...100 90...100 90...100

HCI-PAR20 35/942 NDL PB SP 10D HCI-PAR20 35/942 NDL PB FL 30D HCI-PAR20 35/830 WDL PB SP 10D HCI-PAR20 35/830 WDL PB FL 30D HCI-PAR30 35/942 NDL PB SP 10D HCI-PAR30 35/942 NDL PB FL 30D

CDM-Rm Mini 35 W/942 GX10 40 CDM-Rm Elite Mini 50 W/830 GX10 25 CDM-Rm Elite Mini 50 W/830 GX10 40 CDM-Rm Elite Mini 50 W/830 GX10 60 CDM-R 35 W/942 PAR20 10 CDM-R 35 W/942 PAR20 30 CDM-R 35 W/830 PAR20 10 CDM-R 35 W/830 PAR20 30 CDM-R Elite 35 W/930 PAR30L10 CDM-R Elite 35 W/930 PAR30L30

*** warm: up to 3300 K intermediate: 3300 to 5300 K cool: above 5300 K The Lighting Handbook

150

Technical data (lamp table)

Designation (ZVEI/LBS) Metal halide lamps HIPAR30/10 HIPAR30/25* HIPAR30/30 HIPAR30/10 HIPAR30/15* HIPAR30/30 HIPAR30/40 HIPAR30/10 HIPAR30/30 HIPAR30/30 HIPAR30/10 HIPAR30/15* HIPAR30/30 HIPAR30/40

Wattage [W]

Max. dimensions [mm] Length x

Cap

Luminous flux levels [lm] Max. lighting intensity [cd]

Luminous effic.** [lm/W]

Light col.***

35 35 35 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70

125 x 97 125 x 97 125 x 97 125 x 97 124 x 95 125 x 97 120 x 95 120 x 95 120 x 95 120 x 95 125 x 97 124 x 95 125 x 97 125 x 97 Length x

E27 E27 E27 E27 E27 E27 E27 E27 E27 E27 E27 E27 E27 E27

3960045000 11000 74008000 6300070000 33500 13000 9000 6000070000 1200015000 10000 68000 43000 13500 890010000 Luminous flux levels [lm]

warm warm warm inter mediate inter mediate inter mediate inter mediate warm warm warm warm warm warm warm

HIPAR64/6

1000

175 x 207 Length x

G38

76000 Luminous flux levels [lm]

63

inter mediate

HIR HIR-CE High-pressure sodium discharge lamps HST-CRI* HST

150 150

93 x 95 106 x 95 Length x

AMP AMP

5200 (25 mm) 5000 (25 mm) Luminous flux levels [lm]

35 33

inter mediate inter mediate

35 35

149 x 32 135 x 32

PG12-1 E27

1300 2000

37 57

warm warm

* Core type ** (without control gear)

The Lighting Handbook

151

Colour tempera- Colour Rendering tures [K] Index CRI/R a

OSRAM POWERSTAR/ POWERBALL

PHILIPS MASTERcolour CDM-R 35 W/830 PAR30L10 CDM-R 35 W/830 PAR30L30 CDM-R 70 W/942 PAR30L10 CDM-R 70 W/942 PAR30L30 CDM-R 70 W/942 PAR30L40 CDM-R Elite 70 W/930 PAR30L10 CDM-R Elite 70 W/930 PAR30L30 CDM-R Elite 70 W/930 PAR30L40 CDM-R 70 W/830 PAR30L10 CDM-R 70 W/830 PAR30L30 CDM-R 70 W/830 PAR30L40

SYLVANIA

GE ConstantColour

3000 3000 3000 4200 4200 4200 4200 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000

80...89 8089 80...89 80...89 90...100 80...89 90...100 90...100 90...100 90...100 80...89 8089 80...89 80...89

HCI-PAR30 35/830 WDL PB SP 10D HCI-PAR30 35/830 WDL PB FL 30D HCI-PAR30 70/942 NDL PB SP 10D HCI-PAR30 70/942 NDL PB FL 30D HCI-PAR30 70/830 WDL PB SP 10D HCI-PAR30 70/830 WDL PB FL 30D HCI-PAR30 70/830 WDL PB WFL 40D

CMH35/PAR30/ UVC/830/E27/SP10 CMH35/PAR30/ UVC/830/E27/FL25 CMH70/PAR30/ UVC/942/E27/SP CMH70/PAR30/ UVC/942/E27/FL CMH70/PAR30/ UVC/830/E27/SP CMH70/PAR30/ UVC/830/E27/FL

4000

80

CSI1000/PAR64/../G38 (29333, 29336)

4200 4200

85 96

HQI-R 150 W/ NDL/FO

CDM-SA/R 150 W/942 MASTER

2500 2050

83 < 40

SDW-T 35 W

SHP-TS 35 W E27

*** warm: up to 3300 K intermediate: 3300 to 5300 K cool: above 5300 K

The Lighting Handbook

152

Technical data (lamp table)

Designation (ZVEI/LBS)

Wattage [W]

Max. dimensions [mm] Length x

Cap

Luminous flux levels [lm]

Luminous effic.** [lm/W]

Light col.***

High-pressure sodium discharge lamps HST-CRI HST-CRI* HST-CRI HST-CRI* HST-MF HST HST-MF HST HST-MF HST HST HST-CRI HST-MF 100 100 50 50 50 50 70 70 100 100 150 150 150

96 x 19 149 x 32 96 x 19 149 x 32 156 x 37 156 x 39 156 x 37 156 x 37 211 x 46 211 x 48 211 x 46 211 x 47 211 x 46

GX12-1 PG12-1 GX12-1 PG12-1 E27 E27 E27 E27 E40 E40 E40 E40 E40

4900 5000 2400 2300 40004400 34004000 630065006600 53006000 880010700 90009600 1450015300 13000 1500018000

49 50 48 46 8088 6880 909394 7686 88107 9096 97102 87 100120

warm warm warm warm warm warm warm warm warm warm warm warm warm

HST-CRI HST-MF

250 250

257 x 47 257 x 46

E40 E40

23000 2800033300

92 112133

warm warm

HST HST-CRI HST-MF* HST HST-MF HST

250 400 400 400 600 1000

257 x 46 283 x 47 285 x 46 285 x 46 285 x 52 355400 x 65

E40 E40 E40 E40 E40 E40

2700029000 3700038000 530005550056500 4800050000 8500090000 130000

108116 9395 133139141 120125 142150 130

warm warm warm warm warm warm

* Core type ** (without control gear)

The Lighting Handbook

153

Colour tempera- Colour Rendering tures [K] Index CRI/R a

OSRAM VIALOX

PHILIPS MASTER SDW-TG Mini 100 W SDW-T 100 W SDW-TG Mini 50 W SDW-T 50 W SON-T PIA Plus/APIA Plus Xtra 50 W SON-T PIA Plus/APIA Plus Xtra 70 W SON-T PIA Plus/APIA Plus Xtra 100 W SON-T COMFORT 150 W/621 SON-T PIA 150 W Hg free SON-T PIA Plus/APIA Plus Xtra 150 W SON-T COMFORT 250 W/621 SON-T PIA 250 W Hg free SON-T PIA Plus/APIA Plus Xtra 250 W SON-T COMFORT 400 W/621 SON-T PIA Plus/APIA Plus Xtra 400 W SON-T PIA 400 W Hg free SON-T PIA Plus 600 W SON-T 1000 W

SYLVANIA

GE

2500 2550 2500 2500 1900, 1950, 2000 2000, 2050 1900, 1950, 2000, 2100 2000, 2050 1950, 2000, 2050, 2100 2000 1900, 2000, 2050 2150, 2200 1950, 2000, 2050, 2100, 2150

80...89 83 80...89 83 < 40 < 40 < 40 < 40 < 40 < 40 < 40 60...69 < 40

NAV-T 50 SUPER 4Y NAV-T 50 NAV-T 70 SUPER 4Y NAV-T 70 (4Y) NAV-T 100 SUPER 4Y NAV-T 100 NAV-T 150 (4Y) NAV-T 150 SUPER 4Y

SHP-TS 50 W CL/E (Twinarc) SHP-TS 70 W CL/E (Hg-free/Twinarc) SHP-TS 100 W E40 (Hg-free/Twinarc) SHP-T 150 W E40 SHP-TS 150 W E40 (Hg-free/Twinarc)

LU50/85/HO/T27 LU50/90/(SBY/)T/27 LU70/90/HO/T27 LU70/90/(SBY/)T12/27 LU100/100/HO/T/40 LU100/100/(SBY/)T/40 LU150/100/(SBY/T/)40 LU150/CL-DL/T/40 LU150/150/HO/T/40

2150, 2200 1950, 2000, 2050, 2100, 2150

60...69 < 40

NAV-T 250 SUPER 4Y

SHP-TS 250 W E40 (Hg-free/Twinarc)

LU250/CL-DL/T/40 LU250/CL-DL/T/40

1950, 2000, 2050, 2100 2150, 2200 1950, 2000, 2050, 2100 1950, 2000, 2050 1950, 2000, 2050, 2100 2000, 2050

< 40 60...69 < 40 < 40 < 40 < 40

NAV-T 250 (4Y) NAV-T 400 SUPER 4Y NAV-T 400 (4Y) NAV-T 600 SUPER 4Y NAV-T 1000

SHP-T 250 W E40 SHP-TS 400 W E40 (Hg-free/Twinarc) SHP-T 400 W E40 SHP-TS 600 W E40 SHP-T 1000 W E40

LU250/(SBY/)T/40 LU400/CL-DL/T/40 LU400/HO/T/40 LU400/(SBY/)T/40 LU600/HO/T/40 LU1000/110/T/40

*** warm: up to 3300 K intermediate: 3300 to 5300 K cool: above 5300 K

The Lighting Handbook

154

Technical data (lamp table)

Designation (ZVEI/LBS)

Wattage [W]

Max. dimensions [mm] Length/ contact gap 114.2 132 206 191 206 256 334 Length x

Cap

Luminous flux levels [lm]

Luminous effic.** [lm/W]

Light col.***

High-pressure sodium discharge lamps HST HST-DE-MF 70 PG 12-1 HST-DE-MF HST-DE* HST-DE HST-DE* HST-DE HST-DE 150 250 250 400 400 1000

RX7s RX7s-24 Fc2 RX7s ? Fc2 RX7s ? RX7s ?

6600 15000 28000 23000 49000 43000 137000

94 100 112 92 123 108 137

warm warm warm warm warm warm warm

HSE
HIE

35 50 50

165 x 72 156x70165x72 156x70165x72

E27 E27 E27

1800 34003600 33004000

51 6872 6680

warm warm warm

HSE HSE

HSE HSE

70 70

156x70165x72 152x70165x72

E27 E27

50005900 56006300

7184 8090

warm warm

HSE HSE-MF HSE HSE-CRI HSE-MF

100 100 100 150 150

184 x 76 186 x 75 186 x 76 227 x 91 226 x 90

E27 E40 E40 E40 E40

9500 800010400 85009200 1200012500 1450017500

95 80104 8592 8083 97117

warm warm warm warm warm

HSE HSE-CRI HSE-MF*

150 250 250

226 x 90 226 x 91 226 x 90

E40 E40 E40

1400015000 22000 2700032000

93100 88 108128

warm warm warm

HSE HSE-CRI

250 400

226 x 90 290 x 122

E40 E40

2500028800 3600037000

100115 9093

warm warm

* Core type ** (without control gear)

The Lighting Handbook

155

Colour tempera- Colour Rendering tures [K] Index CRI/R a

OSRAM VIALOX

PHILIPS MASTER

SYLVANIA

GE

2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000

< 40 < 40 < 40 < 40 < 40 < 40 < 40

NAV-TS 70 SUPER 4Y NAV-TS 150 SUPER 4Y NAV-TS 250 NAV-TS 400

LU250/TD LU400/TD LU1000/TD

2050 1900, 2000, 2050 1950, 2000, 2050

< 40 < 40 < 40

NAV-E 50(/E) 4Y NAV-E 50 SUPER 4Y

SON 50 W SON PIA 50 W, SON PIA Plus/APIA Plus Xtra 50 W SON 70 W SON PIA 70 W, SON PIA Plus/APIA Plus Xtra 70 W SON PIA Plus/APIA Plus Xtra 100 W SON COMFORT 150 W/621 SON PIA 150 W Hg free, SON PIA Plus/APIA Plus Xtra 150 W SON COMFORT 250 W/621 SON PIA 250 W Hg free, SON PIA Plus/APIA Plus Xtra 250 W SON COMFORT 400 W/621

SHP-S 35 W/E27 SHP-S 50 W/E27 (Twinarc) SHP 50 W/CO/E/E27

LU50/90/(SBY/)D/27

1900, 2000, 2050 1950, 2000, 2050

< 40 < 40

NAV-E 70(/E) 4Y NAV-E 70 SUPER 4Y

SHP-S 70 W/E27 (Hg-free/Twinarc) SHP 70 W/CO/E/E27

LU70/90/(SBY/)D/27

2050 1950, 2000, 2050 2050 2150, 2200 1950, 2000, 2050

< 40 < 40 < 40 60...69 < 40

NAV-E 100 SUPER 4Y NAV-E 100 NAV-E 150 SUPER 4Y NAV-E 150 (4Y) NAV-E 250 SUPER 4Y NAV-E 250 (4Y)

SHP-S 100W/E27 SHP-S 100 W/E40 (Hg-free/Twinarc) SHP-S 150 W/E40 (Hg-free/Twinarc) SHP 150 W/E40 SHP-S 250 W/E40 (Hg-free/Twinarc) SHP 250 W/E40

LU100/100/HO/D/40 LU100/100/(SBY/)D/40 LU150/CL-DL/D/40 LU150/100/HO/D/40

1900, 2000, 2050 2150, 2200 1950, 2000, 2050

< 40 60...69 < 40

LU150/100/(SBY/)D/40 LU250/CL-DL/D/40 LU250/HO/D/40

1950, 2000, 2050 2150, 2200

< 40 60...69

LU250/(SBY/)D/40 LU400/CL-DL/D/40

*** warm: up to 3300 K intermediate: 3300 to 5300 K cool: above 5300 K

The Lighting Handbook

156

Technical data (lamp table)

Designation (ZVEI/LBS)

Wattage [W]

Max. dimensions [mm] Length x

Cap

Luminous flux levels [lm]

Luminous effic.** [lm/W]

Light col.***

High-pressure sodium discharge lamps HSE-MF*

HIE

400

290 x 120

E40

4800056500

120141

warm

HSE HSE

400 1000

290 x 120 400 x 165

E40 E40

4700048000 120000130000

118125 120130

warm warm

* Core type ** (without control gear)

The Lighting Handbook

157

Colour tempera- Colour Rendering tures [K] Index CRI/R a

OSRAM VIALOX

PHILIPS MASTER

SYLVANIA

GE

1950, 2000, 2050, 2100 2000, 2050 2000, 2100

< 40

NAV-E 400 SUPER SON PIA 400 W Hg free, 4Y SON PIA Plus/APIA Plus Xtra 400 W NAV-E 400 (4Y) NAV-E 1000 SON 1000 W

SHP-S 400 W/E40 (Hg-free/Twinarc) SHP 400 W/E40

LU400/HO/D/40

< 40 < 40

LU400/(SBY/)D/40 LU1000/D/40

*** warm: up to 3300 K intermediate: 3300 to 5300 K cool: above 5300 K

The Lighting Handbook

Chapter 6

Lighting control and control gear

Communication protocols 160 Terminology and circuit diagram 160 DALI: General information | Features | Device type 161 DSI: General information | Features 163 Differences between DALI and DSI 163 DALI and DSI: Control line 164 LUXMATE bus: General information | Features 165 LUXMATE bus: Bus domain and bus power supply 165 LUXMATE bus: Bus line and cable lengths 166 Comparison: LUXMATE bus KNX (EIB) 167 DMX: General information | Features | System design 168 Lighting control systems 170 LUXMATE: Simple dimming 170 switchDIM: General information | Wiring scheme 171 CIRCLE KIT: General information | Wiring scheme 172 CIRCLEtune KIT: Wiring scheme 172 LUXMATE: Overview of lighting control systems 174 LUXMATE DIMLITE: General information | Overview 175 LUXMATE DIMLITE: Selection according to control gear and functionality 177 LUXMATE DIMLITE basic wiring: Dimming via momentary action switch using 178 LUXMATE DIMLITE basic wiring: Daylight-based dimming using 180 LUXMATE DIMLITE basic wiring: Multifunctional lighting control 182 LUXMATE EMOTION: General information | Wiring overview 184 LUXMATE LITENET: General information | Wiring overview 186 LUXMATE lighting management: Overview | Functions | Product ranges 190 LUXMATE lighting management: Differentiation between DALI (EMOTION, LITENET) and DMX (E:cue, VCU) 192 Control devices Functions overview 193 193

The Lighting Handbook

160

Communication protocols
Terminology and circuit diagram A bus is a system for transferring data between several participants via a joint transmission path. In electronic engineering, a control line is a connection (cable, wire) between one transmitter and one receiver. Via this connection the receiver is switched to a different operating mode. Communication is either bidirectional (DALI) or just uni directional (DSI). A communication protocol is an agreement according to which data transfer bet w een two or more participants is carried out. In its most simple form, a proto c ol can be defined as the rules deter m ining the structure, meaning and synchronisation of communication.

PC or controller

Input module Momentaryaction switch Output module (transmitter) Bus: LUXMATE, KNX

Control line: DALI DSI

Luminaire

Electronic ballast (receiver)

The Lighting Handbook

161

DALI: General information The term DALI stands for Digital Addressable Lighting Interface. DALI is not a building management bus system, but a protocol for digital address i ng of technical lighting control gear. DALI is a standard defined by several manufacturers of luminaires and electronic ballasts: IEC 60929 allows the combination of devices of various manufacturers. However, the standard defines only output devices (control gear), not input devices such as sensors or control units. Hence, input devices with DALI connection are addressed in a manufacturer-specific way! IEC 62386 specifies requirements placed on control gear allocated to specific types of device.

DALI: Features Usable data transmission rate: 1200 bit/s Max. 64 control units per control circuit Max. 16 groups per control gear can be assigned Max. 16 scenes per control unit can be programmed Bidirectional: reports information such as faulty lamps, dimming levels etc. Max. system current of 250 mA from central interface supply (each electronic ballast takes up a maximum of 2 mA of current load) Two-wire control line (potential-free, polarity-free, unshielded, no terminal resistors) Voltage drop between transmitter and receiv er must not be more than 2 V Application: general lighting (small number of lighting points, static light)

The Lighting Handbook

162

Communication protocols

DALI: Device type IEC subcommittee SC 34C is in charge of the IEC 62386 Digital addressable lighting interface series of standards.

IEC 62386-1xx IEC 62386-101:2009-06 IEC 62386-102:2009-06 IEC 62386-2xx IEC 62386-201:2009-06 IEC 62386-202:2009-06 IEC 62386-203:2009-06 IEC 62386-204:2009-06 IEC 62386-205:2009-06 IEC 62386-206:2009-06 IEC 62386-207:2009-06 IEC 62386-208:2009-06 IEC 62386-209:2011-06 IEC 62386-210:2011-04

Parts 1xx: General requirements Part 101: System Part 102: Control devices Parts 2xx: Particular requirements for control gear Part 201: Fluorescent lamps (device type 0) Part 202: Emergency lighting with separate battery (device type 1) Part 203: Discharge lamps (except fluorescent lamps) (device type 2) Part 204: LV halogen lamps (device type 3) Part 205: Supply voltage controllers for incandescent lamps (device type 4) Part 206: Conversion from digital signal into D. C. voltage (device type 5) Part 207: P articular requirements for control gear LED modules (device type 6) Part 208: Switching function (device type 7) Part 209: Colour/colour temperature control (device type 8) Part 210: Sequencer (device type 9)

The Lighting Handbook

163

DSI: General information The term DSI stands for Digital Serial Interface. DSI is not a building management bus system, but a protocol for digital addressing of technical lighting control gear. DSI is a manufacturer-specific interface defined by Zumtobel. DSI is the predecessor of DALI with the main goal of replacing analogue addressing (110 V) of control gear with digital addressing. Devices with DSI and DALI connection are not compatible and cannot be used jointly in one control circuit.

DSI: Features Usable data transmission rate: 1200 bit/s Depending on the output module: 10 to 100 control units per control circuit Max. 20 scenes per control unit can be programmed Unidirectional: reports only faulty lamps (depending on the technical design of the electronic ballast) Two-wire control line (potential-free, polarity-free, unshielded, no terminal resistors) Application: general lighting (small number of lighting points, static light)

Differences between DALI and DSI Each DALI control unit may have different intensity levels, while all DSI (and 110 V) control units always have the same intensity level. With DSI, units are allocated to groups by wiring; with DALI, group allocation is performed via software. With DSI (and 110 V), only a unidirec tional flow of information (from the controller to the controlled unit) is possible. DSI and DALI units cannot be operated jointly in one control circuit.

The Lighting Handbook

164

Communication protocols

DALI and DSI: Control line Any type of insulated line for mains voltage is admissible if the voltage drop is not more than 2 V at 250 mA. DALI components are usually powered via a separate mains power supply. The insulation of the digital interface complies with basic insulation requirements; verification is effected in accordance with the IEC 60 928 standard. Thus, SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage) is not guaranteed. The cables connecting the digital interface with the mains power supply lines (e.g. 230 V) may be relocated if the in sulation conditions (2 x basic insulation) are maintained. The two free wires of a 5 x 1.5mm NYM cable are frequently used as control lines (together with the other wires for phase, neutral and protective ground conductors).
DALI (DA)

Neutral conductor

e.g. NYM 5 x

Protective earth

Phase

DALI (DA)

Cross-section Length 2 x 0.50 mm 2 x 0.75 mm 2 x 1.00 mm 2 x 1.50 mm 116 m 174 m 232 m 300 m

The Lighting Handbook

165

LUXMATE bus: General information Proprietary bus developed by Zumtobel, so that a combination of devices by different manufacturers is not possible Bus domain, the smallest logical unit Max. 99 rooms Max. 99 addresses per room Max. 99 groups per room Max. 500 devices connected to bus coupler (max. 100 devices per bus power supply)

LUXMATE bus: Features Usable data transmission rate: 2400 bit/s Max. 20 scenes per control unit can be programmed Bidirectional: reports information Two-wire control line (potential-free, polarity-free, unshielded, no terminal resistors) Loop resistance for entire line within one bus domain must not exceed 11 ohms Total length of line: max. 1000 m (with 2 x 1.5 mm) Dimming range 1 to 100 % Application: general lighting (large number of lighting points, static light)

LUXMATE bus: Bus domain and bus power supply Bus domain Smallest logical unit Max. 99 rooms Max. 99 addresses per room M ax. 500 devices connected with bus coupler Bus power supply LM-BV: maximum of 100 modules LM-BVS35: maximum of 35 modules
99 99

Room 3 Raum Raum 3 3 Adress 1 2 3 ... Adresse Adresse 1 1 2 2 3 3 ... ... Room 2 Raum Raum 2 2 Adress 1 2 3 ... Adresse Adresse 1 1 2 2 3 3 ... ... Room 1 Raum Raum 1 1 Adress 1 2 3 ... Adresse Adresse 1 1 2 2 3 3 ... ... 99 99 99 99 99 99 99

LM-BV (LM-BVS35) bus power supply LM-BK bus coupler

The Lighting Handbook

166

Communication protocols

LUXMATE bus: Bus line and cable lengths

Bus line Twisted two-core line (1 lay each 5metres) for low-voltage installation Cable lengths Overall length for one bus power supply: max. 1000 m Between LUXMATE devices (AB): Max. 350 m with 2 x 0.75 mm Max. 500 m with 2 x 1.5 mm From bus power supply to the most distant LUXMATE device (A,B): Max. 350 m with 2 x 0.75 mm Max. 500 m with 2 x 1.5 mm

A 350 m

AB 350 m

LM-BV

B 350 m

Cable length test report LUXMATE PROFESSIONAL Voltage measurement (VOLT): measurement bet w een B1 and B2 D. C. voltage Current measurement (AMPERE): measurement at B1 or B2 measured value must not exceed 150 mA Loop resistance (OHM): 1) disconnect LM-BV from power, 2) establish wire bridge at LM-BV between B1 and B2, 3) perform measurement at the last actuator of the bus line between B1 and B2. The loop resistance measured must not exceed 11ohms! If a loop resistance between 14 and 16 ohms is measured, the service report must indicate that the bus line is too long; electrician must be informe d! If the loop resistance measured is 16 ohms or higher, commissioning will be terminated! The cable length is calculated as follows: Cable length = loop resistance x rho x cross-section/ divided by two L = R x rho x A / : 2 A = cross-section/rho = 56 for copper LUXMATE guidelines: 1.5 mm 2 cross-section = max. bus line of 500 m 1.0 mm 2 cross-section = max. bus line of 300 m/ with 2 x 2 x 0.8 cable, both pairs must be connected 0.75 mm 2 cross-section = max. bus line of 250 m 0.5 mm 2 cross-section = max. bus line of 150 m

Loop resistance in a bus circuit must not exceed 11 ohms (applies to all components of the bus power supply). Bus and mains in one cable (5 x 1.5 mm) are admissible only for 5 m stub lengths each. For tracks/trunking: bus lines should be cross-linked at least every 7 m.

Cross-section Length 2 x 0.50 mm 2 x 0.75 mm 2 x 1.00 mm 2 x 1.50 mm 150 m 250 m 300 m 500 m

The Lighting Handbook

167

Comparison: LUXMATE bus KNX (EIB)

Sensor

Control points

Windows

Screens

Blinds

Control points

Sensor

Luminaires

LUXMATE Bus

DALI 3 x 64 Address

LITENET flexis N2 LITENET netlink with server functionality

LITENET netlink TCP/IP

PC with LITENET insite management software

LUXMATE Standard cables are used for installation Protected against reversed polarity! General operation immediately after installation (installation test)

Easy addressing from each location within the building

Supply voltage

Actuators
Blinds Temperature

Lighting Dimming/switching actuator Blinds actuator Blinds sensor Binary output Timer BUS line 1 Binary input

Momentaryaction switch Threshold value indicator

Ventilator Switching actuator 230 VAC

Sensors

KNX A specially shielded EIB cable must be used for installation Not protected against reversed polarity (+/)

No operation possible without addressing (no installation test) Addressing only directly on the luminaire and via control points using special ETSsoftware

The Lighting Handbook

168

Communication protocols

DMX: General information DMX was developed in the United States for stage equipment in 1986. Previously, the slider settings for spotlights were converted to analogue voltage levels between 1 and 10V. Subsequently these voltages were transmitted in parallel to the dimmers via one control line for each spotlight. This analogue dimming worked well with a small number of spotlights. However, stages and shows became bigger and bigger. The cabling included a large number of parallel 110 V control lines became too complex and inflexible. DMX was developed, with the slider positions being converted into digital values. ALL dimming levels are then transmitted one after the other via ONE joint control line.

DMX: Features Usable data transmission rate: 250000bit/s Refresh rate: 30 times per second Max. 512 channels (addresses) per universe (control circuit) Max. of 32 luminaires directly one after the other; for more luminaires, a splitter is required Unidirectional: no information is reported Two-wire control line (shielded, terminal resistance) Application: illumination of faades (large number of lighting points, dynamic light)

The Lighting Handbook

169

DMX: System design

DMX signal generator Data OUT DMX splitter Data IN Data IN

Data OUT

DMX luminaire Addr. 13

Data OUT

DMX luminaire Addr. 13

Data IN

DMX luminaire Addr. 1518

Data OUT

Data IN

DMX luminaire Addr. 1518

Data OUT

DMX luminaire Addr. 510512 Data OUT

Data IN

DMX luminaire Addr. 510512 Data OUT

Data IN

Terminal resistor

Terminal resistor

max. 32 receivers in case of standard DMX connection

The Lighting Handbook

170

Lighting control systems

LUXMATE: Simple dimming switchDIM Dimming for individual or multiple luminaires

CIRCLE KIT Lighting scenes for luminaire groups

PE L N

The Lighting Handbook

171

switchDIM: General information Benets Easiest way of dimming an individual lumin aire or a small group of luminaires Only a conventional momentary-action switch is required No addressing necessary Features Function: Switching by pressing the button briefly Dimming by pressing the button longer Asynchronous dimming: switching time (approx. 0.2 seconds) depends on the timer in the control unit. Due to component tolerances, there is no exact switching point for several luminaires within a group. Asynchronicity may occur. Recommendation: use switchDIM for no more than 2 luminaires. If more luminaires are involved, a controller such as DIMLITE single is feasible. Works only with a momentary-action switch, not with a regular switch!

DALI D1 DSI C2

N L

switchDIM
Wiring of electronic ballast with switchDIM function.

The Lighting Handbook

In

172

Lighting control systems

CIRCLE KIT and CIRCLEtune KIT: General information

CIRCLE KIT: Wiring scheme

Control Control Apparecchi devices devic comando

L N PE

Benets CIRCLE KIT: easiest way of applying lighting scenes CIRCLEtune KIT: easiest way of using colour temperature control Commissioning and operation via CIRCLE CSx control point Several CIRCLE control points can be connected in parallel Bus power supply already included in the package Features 3 lighting scenes can be individually programme d Dimming of 2 luminaire groups Bus power supply for up to 64 DALI-dimmable luminaires One CIRCLE control point covers 3 DALI loads Control point available in white and silver

Mains 230 V/50 Hz Mains 230 Rete V/50 230 Hz V/50 Hz L N PE

DA DA

EMOTION BV2 EMOTION BV2 bus Alimentazione bus power supply EMOTION supply bus powerBV2

CIRCLEtune KIT: Wiring scheme

SceneAttivazione Scene call-up call-up delle scene di luce
Mains 230 V/50 Hz

Control devices

L N PE

L N PE

DA DA

EMOTION BV2 bus power supply

L N D v ~

phase neutral control line earth AC voltage

Lighting Ligh Sce sc

PE protective earth

The Lighting Handbook

173

ces

Control Control units units

Lamp control Lamp control gear gear

LampsLamps
FluorescentFluorescent lamps T26/T16 lamps T26/T16 TC-L/TC-DEL/TC-TEL TC-L/TC-DEL/TC-TEL

DALI control DALI line control line e.g. NYM 2 e.g. x 1.5 NYM mm 2 x 1.5 mm up to 300 m uplong to 300 m long

L N DA DA

L DALI electronic DALIballasts electronic ballasts N DA DA

12 11

12 11

10 9

10 9

DA DA

y PCA, PHD, TE, max. 64 off PCA, PHD, TE, max. 64 off
DA DA

DALI LED luminaires DALI LED luminaires DA e.g.DA PANOSe.g. INFINITY PANOS INFINITY

3 scene keys 3 scene keys

2 lighting groups 2 lighting groups

N L

N L

DALI-CSx DALI-CSx

N L DA DA

DALINLED luminaires DALI LED luminaires e.g. L LIGHT FIELDS e.g. LIGHT FIELDS
DA DA

Control units

Lamp control gear/Lamps

DALI control line e.g. NYM 2 x 1.5 mm up to 300 m long

DA DA

cene hting 1: scene screen-based 1: screen-based work work Lighting Lighting scene scene 2: good 2: good morning morning Lighting Lighting scene 3: scene conference 3: conference
PCA, PHD, TE, max. 64 off
TUNABLE WHITE luminaires e.g. ARCOS

3 scene keys

2 lighting groups

CIRCLE tune

N L DA DA

The Lighting Handbook

Individual Individual controlcontrol of luminaire of luminaire groupsgroups

174

Lighting control systems

LUXMATE: Overview of lighting control systems

LUXMATE DIMLITE Lighting management for individual rooms

LUXMATE EMOTION Lighting management for several rooms

LUXMATE LITENET / PROFESSIONAL Lighting management for buildings with lighting and blinds control

DMX lighting management Dynamic lighting scenarios for outer faades

The Lighting Handbook

175

LUXMATE DIMLITE: General information Benets Synchronous dimming AUTO detect: DALI and DSI outputs with automatic identification (mixed operation not admissible) AUTO setup: automatic initialisation, no addressing necessary Reduction of stand-by losses: automatic power disconnection of lighting actuators via integrated relay Operation using all conventional 230 V momentary-action light switches; several momentary-action switches can be connect e d in parallel Features 2 models: for installation in switch cabinet for 2 or 4 luminaire groups, and for installation in luminaire or recessed into ceiling for 2 or 4 luminaire groups, including strain relief Up to 3 lighting scenes, of which scene 1 features daylight-based control (depending on additional devices) Modular range of functions, to be individually combined: daylight-based control presence detector (ONLY OFF, ON/OFF, CORRIDOR with 10 % dimming level) IR remote control CIRCLE comfort control point (2 groups, 3 scenes) scene or group module

The Lighting Handbook

176

Lighting control systems

LUXMATE DIMLITE: Overview

Size of system Number of DSI/dim 2save luminaires

Functions Control by momentaryaction switch

Components to be integrated Daylight-based control

Convenience control point

Number of DALI/dim 2save luminaires

Presence detector

Number of groups

DIMLITE basic module DIMLITE single* DIMLITE daylight* DIMLITE multifunction 2ch** DIMLITE multifunction 4ch**

1 2 2 4

25 50 50 100

25 50 100 200

* for installation in luminaire or recessed into ceiling ** for installation in switch cabinet (DIN rail mounted device)

The Lighting Handbook

Remote control

Lighting scene

Dimming

177

LUXMATE DIMLITE: Selection according to control gear and functionality

LUXMATE control unit

Lamp control gear (electronic ballast, transformer, ...)

1. Select appropriate lamp control gear

Lamps GLS lamps PAR lamps HV halogen incandescent lamps LV halogen incandescent lamps Fluorescent lamps LED Dimming range 0100 % 0100 % 0100 % 0100 % 1100 % 0100 % All control gear with DALI/DSI control input Phase dimmer: 50010005000 VA Phase dimmer: 50010005000 VA Phase dimmer: 50010005000 VA electronic dimmable transformer: 105 VA + 150 VA electronic dimmable ballast electronic dimmable LED converter 1 ch./3 ch.

2. Select control function required

Function Control Module name for DSI/DALI/dimsave DIMLITE single

1-channel dimming, lighting scene, presence momentary-action switch, presence detector 2-channel dimming, daylight, presence 2- or 4-channel multifunction

momentary-action switch, presence detector, light sensor DIMLITE daylight momentary-action switch, Circle, light sensor, DIMLITE 4ch* (4-channel) presence detector, IR remote control unit

All modules available for installation in luminaire or recess into ceiling * only available as housing for installation in switch cabinet

The Lighting Handbook

178

Lighting control systems

of lig Pres integ ONL

LUXMATE DIMLITE basic wiring: Dimming via momentary-action switch using

Control units
Mains 230 V/50 Hz AC

L N PE

Conventional double momentary-action light switch On/Off/Dim Conventional momentary-action light switch scene

*
L N T T PIR Sc

**

Conventional presence detector

* Saving the pre-set lighting level ** Alternative: When using a single momentary-action switch, fit jumper on terminal T und T

Sn

L N T D v ~

phase neutral momentary-action switch input control line earth AC voltage

PE protective earth

The Lighting Handbook

of of lighting lighting scenes scenes Presence Presence detector detector can can be be ntegrated, integrated, 33 functional functional pro pro les: les: ONLY ONLY OFF, OFF, ON/OFF, ON/OFF, CORRIDOR CORRIDOR

switch switch 230 230 VV Several Several momentary-action momentary-action switches switches can can be be connected connected in in parallel parallel

Designs Designs available: available: installed installed in in luminaire, luminaire, recessed recessed into into ceiling ceiling (using (using strain strain relief relief supplied) supplied)
179

Control Control devices devices

Lamp Lamp control control gear gear

Lamps Lamps
Fluorescent lamps T26/T16 Fluorescent lamps T26/T16 TC-L/TC-DEL/TC-TEL TC-L/TC-DEL/TC-TEL

DALI/DSI control line DALI/DSI control line e.g. NYM 2 1.5 x 1.5 mm, e.g. NYM 2x mm, 300 long upup to to 300 mm long

DALI/DSI electronic ballasts DALI/DSI electronic ballasts L L NN D1D1 D2 D2

L N T T R PIR Sc

DA DA DA DA

DIMLITE DIMLITE single single

max. 25 control gear max. 25 control gear

Snap-on Snap-on strain strain relief relief

L L NN DA DADALI DALI LED LED luminaires luminaires DALI LED-luminaires e.g.: PANOS INFINITY DA DAe.g. e.g. PANOS PANOS INFINITY INFINITY

L L NN DA DADALI DALI LED LED luminaires luminaires DALI LED-luminaires DA DAe.g. e.g.: LIGHT FIELDS e.g. LIGHT LIGHT FIELDS FIELDS

The Lighting Handbook

180

Lighting control systems

LUXMATE DIMLITE basic wiring: Daylight-based dimming using

Sensors
Mains 230 V/50 Hz AC

Control units

L N PE

Interior illuminance sensor LSD

L N

Conventional double momentary-action light switch On/Off/Dim

T1

G I G II

T2 PIR/Sc

Conventional presence detector

sn re

Alternatively: conventional momentary-action light switch scene

L N T D v ~

phase neutral
Group 1

PE protective earth momentary-action switch input control line earth AC voltage

LSD daylight sensor

The Lighting Handbook

Automatic Automatic daylight-based daylight-based control control dard dard momentary-action momentary-action light light Alternatively: Alternatively: integration integration of of one one switch switch 230 230 V V lighting lighting scene scene or or a presence a presence Several Several momentary-action momentary-action detector detector possible possible switches switches can can bebe connected connected in in Presence Presence detector detector with with 3 func3 funcparallel parallel tional tional pro pro les: les: ONLY ONLY OFF, OFF, ON/ ON/ DALI/DSI DALI/DSI auto auto identi identi cation cation OFF, OFF, CORRIDOR CORRIDOR (no (no mixed mixed mode) mode)

luminaire, luminaire, recessed recessed into into ceiling ceiling (using (using strain strain relief relief supplied) supplied) or or already already built built into into luminaire luminaire
181

Control Control devices devices

Lamp Lamp control control gear gear

Group I (max. 25 control units) Group I (max. 25 control units)

Lamps Lamps
Fluorescent Fluorescent lamps lamps T26/T16 T26/T16 TC-L/TC-DL/TC-TEL TC-L/TC-DL/TC-TEL

sensor LightLight sensor line line e.g. NYM 2 x mm, 1.5 mm, m long e.g. NYM 2 x 1.5 max.max. 100 100 m long

L N D1 D2

L N D1 D2

DALI/DSI electronic ballast DALI/DSI electronic ballast

L N T1

T2 cPIR/Sc

DIMLITE DIMLITE daylight daylight

S1 S2 G1 DAG1 DA DA G2 DAG2

S1 S2 DA DA DA DA

Group II (max. 25 control units) Group II (max. 25 control units)

Fluorescent Fluorescent lamps lamps T26/T16 T26/T16 TC-L/TC-DL/TC-TEL TC-L/TC-DL/TC-TEL

L N D1 D2

snap-on snap-on strain strain relief relief

DALI/DSI electronic ballast DALI/DSI electronic ballast

DALI/DSI control circuit DALI/DSI control circuit e.g. NYM 2 x mm, 1.5 mm, e.g. NYM 2 x 1.5 m long max.max. 300 300 m long

D1 D2

Group Group 2 2

p1

Control Control line: line: DALI/DSI DALI/DSI Mains Mains

sor sensor

DALI/DSI DALI/DSI channel channel 1 1 DALI/DSI DALI/DSI channel channel 2 2 Presence Presence detector detector Mains Mains

LSD LSD daylight daylight sensor sensor Momentary-action Momentary-action switch switch control control Master Master luminaire: luminaire: DIMLITE DIMLITE daylight daylight
Mains Mains

DALI/DSI DALI/DSI channel channel 2 2

Slave Slave luminaire: luminaire: DALI DALI

MomentaryMomentaryaction action switch switch Group Group 1 1 Group Group 2 2

The Lighting Handbook

182

Lighting control systems

for 2/ DALI autom Redu autom tion o integ

LUXMATE DIMLITE basic wiring: Multifunctional lighting control

ED-EYE light sensor

ED-SENS (PD+IR) Multi-sensor

IRTOUCH

E infrare

max. 300 m at 1.5 mm max. 8 ED units

optional mains isolation facility

Relay

Control IN

Presence detector

Lighting scene / automatic daylight-based control (only 4ch)

All groups

L phase Design notes N D neutral control line PE protective earth

The Lighting Handbook

DIMLI chann functio identic outpu key in AUTO power will be Maxim

for 2/4 luminaire groups DALI and DSI outputs with automatic identication Reducing stand-by loss: automatic power disconnection of lighting actuators via ntegrated relay

to be individually combined: - daylight-based control - presence detectors / movement sensors ONLY OFF, ON/OFF, CORRIDOR - infrared remote control unit - CIRCLE comfort control unit - lighting scene module - group module

them with daylight-based control (depending on additional devices) AUTO setup: automatic initialisation, no addressing required

183

ED-IR infrared receiver

ED-SxED group module

ED-SxED lighting scene module

CIRCLE Cxx control point comfort control unit

Load contactor (optional)

olation

max. 300 m at 1.5 mm max. 25 DALI or 50 DSI per channel

DALI/DSI HFG (1 DALI load)

T26/T16 TC-L/ TC-DEL/TC-TEL fluorescent lamps

DALI/DSI HFG (1 DALI load)

T26/T16 TC-L/ TC-DEL/TC-TEL fluorescent lamps

Channels 3 + 4 only with DIMLITE multifunction 4ch

DALI/DSI HFG (1 DALI load)

T26/T16 TC-L/ TC-DEL/TC-TEL fluorescent lamps

DALI luminaire DALI LED LED-luminaires e.g. e.g.:LIGHT LIGHTFIELDS FIELDS

oups

Group 1 Group 2

Group 3

Group 4

DALI luminairet DALI LED LED-luminaires e.g. e.g.:ONDARIA ONDARIA

DIMLITE multifunction 2ch twochannel unit and DIMLITE multiunction 4ch four-channel unit are dentical except for the number of output channels and corresponding key inputs AUTO setup function: each time the power returns to the unit, the system will be initialised automatically Maximum cable length for all con-

ED-SENS presence detector can CIRCLE control unit calls up three be assigned to individual groups via lighting scenes and OFF; the two IR remote control rocker control switches will dim Installation of light sensor: surfaLighting Groups 1 and 2; Lighting Groups 3 and 4 cannot be individuce-mounted on the ceiling, directed ally dimmed towards the window Conventional 230 V momentary Lighting scenes and daylight setaction switches can be connected tings are entered using key combito the momentary-action switch nations The Lighting Handbook inputs If a light sensor is installed, Ligh-

184

Lighting control systems

LUXMATE EMOTION: General information Benets All in one: operation, control, commis sioning Lighting scenes can be static (scene) or dynamic (show) Extremely easy integration of special luminaires: colour luminaires (RGB), colour temperature, Balanced Light (direct/indirect) Extremely low programming effort: large number of preprogrammed technical lighting functions where only parameters must be entered Extensive energy-saving options: daylight, presence, automated timing

Wiring overview

Operation/Power Supply
Mains 230/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz L N PE EMOTION Touch

Do a

L-L N
Installation box MKXP (please order separately)

DA DA DA DA DALI 1 DALI 2 DA DA

EMOTION-BVS2*

ED-EYE (2 DALI loa

DA DA
EMOTION-BV2*

Features Max. 16 rooms Max. 32 groups per room Max. 16 scenes per room max. 128 luminaires (2 DALI control circuits with max.64 actuators) max. 100 DALI loads (1 DALI load = 2 mA) per DALI control circuit

DA

Lines 1 + 2: DALI control line e.g. NYM 2 x 1.5 mm max. 300 m long max. 64 loads per line (99 DALI loads)

L N T D v

phase neutral momentary-action switch input control line earth

PE protective earth

The Lighting Handbook

185

Lighting Lighting
L N
Double momentaryMomentary-action PresencePresence Double momentaryMomentary-action action switches switch orswitch switches detector detector action switches or switches

L N

12 11

12 11

DA DA DA DALI DA one4all ballast (1ballast DALI load) DALIelectronic one4all electronic (1 DALI load) 10 9 K1 K1 K 1 K 1 K2 K2 L L K 2 K 2 N N K3 K3 DA DA K 3 K 3 DA DA K4 K4 K 4 K 4 EMOTION-4RUKS (1 DALI load) EMOTION-4RUKS (1 DALI load) DA DA DA DA K K K K

10 9

T26/T16 T26/T16 fluorescent lamps lamps fluorescent TC-L/TC-DEL/TC-TEL TC-L/TC-DEL/TC-TEL

COM T1COM T2 T1

T2COM

T3 COM

T3 COM T4COM T4

Metal-halide lamps lamps Metal-halide

MKXP parately) max. 0.25 m 0.25 m max. COM T1 COM T2 T3 1 T4 2 T3 T4 ED-CircleED-Circle (3 DALI loads) (3 DALI loads)

EMOTION-1RUK (10 DALI (10 loads) EMOTION-1RUK DALI loads)

e. g. incandescent lamps lamps e. g. incandescent

YE ED-EYE LI loads) (2 DALI loads)

ED-SxED ED-SxED (3 DALI loads) (3 DALI loads)

L N DA DA DA DA DA DA L N DA DA L N DA DA

L L N N DA DA EMOTIONEMOTION APD (1 DALI APDload) (1 DALI load) L N DA DA TE one4all DALI load) TE(1 one4all (1 DALI load)

L N
Incandescent lamps/ lamps/ Incandescent HV halogen lamps lamps HV incandescent halogen incandescent

DA DA DA DA

DA DA DA DA

NV halogen lamps lamps NV incandescent halogen incandescent

DA DA DA DA

L R N G DA B DA DALI LEDDALI converter (1 DALI load) LED converter (1 DALI load)

R G B
RGB luminaires RGB luminaires 0/1-10 V 0/1-10 units V units e. g. STARFLEX e. g. STARFLEX fibre optic system fibre optic system

mm line ED-SENSED-SENS (4 DALI loads) (4 DALI loads)

L N DA DA

EMOTION-ANAS (1 DALI load) EMOTION-ANAS (1 DALI load) D1 L D2 N D1 DA D2 DA DALI-2DSI (1 DALI load) DALI-2DSI (1 DALI load)

D1 D2 D1 D2

25 DSI luminaires 25 DSI luminaires 25 DSI luminaires 25 DSI luminaires

IRTOUCH IRTOUCH

L N DA DA

Data + L Data N GND DA DA DALI-DMX (1 DALI load) DALI-DMX (1 DALI L N DA DA

Data + Data GND

load)

16 DALI SA 16 SA DMX 16 to DALI to channels 16 DMX channels

L N DA DA

Tunable White luminaires (e.g. ARCOS) Tunable White luminaires (e.g. ARCOS) (1 DALI load) (1 DALI load)

The Lighting Handbook

186

Lighting control systems

ET ET economy economy
Wiring overview

ges LUXMATE LITENET: General information ges 00 output addresses 00 output addresses er required Benets er required m installation and m installation and Maximum flexibility: use of floor space ssioning effort ssioning effort (room and group addresses can be T flexis N2 without T flexis N2 without configured via software), flexibility of use parts (wear-free) parts (wear-free) (room profiles with basic functions for l LITENET incontrol l LITENET incontrol ng software specific room utilisation), modular solution ng software packages ranging from 500 to 10,000 luminaires Daylight-based blinds management with central daylight sensor Integration of the latest technologies: Tunable White for LED colour temperature luminaires, enocean for wireless key switches, control via web browser (LITENET incontrol) Maximum of energy-saving options: daylight, presence, automated timing, Maintenance Control (constant light ET ET compact compact control) Software interfaces to building ges ges management system: OPC, BACnet 000 output addresses 000 output addresses er required er required m installation and m installation and ssioning effort Features ssioning effort T flexis N3 in 19 rack Field technology is based on LUXMATE T flexis N3 in 19 rack e thanks to RAID 1 e thanks to RAID 1 Professional with LUXMATE bus and irroring) irroring) option a l integration of DALI and l LITENET incontrol l LITENET incontrol ng software DSI control circuits ng software Data exchange from PC (LITNET Flexis, t und OPC open t und OPC open es LITENET, server) to gateway (LITENET es netlink) via network technology (TCPIP protocol) Gateway (LITENET netlink) allows easy inte g ration of modules in the field area (3DALI control circuits, 1 LUXMATE bus link; incl. power supply) (1 DALI load = 2 mA) per DALI control circuit

Sensor Sensor

Control points Control points

LITENET flexis N2 LITENET flexis N2 with server functionality with server functionality TCP/IP TCP/IP

LITENET netlink LITENET netlink

Sensor Sensor

Control points Control points

LITENET flexis N3 LITENET flexis N3 with server functionality with server functionality TCP/IP TCP/IP

LITENET netlink LITENET netlink

ET ET exible exible

ges ges en 5 000 10 000 en 5 000 10 000 addresses (or more addresses (or more equest) equest) , radially arranged , radially arranged k layout for any system k layout for any system

The Lighting Handbook

187

Windows Windows

Screens Screens

Blinds Blinds

Control points Control points

Sensor Sensor

Luminaires Luminaires

LUXMATE Bus LUXMATE Bus

DALI DALI 3 x 64 Address 3 x 64 Address

LITENET netlink LITENET netlink

PC with LITENET insite PC with LITENET insite management software management software TCP/IP TCP/IP

LITENET economy up to 500 output addresses no server required LITENET flexisN2 without rotating parts (wear-free) optional LITENET incontrol operating software

Windows Windows

Screens Screens

Blinds Blinds

Control points Control points

Sensor Sensor

Luminaires Luminaires

LUXMATE Bus LUXMATE Bus

DALI DALI 3 x 64 Address 3 x 64 Address

LITENET netlink LITENET netlink

PC with LITENET insite PC with LITENET insite management software management software TCP/IP TCP/IP

LITENET compact up to 2000 output addresses no server required LITENET flexis N3 in 19" rack fail-safe thanks to RAID1 optional LITENET incontrol operating software optional BACnet and OPC interfaces

The Lighting Handbook

LITENET flexis N3 with server functionality TCP/IP

LITENET netlink

188

Lighting control systems

LUXMATE LITENET: Wiring overview

Sensor

Control points W

LU

LITENET server

LITENET flexis N1

LITENET flexis N1

LITENET netlink

TCP/IP

The Lighting Handbook

LITENET LITENET netlink netlink

PC with PC with LITENET LITENET insite insite management management software software TCP/IP TCP/IP

189

Windows s Windows

Screens Screens

Blinds Blinds

Control Control points points

Sensor Sensor

Luminaires Luminaires

UXMATE LUXMATE Bus Bus

DALI DALI 3 x 64 3 x Address 64 Address

nk

LITENET LITENET netlink netlink

PC with PC with LITENET LITENET insite insite management management software software TCP/IP TCP/IP

LITENET exibel up to 10000 output addresses (or more upon request) can be cascaded as required LITENET flexis N1 installed in switch cabinet LITENET server extremely fail-safe thanks to RAID1 optional LITENET incontrol operating software optional BACnet and OPC interfaces

The Lighting Handbook

190

Lighting control systems

LUXMATE lighting management: Overview | Functions | Product ranges

Functions Lighting Manual switching and dimming Presence-based switching Daylight-based control Synchronisation with daylight Active lighting control Time-based switching Dynamic switching and dimming Linked/conditional switching Radio-controlled switching and dimming Infrared remote control Connection of regular switches and momentary-action switches Call-up of static lighting scenes Call-up of dynamic lighting scenes Colour control Colour temperature control Switching actuators Standard phase/reverse phase control Control via DALI Control via DSI Control via DMX Control via LUXMATE bus Grouping of luminaires Corridor function

DIMLITE

EMOTION

LITENET

The Lighting Handbook

191

Functions Blinds Manual positioning Presence-based positioning Daylight-based positioning Time-based positioning Linked/conditional positioning Security functions (wind, rain, frost)

EMOTION

LITENET

Functions Windows Manual opening/closing Presence-based opening/closing Time-based opening/closing Linked/conditional opening/closing Security functions (wind, rain, frost)

Central functions Fault indication CAD plan-based visualisation Failure reports via SMS, e-mail Emergency lighting functions Remote maintenance Burning life management Maintenance Control Adaptation to room configurations

Functions Integration with other building services TCP/IP text-based BACnet OPC

The Lighting Handbook

192

Lighting control systems

LUXMATE lighting management: Differentiation between DALI (EMOTION, LITENET) and DMX (E:cue, VCU)

LUXMATE EMOTION Lighting solution architectural emotional communicative

LUXMATE LITENET

E:cue Butler XT () ()

VCU ()

Speed

static/switching or dimming slow/gentle transitions fast changes in colour or brightness video speed

()

Effect

lighting colour diagram text video

() ()

Miscellaneous

sensors time-based control dimming of luminaires driving other motors shows playing back videos addresses/channels addressing

128 via system

10000 via system

() 1024

() 5400***

on luminaire on luminaire

= applicable () = partly applicable = not applicable

* server-based ** special solutions for up to 50000 using server structure *** 1800 RGB pixels; using master/slave structure (no special solution), open-ended

The Lighting Handbook

Control devices
Functions overview

193

Function Can be switched at zero power (digital control signal) Dimmability (via additional control lines) Dimming range (1 to 100 %) DALI addressable (individual addressing, max. 64 addresses per control line) Can be configured (limitation of dimming levels, start level, fault level) Status reporting (dimming level, switching status, service readiness) Fault reporting (faulty lamp, device failure) Dimming automatically disabled in DC mode (dimming and switching signals are not accepted) Adjustable emergency lighting level (parameters ranging from 1 to 70 %, factory setting: 70 %) DC mode suitable for emergency lighting (DC mode in line with VDE 0108, operating voltage 176280 V DC) Critical operating conditions (ambient temperature: up to 70 C, service life: 100,000 h)

DALI

DSI

110 V

Heavy-duty electr. ballast

Electronic ballast

The Lighting Handbook

Chapter 7

Emergency lighting

ONLITE local emergency lighting system with separate battery supply SB128 Controller Control test system topology ONLITE local emergency sets for separate battery supply

196 196 198 200

ONLITE central eBox central emergency power supply system 202 System overview 202 SCM and OCM 204 SUB stations 206 System topology 208 Ballast/lumen factor table 210 ONLITE central CPS central battery system 214 System overview 214 System topology 216 Ballast/lumen factor table 218

The Lighting Handbook

196

ONLITE local emergency lighting system with separate battery supply

SB 128 Controller Controlling an emergency lighting system is much more convenient and safe if it is networked via a DALI control line and an SB128 Controller is connected. The status of all the luminaires is displayed on the Controller, all notifications such as lamp faults or battery malfunctions are captured in a central location and logged in the test logbook. By doing this, the Controller takes on full responsibility for the emergency lighting system.

The Lighting Handbook

197

Easy operation Very easy commissioning and addressing of the entire emergency lighting installation requires just one person E asy touch-screen operation C learly laid-out, logical menu prompting C an monitor 128 luminaires, can be expanded to take 256 luminaires by fitting extenders

Automatic tests and test logs Test logbook with central logging of test results for at least three years C lock and calendar function for user-programmable test cycles Facility to manually trigger test functions on Controller

High level of functionality D isplay of all luminaires, configuration with description and addressing M ode can be selected individually for every ONLITE luminaire U ser-programmable signalling contacts and audible failure notification I nstallation can be disabled to allow servicing work

The Lighting Handbook

198

ONLITE local emergency lighting system with separate battery supply

Control test system topology

L N PE

Mains 230 V/50 HZ

ONLITE IR-Printer Order No. 22 154 522

Infrared

AD2 AD1 COM S1 S2 S3 S4

max. 300 m/1.5 mm2 1* AD 1* AD 1* AD 64 luminaires max. 1* AD 1* AD 1* AD max. 300 m/1.5 mm2 1* AD 1* AD 1* AD 64 luminaires max. 1* AD 1* AD 1* AD BD1 BD2 BD1 BD2 max. 300 m/1.5 mm2 1* AD 1* AD 1* AD 64 luminaires max. 1* AD 1* AD 1* AD BD1 BD2 BD1 BD2 max. 300 m/1.5 mm2 1* AD 1* AD 1* AD 64 luminaires max. 1* AD 1* AD 1* AD BD1 BD2 BD1 BD2

ONLITE local Switch Module Order No. 22 154 507

Switch

max. 300 m/1.5 mm2

ONLITE local Extender Order No. 22 156 830

max. 300 m/1.5 mm2

ONLITE local Extender Order No. 22 156 830

max. 300 m/1.5 mm2

ONLITE local Extender Order No. 22 156 830

1* 230 V AC Continuous phase

The Lighting Handbook

199

ONLITE local SB 128 Controller Order No. 22 156 829

L N
230V AC 24V DC

BD1 BD2 TxD RxD GND

AD1 AD2

DALI control line 1 K1 K2 K3

K14 K12 K11 K24 K22 K21 K34 K32 K31

PE

+Ub GND

DALI control line 1

ONLITE BRI Order No. 22 185 300

DALI control line 2

DALI control line 2

2x RS 232

TCP/IP

LAN

Nport 2 GO-ON Package Order No. 22 154 418 GO

DALI control line 2

The Lighting Handbook

200

ONLITE local emergency lighting system with separate battery supply

ONLITE local emergency sets for separate battery supply Zumtobels luminaires are supplied ready to use with separate battery supply (emergency sets) for emergency lighting integrated into general lighting systems. Compliance to standards is guaranteed here compared to luminaires converted by the operator. The emergency sets are connected via DALI and an ONLITE local SB 128 Controller. The emergency lighting consists of a con trol unit and battery. In contrast to the RESCLITE emergency set, the light source of the general lighting luminaire is used for emergency lighting. The ONLITE local emergency sets are available for backup of one or three hours.

Overview ONLITE local emergency sets

1 hour 4 cells EM 14 PRO EZ-3 NT1-TR 14 Symbol Lamp TC-DD W 10 16 21 28 38 55 7 9 11 10 13 18 26 33.0 24.0 17.0 14.0 7.5 5.2 24.0 28.0 31.0 30.0 26.0 17.0 14.4 24.0 28.0 31.0 30.0 26.0 17.0 14.4 5 cells EM 15 PRO EZ-3 NT1-TR 15 6 cells EM 16 PRO EZ-3 NT1-TR 16 4 cells EM 34 PRO EZ-3 NT3-TR 14 3 hours 5 cells EM 35 PRO EZ-3 NT3-TR 15 6 cells EM 36 PRO EZ-3 NT3-TR 16

BLF in emergency lighting mode in% for rated service life 33.0 24.0 17.0 14.0 7.5 5.2

TC-SEL

TC-DEL

The Lighting Handbook

201

Overview ONLITE local emergency sets continued

1 hour 4 cells EM 14 PRO EZ-3 NT1-TR 14 Symbol Lamp TC-TEL1 W 13 18 26 2 32 2 42 57 18 24 36 18 24 36 40 55 14 21 28 35 24 39 49 54 80 22 40 55 6 8 13 15 18 30 36 38 58 70 26.0 17.5/16.0 11.5/10.4 5 cells EM 15 PRO EZ-3 NT1-TR 15 6 cells EM 16 PRO EZ-3 NT1-TR 16 4 cells EM 34 PRO EZ-3 NT3-TR 14 3 hours 5 cells EM 35 PRO EZ-3 NT3-TR 15 6 cells EM 36 PRO EZ-3 NT3-TR 16

BLF in emergency lighting mode in% for rated service life /20.5 (GE) /15.0 14.0/5.0 26.0 17.5/16.0 11.5/10.4 /20.5 (GE) /15.0 14.0/5.6

/14.0 /8.0 7.4/7.3 5.1/5.2

/14.0 /8.0 7.4/7.3 5.1/5.2

TC-F

18.0 21.0 13.0 18.0 17.0 12.0 8.8 4.5 22.0 17.0 14.0 10.5 12.3 8.3 6.4 5.7 4.7 11.5 6.0 5.5 35.0 36.0 22.0 16.5 16.5 9.5 8.0 10.5 6.5 3.7

18.0 21.0 13.0 18.0 17.0 12.0 8.8 4.5 22.0 17.0 14.0 10.5 12.3 8.3 6.4 5.7 4.7 11.5 6.0 5.5 35.0 36.0 22.0 16.5 16.5 9.5 8.0 10.5 6.5 3.7

TC-L

T16 FH

T16 FQ

T16 C

T16

T26

2

The first figure refers to non-amalgam lamps, the second figure to amalgam lamps (e.g. 14/9.5). For optimum operation of 26 W and 32 W TC lamps, in particular for lamps with an amalgam filling, we recommend the use of EM 36 PRO EZ-3 and EM 16 PRO EZ-3, respectively.

The Lighting Handbook

202

ONLITE central eBox central emergency power supply system

System overview ONLITE central eBox is perfectly adjusted, convenient and flexible: for each application, there is the right basic housing in a functional design. The main station is modular and still boasts a compact size for easy assembly. Extremely small SUB stations enable the devices to be used next to the final circuits in any recess, small as it may be. With the optional external modules at the system bus, the functions of each ONLITE central eBox system can be extended individually.

Features Total output in emergency mode up to 2730 W for 1 hour emergency operation Total output in mains operation up to 5000 VA 3 0 final circuits (OCM) 4 external SUB stations (SUB) 3 6 switch inputs (BSIM) 9 bus phase detectors (BPD) 1 remote display (BRI) Web browser interface for up to 10000 luminaires and 100 systems
eBox MS 1700 Main station Circuits (max. 20 luminaires) 30 overall (6 internal, 24 external for SUB each with 3 double circuits) 600 overall 120 internal 120 per SUB external 3-pole (L/N/PE) 230/240 V 10% max. 5500 VA output in case of full capacity two core cable min. 2x0.75 mm 2 5000 VA per SCM 1000 VA 2730 W at 24 Ah2) accommodated in the cabinet max. per SCM 750 W/200 W per circuit eBox MS 1200 Main station 30 overall (6 internal, 24 external for SUB each with 3 double circuits) 600 overall 120 internal 120 per SUB external 3-pole (L/N/PE) 230/240 V 10% max. 5500 VA output in case of full capacity two core cable min. 2x0.75 mm 2 5000 VA per SCM 1000 VA 1215 W at 12 Ah2) accommodated in the cabinet max. per SCM 750 W/200 W per circuit

Maximum number of luminaires depending on the available battery capacity1) Mains connection

System Bus connection Mains operation Total AC output power Emergency operation e.g. 1 h duration Battery output DC total1)

The Lighting Handbook

203

1)

Battery power in W depending on nominal duration of battery-powered operation

Battery type ONLITE central eBox Accu PB/12 7.2 Ah 12.0 Ah 24.0 Ah

System voltage [V] 216 216 216

Max. DC system output including 25% ageing reserve as prescribed by the standard (EN 50 171 6.12.4) 8h 131 233 479 5h 178 324 697 3h 274 487 1040 2h 381 640 1490 1h 656 1215 2730 0.5 h 1085 1993 3750

2) 3)

Battery voltage 216 V nominal (189 249 V) DC output power depends on the available battery capacity

eBox SUB E60 Fireproof substation 3 OCM modules with 2 outputs circuits per module 120 pcs

eBox SUB IP65 Substation 3 OCM modules with 2 outputs circuits per module 120 pcs

eBox SUB IP20 Substation 3 OCM modules with 2 outputs circuits per module 120 pcs

5-pole (from the main station L/N/PE/B+/B-)

5-pole (from the main station L/N/PE/B+/B-)

5-pole (from the main station L/N/PE/B+/B-)

two core cable to main station 1000 VA per SUB 420 VA per OCM max. 750 W per SUB3) max. 200 W per circuit

two core cable to main station 1000 VA per SUB 420 VA per OCM max. 750 W per SUB3) max. 200 W per circuit

two core cable to main station 1000 VA per SUB 420 VA per OCM max. 750 W per SUB3) max. 200 W per circuit

The Lighting Handbook

204

ONLITE central eBox central emergency power supply system

SCM and OCM ONLITE central eBox SCM SCM Switch Connection Module One ONLITE central eBox SCM is included in the standard scope of supply. If several SUB stations are used, one ONLITE central eBox SCM per SUB station must be or dered separately.
Output power AC Output power DC Fuses (6 x 32 mm) Output voltage AC Max. number of luminaires 1000 VA 750 W 3x8A 230/240 V 10% 120

L AC N
Phase monitoring

8AT
Fuse monitoring

L AC N

CPU
8AT

SCM Switchover and fuse module

B+ B-

DC
8AT

Fuse monitoring

B+ B- DC

L AC N

3,15AT

P [W]

EL1 Circuit 1

3,15AT 3,15AT

EN1

ROM 3,15AT

CPU

PLC P [W]

DALI in DALI in

EL2 Circuit 2

B+ B-

DC

3,15AT 3,15AT

EN2

L AC N

3,15AT

P [W]

EL1
DALI out DALI out

Circuit 1

3,15AT 3,15AT

EN1

ROM 3,15AT

CPU

DALI P [W]

DALI in DALI in

The Lighting Handbook

B+ BDC
3,15AT

EL2
DALI out DALI out

Circuit 2

L AC N
Phase monitoring

8AT
Fuse monitoring

L AC N

205

CPU
8AT

B+ B-

DC
8AT

Fuse monitoring

B+ B- DC

ONLITE central eBox OCM

L
8AT

L
Fuse monitoring

OCM Output Circuit Modules Up to three ONLITE central eBox OCMs per system can be used as an option. In this context, the different functions of the modules may also be mixed. Each circuit is separately protected by a 3.15 A 6 x 32 mm fuse. In the battery circuit, there is 2-pole fusing, in the mains network 1-pole fusing. The total output of the three double-circuit modules must not exceed 1000 VA and 750W.

AC N Output

Phase monitoring

AC N EL1 Circuit 1 EN1 B+

power per circuit AC

3,15AT

420 VA
P [W]

L Output power per circuit AC N 3,15AT Fuses (6 x 32 mm)

DC
CPU

200 W 6 x 3.15 A

Output DC B+ BOutput
B+ B-

voltage AC
8AT

8AT 3,15AT

Fuse monitoring

230/240 V 10%
PLC 216 V (189249 DALI in V)

CPU voltage DCROM (nominal)

3,15AT

DALI in B- DC

P [W]

EL2 Circuit 2

DC

3,15AT 3,15AT

EN2
P [W]

L AC N L L N N B+ BDC DC AC AC
Phase monitoring

3,15AT

EL1 Circuit 1

3,15AT 8AT 3,15AT 3,15AT ROM 3,15AT 3,15AT 3,15AT 8AT ROM 3,15AT 3,15AT 8AT
Fuse monitoring P [W]

CPU

PLC P [W]

L EN1 AC EL1 N in DALI EL2 EN1

DALI out DALI in DALI out

Circuit 1

CPU CPU
DALI
monitoring P [W] Fuse

Circuit 2
DALI in EN2 DALI in

OCM-NDA Double-circuit module DALI communication

B+ BB+ B-

B+ EL2 B- DC

DC

3,15AT 3,15AT

DALI out DALI out

Circuit 2

EN2
P [W]

L AC N L AC N L AC N B+ B-

3,15AT

EL1
DALI out DALI out

3,15AT 3,15AT 3,15AT 3,15AT 3,15AT ROM 3,15AT 3,15AT ROM 3,15AT

Circuit 1 Circuit 1 Circuit 1

P [W]

EL1

EN1
P [W]

CPU CPU CPU

DALI P [W] PLC P [W]

EL1 DALI EN1 in

DALI in

EL2 DALI EN1 in EL2

DC DC DC

3,15AT 3,15AT ROM 3,15AT 3,15AT 3,15AT 3,15AT 3,15AT 3,15AT

DALI out in DALI out

Circuit 2 Circuit 2 Circuit 2

OCM-NSI Double-circuit module Powerline communication

B+ BB+ B-

EN2
P [W]

EL2 EN2 EN2

L AC N L AC N

3,15AT

P [W]

EL1 EL1 EN1 DALI out

DALI out

3,15AT 3,15AT 3,15AT 3,15AT ROM 3,15AT 3,15AT ROM

Circuit 1 Circuit 1

P [W]

CPU
P [W]

EN1 EL2
DALI in DALI in

OCM-NPS Double-circuit module with circuit monitoring

B+ BB+ B-

CPU

DALI P [W]

DC DC

3,15AT 3,15AT 3,15AT 3,15AT 3,15AT

EL2 EN2 DALI out

DALI out

Circuit 2 Circuit 2

EN2

The Lighting Handbook

3,15AT

206

ONLITE central eBox central emergency power supply system

SUB stations

DALI

Cable entry to main station ONLITE central eBox MS 1200 or ONLITE central eBox MS 1700
22) 5 (1.5 4.0 mm mm (1,5 4,0 )

Powerline

Circuit monitoring Leistungsmessung

2 (0.75 1,5 1.5 mm mm ) ) (0,75

22

PE 2x1 2x2 2x3 2x4 2x5

ONLITE central eBox SUB

The Lighting Handbook

B1 B2 L N B+ B

207

EL1 EN1 PE DA DA

EL1 EN1 PE DA DA

EL1 EN1 PE

EL1 EN1 PE

EL1 EN1 PE

EL1 EN1 PE

Cable entry from substation to main station ONLITE central eBox The 5-pole power cable must be installed in a FP cable up to the place of installation of the ONLITE central eBox SUB station of the respective fire compartment. If several fire compartments are supplied from the ONLITE central eBox SUB E60, the power cable must be installed in a fireproof manner up to the cabinet, and the f inal circuits up to the fire compartments to be supplied in each case. The system bus may be executed in a linear manner or in a star t opology. Fireproof installation is not required, since the monitoring of the bus is ensured through heartbeat control. If on account of an interruption or short-circuit, any logging data arrive late or not at all, AC emergency operation of all lumi n aires is activated at the final c ircuit.

Three SUB stations are available O NLITE central eBox SUB E60 Standard SUB station is used if final circuits in different fire compartments are served ONLITE central eBox SUB E00 Standard SUB station in E00 IP20 to supply final circuits without crossing any fire compartment ONLITE central eBox SUB IP65 Standard SUB station in E00 IP65 to supply final circuits without crossing any fire compartment for rough environments such as industry, car parks or underground parking

The Lighting Handbook

208

ONLITE central eBox central emergency power supply system

System topology

ONLITE BRI
Betriebsbereit Ready to operate Batteriebetrieb Battery operation Strung Failure

System bus

ONLITE BRI remote display The module is a remote display for the o perational status of an emergency lighting system. This is required in every installation under EN 50172. The remote display is installed at a superordinate location within the building, in order to show the status of the system at any time.

Individually monitored

Emergency off

L1 N
Us Fault Test

L2

L3

4 L1/L2/L3/N

12 11 14 24 21 22

ONLITE central EPD 2

PC / Web browser

TCP/IP Network

Status-LED* Green Yellow Red Red, periodically on/off every 0.5 s All, off All, periodically on/off every 0.5 s ystem is ready for S operation System in battery mode oo many faulty light T sources in the system error in the system reak-down of the b system bus error at the system bus or main station failure
ONLITE central eBox max. 100 luminaires 3

* U se with ONLITE central eBox

L1/N/PE ONLITE central eBox max. 600 luminaires

The Lighting Handbook

209

Individually monitored DALI (NDA)

DALI DALI

max. 20 luminaires

max. 20 luminaires

L N in1 L in2 N

DA DA
5 6

7 8

9 0 1

ONLITE central eBox DSIM max. 9

L N PE

Individually monitored Powerline (NSI)

max. 20 luminaires

max. 20 luminaires

Circuit monitored (NPS)

max. 20 luminaires

max. 20 luminaires

ONLITE central eBox SUB stations max. 4 2 System bus

out in B1 B2
7 8 7 8

9 0 1
2 3

B1 Address S1 S2 S3 S4

B2

9 0 1
2 3

AL1 Address

AL2

2 L/N

S4 L/N S3 L/N S2 L/N S1 L/N

4 L1/L2/L3/N ONLITE central eBox BPD max. 9

ONLITE central eBox BSIM max. 9

4 5 6

Status

Status Test L2 N L1

Alarm

L3

The Lighting Handbook

2 3

Address Status

4 5 6

210

ONLITE central eBox central emergency power supply system

Ballast/lumen factor table

AC power [100 %] 230 V/50 Hz [VA] 3.7 3.7 5.0 5.0 5.0 6.0 6.5 11.0 2.9 6.0 11.0 5.0 5.0 5.4 8.2 14 2/14 21 2/21 28 2/28 35 2/35 24 2/24 39 2/39 49 2/49 54 2/54 80 2/80 1/18 2/18 1/36 2/36 1/58 2/58 1/18 2/18 1/24 2/24 1/36 2/36 1/40 2/40 1/55 2/55 W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W 17.9 33.0 24.8 47.2 32.5 61.8 41.0 77.4 27.5 51.7 43.8 86.5 55.6 110.3 57.5 117.0 90.9 178.3 19.8 37.3 37.6 69.8 54.3 107.8 18.0 33.4 24.9 47.3 36.4 71.0 46.0 88.7 64.9 125.6 6.9 11.1 7.9 12.9 9.4 15.4 10.5 16.6 8.7 14.8 10.3 17.5 12.4 20.6 14.8 26.3 17.3 31.8 7.1 11.8 9.0 16.5 12.1 21.2 7.9 13.1 8.4 13.0 10.3 16.1 8.8 17.3 14.5 25.8

Emergency lighting level

Light source LED

Wattage

DC [W] 5%

DC [W] 10 % 1.6 1.7 3.5 3.4 3.4 4.4 4.4 8.1 1.6 2.0 8.3 3.5 3.5 1.5 2.1 7.9 13.4 9.3 15.7 11.6 19.3 12.9 21.6 9.8 18.1 13.8 23.7 16.4 28.2 19.3 35.0 24.7 45.6 8.1 14.3 11.1 21.2 16.1 28.5 8.2 15.1 10.1 16.5 12.4 21.2 12.0 23.4 19.5 35.8

DC [W] 15 % 1.6 1.8 3.6 3.5 3.5 4.5 4.5 8.4 1.6 2.2 8.4 3.6 3.6 1.7 2.4 8.6 15.2 10.5 17.8 13.3 22.9 16.3 26.0 11.9 21.2 16.2 28.9 20.2 35.9 23.1 43.5 30.9 59.7 9.2 16.4 13.2 25.1 19.5 35.8 9.7 16.0 11.5 19.6 14.9 25.8 14.9 29.4 24.0 44.7

DC [W] 20 % 1.7 1.8 3.7 3.6 3.6 4.6 4.6 8.7 1.7 2.4 8.5 3.7 3.7 1.9 2.7 9.2 16.3 11.3 20.0 14.9 26.3 17.1 29.6 13.0 24.4 18.1 34.0 23.2 41.6 26.7 49.8 36.3 70.1 10.3 18.1 15.3 28.6 22.3 42.0 10.7 18.0 12.2 21.9 16.4 30.0 17.4 34.6 27.0 51.2

DC [W] 30 % 1.7 1.9 3.8 3.7 3.7 4.7 4.7 9.1 1.7 2.8 8.6 3.8 3.8 2.3 3.3 10.3 18.8 13.7 24.5 17.5 31.6 21.0 37.7 15.4 28.9 22.9 42.5 28.5 52.5 31.8 61.7 45.0 90.1 11.6 21.4 19.0 35.6 27.6 52.1 11.6 20.9 14.4 26.4 19.7 36.6 22.2 43.8 33.3 64.4

DC [W] 40 % 1.8 2.0 4.0 3.8 3.8 4.8 4.8 9.4 1.8 3.2 8.8 4.0 4.0 2.6 4.0 12.0 21.4 15.9 28.7 20.4 37.6 24.9 45.2 17.7 33.4 26.7 51.4 33.5 62.8 36.8 73.8 53.9 106.3 13.6 24.4 22.5 42.0 32.7 63.0 12.9 24.0 16.5 30.3 23.2 43.6 26.6 53.1 39.2 75.8

DC [W] 50 % 1.9 2.1 4.1 4.0 4.0 5.0 5.0 9.7 1.9 3.6 9.0 4.1 4.1 3.0 4.6 13.0 23.7 17.7 32.3 23.0 42.6 27.6 51.1 19.8 37.6 33.3 58.1 38.0 73.0 41.2 82.2 61.3 122.1 15.0 27.2 25.1 48.1 36.9 72.4 14.2 25.9 18.2 34.0 25.5 48.6 30.5 60.4 44.9 86.1

DC [W] 60 %

T16

14.1 25.6 19.3 35.4 25.0 46.9 30.4 56.7 21.1 41.1 33.0 64.5 42.1 80.9 44.2 90.5 67.8 134.5 15.9 29.3 27.4 53.2 41.1 79.4 14.9 28.0 19.3 37.0 27.7 53.8 33.6 67.1 49.0 94.8

T26

TC-L/F

The Lighting Handbook

211

DC [W] 70 % 2.4 2.4 4.3 4.2 4.2 5.2 5.2 10.1 2.1 4.5 9.5 4.3 4.3 3.8 5.8 15.3 28.1 20.8 39.1 27.2 51.4 33.3 62.6 22.8 44.7 35.8 71.6 46.3 89.6 48.4 99.8 74.4 147.9 17.3 32.2 32.8 58.6 44.6 88.0 15.7 30.6 20.8 40.6 30.0 59.5 37.0 74.5 53.7 105.2

DC [W] 100 % 3.2 3.2 4.5 4.5 4.5 5.5 5.5 10.5 2.4 5.5 10.5 4.5 4.5 4.9 7.7 17.4 32.6 24.3 46.7 32.0 61.4 40.4 77.1 27.1 51.5 43.8 86.3 55.1 110.2 57.0 117.1 90.6 178.0 19.4 37.0 35.3 69.6 54.1 108.5 17.7 33.1 24.6 47.1 36.3 70.9 46.1 89.0 64.4 125.4

Control gear/luminaire EMpowerX EMpowerX EMpowerX EMpowerX EMpowerX EMpowerX EMpowerX EMpowerX EMpowerX EMpowerX EMpowerX EMpowerX EMpowerX EMpowerX EMpowerX PCA PCA PCA PCA PCA PCA PCA PCA PCA PCA PCA PCA PCA PCA PCA PCA PCA PCA PCA PCA PCA PCA PCA PCA PCA PCA PCA PCA PCA PCA PCA PCA PCA PCA 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED NSI NSI NSI NSI NSI NSI NSI NSI NSI NSI NSI NSI NSI NSI NSI / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / ARTSIGN C EW ARTSIGN C ED COMSIGN 150 CROSSIGN 110 CROSSIGN 110 ERI CROSSIGN 160 CROSSIGN 160 ERI CUBESIGN 210 ERGOSIGN LED ECOSIGN LED IP 65 FREESIGN 300 PURESIGN 150 PURESIGN 150 ERI RESCLITE C SQUARESIGN 300

14/24 T5 EXCEL one4all lp xitec II 14/24 T5 EXCEL one4all lp xitec II 21/39 T5 EXCEL one4all lp xitec II 21/39 T5 EXCEL one4all lp xitec II 28/54 T5 EXCEL one4all lp xitec II 28/54 T5 EXCEL one4all lp xitec II 35/49/80 T5 EXCEL one4all lp xitec II 35/49 T5 EXCEL one4all lp xitec II 14/24 T5 EXCEL one4all lp xitec II 14/24 T5 EXCEL one4all lp xitec II 21/39 T5 EXCEL one4all lp xitec II 21/39 T5 EXCEL one4all lp xitec II 35/49/80 T5 EXCEL one4all lp xitec II 35/49 T5 EXCEL one4all lp xitec II 28/54 T5 EXCEL one4all lp xitec II 28/54 T5 EXCEL one4all lp xitec II 35/49/80 T5 EXCEL one4all lp xitec II 80 T5 EXCEL one4all lp xitec II 18 18 36 36 58 58 T8 T8 T8 T8 T8 T8 EXCEL EXCEL EXCEL EXCEL EXCEL EXCEL one4all one4all one4all one4all one4all one4all lp lp lp lp lp lp xitec xitec xitec xitec xitec xitec II II II II II II

18/24 TCL EXCEL one4all c xitec II 18/24 TCL EXCEL one4all c xitec II 18/24 TCL EXCEL one4all c xitec II 18/24 TCL EXCEL one4all c xitec II 21/39 T5 EXCEL one4all lp xitec II 21/39 T5 EXCEL one4all lp xitec II 21/39 T5 EXCEL one4all lp xitec II 21/39 T5 EXCEL one4all lp xitec II 35/49/80 T5 EXCEL one4all lp xitec II 80 T5 EXCEL one4all lp xitec II

The Lighting Handbook

212

ONLITE central eBox central emergency power supply system

Ballast/lumen factor table

AC power [100 %] 230 V/50 Hz [VA] 15.7 27.6 15.5 28.2 20.7 38.9 28.4 53.1 33.6 58.4 40.7 75.4 31.0

Emergency lighting level

Light source TC-S/E TC-D/E TC-D/T

Wattage 1/11 W 2/11 W 1/13 W 2/13 W 1/18 2/18 1/26 2/26 1/32 2/32 1/42 2/42 W W W W W W W W

DC [W] 5% 6.4 8.7 6.4 9.1 7.0 11.1 8.7 14.1 9.4 14.5 10.4 15.4 8.9

DC [W] 10 % 7.5 10.4 7.5 11.0 8.5 13.6 10.5 17.4 12.1 19.7 13.0 21.8 10.6

DC [W] 15 % 8.2 11.7 7.8 12.6 10.0 16.4 12.4 21.0 14.1 24.5 15.6 27.4 12.6

DC [W] 20 % 8.6 13.1 8.5 14.0 11.1 18.1 13.6 23.7 16.0 28.1 18.5 31.8 13.9

DC [W] 30 % 9.8 15.3 10.2 16.3 12.8 22.2 15.9 28.5 19.0 34.4 22.9 40.5 16.6

DC [W] 40 % 11.2 17.3 11.2 18.1 14.2 25.3 18.5 33.0 22.3 40.0 27.7 48.5 18.9

DC [W] 50 % 12.4 19.6 11.9 21.0 15.6 28.2 20.4 37.4 25.0 44.6 31.4 55.6 21.6

DC [W] 60 % 13.0 21.1 13.1 21.0 16.8 30.7 22.2 40.7 26.4 47.9 35.0 60.1 23.6

TC-T/E

TC-DD

1/28 W

The Lighting Handbook

213

DC [W] 70 % 14.4 23.0 13.9 24.1 18.0 33.5 24.0 45.0 29.0 51.7 37.1 65.2 25.8

DC [W] 100 % 15.3 27.0 15.0 27.8 20.2 37.5 27.7 52.7 32.4 58.3 44.9 74.5 30.5

Control gear/luminaire PCA 1 x 11/13 TC EXCEL one4all xitec II PCA 2 x 11/13 TC EXCEL one4all xitec II PCA 1 x 11/13 TC EXCEL one4all xitec II PCA 2 x 11/13 TC EXCEL one4all xitec II PCA PCA PCA PCA PCA PCA PCA PCA 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 x x x x x x x x 18 TC EXCEL one4all xitec II 18 TC EXCEL one4all xitec II 26-57 TC EXCEL one4all xitec II 26/32/42 TC EXCEL one4all xitec II 26-57 TC EXCEL one4all xitec II 26/32/42 TC EXCEL one4all xitec II 26-57 TC EXCEL one4all xitec II 26/32/42 TC EXCEL one4all xitec II

PCA 1 x 28 TC-DD EXCEL one4all xitec II

The Lighting Handbook

214

ONLITE central CPS central battery system

System overview Every ONLITE central CPS offers full functionality in order to comprehensively meet the requirements placed on a central battery system using as few components as possible. No additional software or modules are needed. There is no need to fit any separate components in the luminaire because every DALI luminaire can be used as an emergency luminaire which can be individually monitored and controlled. This also reduces effort on commissioning, inspecting and maintaining the system. A large removable Touch PC is the core of the system. For example, it enables straightforward commissioning by one person or neatly laid out, easily manageable visualisation of the systems status.

CPS K Compact station Circuits (up to 20 luminaires) Maximum number of luminaires Mains connection Mains operation Total AC output power Max. AC output power per circuit AC output power per 20 circuits (per UVS) Emergency mode Total DC output power Max. DC output power per circuit DC output power per 20 circuits (per UVS) Standby operating time 18h 7.6 kW [1 h]* 3.3 kW [3 h]* 1300 W 4700 W 18x12 V / 775 Ah accommodated in combined cabinet 730 kVA 1300 VA 4700 VA 1) Up to 40 internal + 20 external 2) Up to 20 internal + 140 external 1) 1200 pcs * 2) 3200 pcs * 5-pole 3x400 V

CPS H Main station up to 60 internal + 240 external 6000 pcs * 5-pole 3x400 V

30 kVA 1300 VA 4700 VA

22.7 kW [1 h]* 1300 W 4700 W

10 kW [3 h]*

18x12 V up to 200 Ah accommodated in separate battery cabinet or battery rack

The Lighting Handbook

215

Features Power in emergency mode 130 kW Up to 300 circuits, each for 20 emergency luminaires (The maximum numbers are exclu s ively based on the technical specifications. All locally applicable laws, standards and regulations must be taken into account.) Up to 12 external substations per main station (CPS H) Mixed operation within one circuit is possible Up to 240 (optional) freely assignable switching inputs Web browser-based user interface

CPS U E60 Fire-resistant substation 20

CPS U E00 Substation 20

4700 VA 1300 VA 4700 VA

4700 VA 1300 VA 4700 VA

* Including 25% reserve capacity (battery ageing)

The Lighting Handbook

216

ONLITE central CPS central battery system

ONLITE central CPS system topology

HVA

ONLITE BRI
Betriebsbereit Ready to operate Batteriebetrieb Battery operation Strung Failure
ONLITE central Touch PC

> <
info ?

+Ub

K1

K2

K3

GND

GND

24 V

Battery 216 V Temperature sensor

Mains from HVA

Fan fault indication

2 x 1 +

2x5

2 x 4

A1 + A1 PE A2 + A2 Ax + Ax

L1 L2 L3 N PE

S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7

HVS LE loading unit

The Lighting Handbook

Power supply bus 24 V

Relais 5

Relais 6

Relais 7

Emergency-off By pressing the emergencyoff button, the complete ONLITE central CPS system (including all substations) is disconnected from power supply. This ensures that emergency forces can safely do their job. The internal +24 V supply is carried via an NC switch (emergency-off) and connected to the S5 terminal (2 x 1 terminal strip at the main station), while the configuration is adjusted to the emergency-off function using the Touch PC.

32

24V

0V

4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

J Y (S t) Y x x0.8 0,8 JY (St) Y22xx22

to UVS 1

to UVS 2

FI

3 2

FI

UVA 1

3
L1 L2 L3 N PE 11

5x1 B1+ B1 PE S1 S2 [...] S8 5x1 B1+ B 1 PE PE PE S 1 PE S2 PE [...] PE S 8 PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE+ PE PE PE PE PE 2

N L3 L2 L1 14 L1 L2 L3 N PE 11 N L3 L2 L1 14

System bus B1 +
E60

5x1 B1+ 3 J Y ((St) St) Y 0,8 JY Y2 2xx22xx0.8

UVS 1 circuit monitoring

Data and Power
JY (St) Y 2 x 2 x 0,8
FI FI

UVA 2

E60

L1 L2 L3 N PE

11

UVS 2 individual monitoring

DALI

N L3 L2 L1 14 11 14 L1 L2 L3 N PE N L3 L2 L1

The Lighting Handbook

JY (St) Y 2 x 2 x 0,8 J Y ((St) St) Y 0,8 JY Y2 2xx22xx0.8

To next UV

DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI

L+ L+ L+ L+ L+ L+ L+ L+ L+ L + L+ + L L+ + L L+ + L L+ + L L+ + L L+ + L L L+ + L L+ + L+ + L L+ + L L+ + L L+ L+ L+ L+ L+ L+ L+ L+

N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N

DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI

PE S1 S2 [...] S8 5x1 B1+ B 1 PE PE PE S 1 PE S2 PE [...] PE S8 PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE+ PE PE PE PE PE

System bus

217

218

ONLITE central CPS central battery system

Ballast/lumen factor table

AC power [100 %] 230 V/50 Hz [VA] 3.2 3.2 4.5 4.5 4.5 5.5 6.0 10.5 2.4 5.5 10.5 4.5 4.5 4.9 7.7 14 2/14 21 2/21 28 2/28 35 2/35 24 2/24 39 2/39 49 2/49 54 2/54 80 2/80 1/18 2/18 1/36 2/36 1/58 2/58 1/18 2/18 1/24 2/24 1/36 2/36 1/40 2/40 1/55 2/55 W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W 17.4 32.5 24.3 46.7 32.0 61.3 40.5 76.9 27.0 51.2 43.3 86.0 55.1 109.8 57.0 116.5 90.4 177.8 19.3 36.8 37.1 69.3 53.8 107.3 17.5 32.9 24.4 46.8 35.9 70.5 45.5 88.2 64.4 125.1 6.9 11.1 7.9 12.9 9.4 15.4 10.5 16.6 8.7 14.8 10.3 17.5 12.4 20.6 14.8 26.3 17.3 31.8 7.1 11.8 9.0 16.5 12.1 21.2 7.9 13.1 8.4 13.0 10.3 16.1 8.8 17.3 14.5 25.8

Emergency lighting level

Light source LED

Wattage

DC [W] 5%

DC [W] 10 % 1.6 1.7 3.5 3.4 3.4 4.4 4.4 8.1 1.6 2.0 8.3 3.5 3.5 1.5 2.1 7.9 13.4 9.3 15.7 11.6 19.3 12.9 21.6 9.8 18.1 13.8 23.7 16.4 28.2 19.3 35.0 24.7 45.6 8.1 14.3 11.1 21.2 16.1 28.5 8.2 15.1 10.1 16.5 12.4 21.2 12.0 23.4 19.5 35.8

DC [W] 15 % 1.6 1.8 3.6 3.5 3.5 4.5 4.5 8.4 1.6 2.2 8.4 3.6 3.6 1.7 2.4 8.6 15.2 10.5 17.8 13.3 22.9 16.3 26.0 11.9 21.2 16.2 28.9 20.2 35.9 23.1 43.5 30.9 59.7 9.2 16.4 13.2 25.1 19.5 35.8 9.7 16.0 11.5 19.6 14.9 25.8 14.9 29.4 24.0 44.7

DC [W] 20 % 1.7 1.8 3.7 3.6 3.6 4.6 4.6 8.7 1.7 2.4 8.5 3.7 3.7 1.9 2.7 9.2 16.3 11.3 20.0 14.9 26.3 17.1 29.6 13.0 24.4 18.1 34.0 23.2 41.6 26.7 49.8 36.3 70.1 10.3 18.1 15.3 28.6 22.3 42.0 10.7 18.0 12.2 21.9 16.4 30.0 17.4 34.6 27.0 51.2

DC [W] 30 % 1.7 1.9 3.8 3.7 3.7 4.7 4.7 9.1 1.7 2.8 8.6 3.8 3.8 2.3 3.3 10.3 18.8 13.7 24.5 17.5 31.6 21.0 37.7 15.4 28.9 22.9 42.5 28.5 52.5 31.8 61.7 45.0 90.1 11.6 21.4 19.0 35.6 27.6 52.1 11.6 20.9 14.4 26.4 19.7 36.6 22.2 43.8 33.3 64.4

DC [W] 40 % 1.8 2.0 4.0 3.8 3.8 4.8 4.8 9.4 1.8 3.2 8.8 4.0 4.0 2.6 4.0 12.0 21.4 15.9 28.7 20.4 37.6 24.9 45.2 17.7 33.4 26.7 51.4 33.5 62.8 36.8 73.8 53.9 106.3 13.6 24.4 22.5 42.0 32.7 63.0 12.9 24.0 16.5 30.3 23.2 43.6 26.6 53.1 39.2 75.8

DC [W] 50 % 1.9 2.1 4.1 4.0 4.0 5.0 5.0 9.7 1.9 3.6 9.0 4.1 4.1 3.0 4.6 13.0 23.7 17.7 32.3 23.0 42.6 27.6 51.1 19.8 37.6 33.3 58.1 38.0 73.0 41.2 82.2 61.3 122.1 15.0 27.2 25.1 48.1 36.9 72.4 14.2 25.9 18.2 34.0 25.5 48.6 30.5 60.4 44.9 86.1

DC [W] 60 %

T16

14.1 25.6 19.3 35.4 25.0 46.9 30.4 56.7 21.1 41.1 33.0 64.5 42.1 80.9 44.2 90.5 67.8 134.5 15.9 29.3 27.4 53.2 41.1 79.4 14.9 28.0 19.3 37.0 27.7 53.8 33.6 67.1 49.0 94.8

T26

TC-L/F

The Lighting Handbook

219

DC [W] 70 % 2.4 2.4 4.3 4.2 4.2 5.2 5.2 10.1 2.1 4.5 9.5 4.3 4.3 3.8 5.8 15.3 28.1 20.8 39.1 27.2 51.4 33.3 62.6 22.8 44.7 35.8 71.6 46.3 89.6 48.4 99.8 74.4 147.9 17.3 32.2 32.8 58.6 44.6 88.0 15.7 30.6 20.8 40.6 30.0 59.5 37.0 74.5 53.7 105.2

DC [W] 100 % 3.2 3.2 4.5 4.5 4.5 5.5 5.5 10.5 2.4 5.5 10.5 4.5 4.5 4.9 7.7 17.4 32.6 24.3 46.7 32.0 61.4 40.4 77.1 27.1 51.5 43.8 86.3 55.1 110.2 57.0 117.1 90.6 178.0 19.4 37.0 35.3 69.6 54.1 108.5 17.7 33.1 24.6 47.1 36.3 70.9 46.1 89.0 64.4 125.4

Control gear/luminaire EMpowerX EMpowerX EMpowerX EMpowerX EMpowerX EMpowerX EMpowerX EMpowerX EMpowerX EMpowerX EMpowerX EMpowerX EMpowerX EMpowerX EMpowerX PCA PCA PCA PCA PCA PCA PCA PCA PCA PCA PCA PCA PCA PCA PCA PCA PCA PCA PCA PCA PCA PCA PCA PCA PCA PCA PCA PCA PCA PCA PCA PCA PCA PCA 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI DALI / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / ARTSIGN C EW ARTSIGN C ED COMSIGN 150 CROSSIGN 110 CROSSIGN 110 ERI CROSSIGN 160 CROSSIGN 160 ERI CUBESIGN 210 ERGOSIGN LED ECOSIGN LED IP 65 FREESIGN 300 PURESIGN 150 PURESIGN 150 ERI RESCLITE C SQUARESIGN 300

14/24 T5 EXCEL one4all lp xitec II 14/24 T5 EXCEL one4all lp xitec II 21/39 T5 EXCEL one4all lp xitec II 21/39 T5 EXCEL one4all lp xitec II 28/54 T5 EXCEL one4all lp xitec II 28/54 T5 EXCEL one4all lp xitec II 35/49/80 T5 EXCEL one4all lp xitec II 35/49 T5 EXCEL one4all lp xitec II 14/24 T5 EXCEL one4all lp xitec II 14/24 T5 EXCEL one4all lp xitec II 21/39 T5 EXCEL one4all lp xitec II 21/39 T5 EXCEL one4all lp xitec II 35/49/80 T5 EXCEL one4all lp xitec II 35/49 T5 EXCEL one4all lp xitec II 28/54 T5 EXCEL one4all lp xitec II 28/54 T5 EXCEL one4all lp xitec II 35/49/80 T5 EXCEL one4all lp xitec II 80 T5 EXCEL one4all lp xitec II 18 18 36 36 58 58 T8 T8 T8 T8 T8 T8 EXCEL EXCEL EXCEL EXCEL EXCEL EXCEL one4all one4all one4all one4all one4all one4all lp lp lp lp lp lp xitec xitec xitec xitec xitec xitec II II II II II II

18/24 TCL EXCEL one4all c xitec II 18/24 TCL EXCEL one4all c xitec II 18/24 TCL EXCEL one4all c xitec II 18/24 TCL EXCEL one4all c xitec II 21/39 T5 EXCEL one4all lp xitec II 21/39 T5 EXCEL one4all lp xitec II 21/39 T5 EXCEL one4all lp xitec II 21/39 T5 EXCEL one4all lp xitec II 35/49/80 T5 EXCEL one4all lp xitec II 80 T5 EXCEL one4all lp xitec II

The Lighting Handbook

220

ONLITE central CPS central battery system

Ballast/lumen factor table

AC power [100 %] 230 V/50 Hz [VA] 15.2 27.1 15.0 27.7 20.2 38.4 27.9 52.6 33.1 57.9 40.2 74.9 30.5

Emergency lighting level

Light source TC-S/E TC-D/E TC-D/T

Wattage 1/11 W 2/11 W 1/13 W 2/13 W 1/18 2/18 1/26 2/26 1/32 2/32 1/42 2/42 W W W W W W W W

DC [W] 5% 6.4 8.7 6.4 9.1 7.0 11.1 8.7 14.1 9.4 14.5 10.4 15.4 8.9

DC [W] 10 % 7.5 10.4 7.5 11.0 8.5 13.6 10.5 17.4 12.1 19.7 13.0 21.8 10.6

DC [W] 15 % 8.2 11.7 7.8 12.6 10.0 16.4 12.4 21.0 14.1 24.5 15.6 27.4 12.6

DC [W] 20 % 8.6 13.1 8.5 14.0 11.1 18.1 13.6 23.7 16.0 28.1 18.5 31.8 13.9

DC [W] 30 % 9.8 15.3 10.2 16.3 12.8 22.2 15.9 28.5 19.0 34.4 22.9 40.5 16.6

DC [W] 40 % 11.2 17.3 11.2 18.1 14.2 25.3 18.5 33.0 22.3 40.0 27.7 48.5 18.9

DC [W] 50 % 12.4 19.6 11.9 21.0 15.6 28.2 20.4 37.4 25.0 44.6 31.4 55.6 21.6

DC [W] 60 % 13.0 21.1 13.1 21.0 16.8 30.7 22.2 40.7 26.4 47.9 35.0 60.1 23.6

TC-T/E

TC-DD

1/28 W

The Lighting Handbook

221

DC [W] 70 % 14.4 23.0 13.9 24.1 18.0 33.5 24.0 45.0 29.0 51.7 37.1 65.2 25.8

DC [W] 100 % 15.3 27.0 15.0 27.8 20.2 37.5 27.7 52.7 32.4 58.3 44.9 74.5 30.5

Control gear/luminaire PCA 1 x 11/13 TC EXCEL one4all xitec II PCA 2 x 11/13 TC EXCEL one4all xitec II PCA 1 x 11/13 TC EXCEL one4all xitec II PCA 2 x 11/13 TC EXCEL one4all xitec II PCA PCA PCA PCA PCA PCA PCA PCA 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 x x x x x x x x 18 TC EXCEL one4all xitec II 18 TC EXCEL one4all xitec II 26-57 TC EXCEL one4all xitec II 26/32/42 TC EXCEL one4all xitec II 26-57 TC EXCEL one4all xitec II 26/32/42 TC EXCEL one4all xitec II 26-57 TC EXCEL one4all xitec II 26/32/42 TC EXCEL one4all xitec II

PCA 1 x 28 TC-DD EXCEL one4all xitec II

The Lighting Handbook

Chapter 8

Technology and tables

Protection classes Degrees of protection Fire protection Explosion-proofness Ball-proofness Cleanroom technology

225 226 228 230 232 232

Fusing and rating of circuits 234 Impact on materials 242 246 247 248 254 254 256

Maintenance of lighting systems Environmental conditions Lamp luminous flux maintenance factor (LLMF) and lamp survival factor (LSF) Table for luminaire maintenance factor (LMF) Table for room surface maintenance factor (RSMF) Table of burning hours

The Lighting Handbook

Protection classes
Protection classes describe measures providing protection against touch-sensitive voltages. These measures are set out in the EN 61140 standard and marked with symbols in compliance with IEC 60417. Zumtobel luminaires are classified into the following classes of protection: Class I luminaires The luminaire is designed for connection to a protective conductor. Protection class I is not identified by a symbol. The symbol indicating the protective earth v is often used. Unless specified otherwise, all luminaires by Zumtobel comply at least with protection class I.

225

v w x

= Protection class I = Protection class II = Protection class III

Class II luminaires Class II luminaires have total insulation but no protective earth terminal. The Zumtobel range includes protection class II luminaires, for instance moistureproof batten luminaires and moisture-proof diffuser luminaires.

Class III luminaires Class III identifies luminaires that are intended for operation with protective extra low voltage (50 V max.). Architectural luminaires such as 2LIGHT MINI and MICROS-S are protection class III luminaires.

The Lighting Handbook

226

Degrees of protection
Degrees of protection indicate the following properties of equipment: the quality of its protection against direct contact its sealing against ingress of solid foreign bodies (dust, stones, sand, etc.) its sealing against the ingress of water The type of protection is defined by two degrees of protection in accordance with IEC529: d egree of shock-hazard protection and protection against ingress of solid foreign bodies (1st digit) d egree of protection against the ingress of water (2nd digit)

For example IP23:

IP
INGRESS PROTECTION

Protection against ingress of solid foreign bodies having > 12 mm (medium-sized solid bodies), insertion of fingers or objects. Protection against ingress of water falling at any angle up to 60 from vertical. There must be no adverse effect (spray water).

Degrees of protection for technical luminaires

Protection against ingress of solid foreign bodies as per rst digit IP0X IP1X IP2 X IP3X IP4X IP5 X IP6X Unprotected against ingress of solid foreign bodies Protection against solid bodies > 50 mm Protection against solid bodies > 12 mm Protection against solid bodies > 2.5 mm Protection against solid bodies > 1 mm Dust-protected (limited ingress of dust) Dust-tight (no ingress of dust)

Protection against moisture as per second digit IPX 0 IPX1 IPX 2 IPX 3 IPX 4 IPX 5 IPX 6 IPX 7 IPX 8 No special protection Drip-proof protection against water drops Protection against water drops up to 15 from the vertical Rainproof protection against spray water up to 60 Splash-proof protection against spray water from all directions Jet-proof protection against jets of water Protection against heavy seas (conditions on ship decks) Watertight protection against immersion (pressure and time specified) Protection against immersion under pressure (with instructions from manufacturer)

The Lighting Handbook

227

Applications for luminaires with increased protection

Damp locations Bakeries Manure sheds Animal-feed preparation facilities Industrial kitchens Boiler rooms Commercial workshops Granaries (Deep-freeze) cold storage Pump houses Sculleries Laundries Wet locations Beer or wine cellars Shower cubicles Meat processing facilities Electroplating facilities Greenhouses Dairies Workshops using wet processes Car wash areas Agricultural facilities IP44 Beer or wine cellars IP44 Shower cubicles Stores, storerooms for hay, straw, feedstuff IP44 Intensive stock farming IP44 Animal sheds IP44 Adjoining rooms of animal sheds IP44 Facilities with increased re risk Workrooms Woodworking Sawmills Paper processing Textile processing Treatment and fabrication Gymnasia and sports halls Badminton courts Squash courts Indoor tennis courts Gymnasia and sports halls IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 ballproof luminaires ballproof luminaires with all-round cover; maximum mesh size 60 mm IP50 IP50 IP50 IP50 IP50 IP50 The following generally applies: IPX5: for cleaning using water jets IP54+FF: when increased fire risk IPX 4 IPX 4 IPX 5 IPX 4 IPX 4 IPX 4 IPX 4 IPX 4 The following generally applies: IPX5: for cleaning using water jets IPX1 IPX1 IPX1 IPX1 IPX1 IP20 IPX1 IPX1 IPX1 IPX1 IPX1 The following generally applies: IPX5: for cleaning using water jets IPX4: in rinsing areas

The Lighting Handbook

228

Fire protection
Luminaire identication marking The following criteria must be taken into account: p osition of normal use f ire behaviour of environment and mounting surfaces m inimum clearance from combustible substances and materials Luminaires marked with U This symbol indicates the surface temperature of luminaire. External surfaces where highly flammable materials such as dust or fibres may accumulate, even in case of use according to purpose, must not exceed specific temperatures. The d luminaire mark was withdrawn in 1999. A period of transition was agreed that allowed the d mark to be applied until 01/08/2005. Since 01/08/1998, the U mark introduced by EN 60598 has been applied. The U mark limits the temperature to 90 C max. on horizontal surfaces during normal operation and to 115 C in the event of a ballast fault. On vertical surfaces, 150 C must not be exceeded. Luminaires with theQ mark Luminaires which carry the Q mark are intend e d for installation in furniture. They are designed so that in the event of a ballast fault, flame-retardant and normally flammable materials as specified in DIN 4102 cannot be ignited, e.g. in corners of wooden furniture. The materials may be painted, veneer e d or varnished. Luminaires with theq mark Luminaires which carry the q mark are intend e d for mounting in or on furniture made of materials whose flammability is not known. They are designed so that in normal operation any mounting surface or other adjacent furniture surfaces do not exceed a temperature of 95 C.

The Lighting Handbook

229

Fire protection: Place of use Mark Requirements

Place of use

Luminaire mark

Requirements for luminaires with discharge lamps as specified in EN 60598-1

Building parts made of non-combustible building materials according to DIN 4102 Part 1 Building parts made of flame-retardant building materials according to DIN 4102 Part 1

as specified in EN 60598-1 on the mounting surface Mounting surface Operation <130 C abnormal <180 C ballast fault

Facilities with increased as specified in EN 60598-2-24 fire risk according to luminaire surfaces DIN VDE 0100 Part 720 IP5X horizontal vertical Operation < 90 C <150 C normal <115 C <150 C abnormal/ ballast fault

Agricultural facilities as specified in EN 60598-2-24 with increased fire risk luminaire surfaces according to IP54 horizontal vertical Operation DIN VDE 0100 Part 720 Installation < 90 C <150 C normal DIN VDE 0100 Part 705 marking <115 C <150 C abnormal/ VDS 8/83 Form 2033 ballast fault

Installation objects whose fire behaviour is specified as flame retardant or Permissive normally flammable in location DIN 4102 Part 1 markings

as per DIN VDE 0710 Part 14 on the mounting surface and adjacent surfaces Mounting surface Operation <130 C abnormal <180 C ballast fault as per DIN VDE 0710 Part 14 on the mounting surface and adjacent surfaces Mounting surface Operation < 95 C normal <130 C abnormal <130 C ballast fault

Installation objects with unknown fire behaviour Permissive location markings

The Lighting Handbook

230

Explosion-proofness

b
Directive 94/9/EC Directive 94/9/EC specifies the requirements for all devices and protection systems for use in explosion-prone areas. Over and above this, this Directive now directly includes the Basic safety requirements for explosion-proof equipment. Manufacturers of explosion-proof equipment have to provide evidence of a quality assurance system to be tested by a notified body.

Flammable gases, vapours and mists Zone 0 A hazardous explosive atmosphere is present continuously or long term. Zone 1 A hazardous explosive atmosphere can be expected to occur occasionally. Zone 2 A hazardous explosive atmosphere can be expected to occur only rarely and, if any, short term.

Combustible dusts Zone 20 includes areas in which there is a permanent, long-term or frequent explosive atmosphere consisting of dust-air mixtures. Zone 21 includes areas in which an explosive atmosphere consisting of dust-air mixtures can be expected to occur occasionally and short term. Zone 22 includes areas in which an explosive atmosphere cannot be expected to occur due to disturbance of deposited dust. If an explosive atmosphere should nevertheless occur, this will most probably happen only rarely and short term. Directive 99/92 EC (Workplace Directive) Also important is the description of hazard areas in explosion-prone workplaces, and a resulting graded safety profile for the equipment used. As this Directive was drafted according to the ECs new approach, the manufacturers declaration of conformity, combined with CE marking of the products, was introduced for explosion-proof equipment as well. A detailed commentary on Directive 94/9/EC is included in the Directive 94/9/EC by the European Parliament and the Council of 23March 1994 section. Since 1 July 2003, it has superseded all directives on explosion protection previously effective at European level.

The Lighting Handbook

231

Equipment of Group 2 including potential ignition source

Equipment cat. 1

Equipment cat. 2

Equipment cat. 3

Yes

Electrical appliance

No

Engine with internal combustion

EC type examination

Documentation of notified body

Documentation of manufacturer

Internal production control Basic safety and health requirements

Classication of max. surface temperatures in electrical equipment of Class 2

Temperature class T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6

Max. permissible surface temperature of equipment in C 450 300 200 135 100 85

Ignition temperatures of ammable substances in C > > > > > > 450 300 450 300 200 200 135 100 135 85 100

The Lighting Handbook

232

Ball-proofness
Luminaires for sports halls must be ballproof according to DIN VDE 0710-13. Balls hitting luminaires must not damage them so as to cause luminaire parts to fall down. In a test conforming with the relevant standard, the luminaire has to withstand 36 hits from three directions at a maximum impact speed of 60 km/h, the ball used having the size of a handball. When choosing the luminaires, the rod guards grid width must be matched to the sport played in the hall: it must always be considerably smaller than the balls used, never of the same size, as balls may get stuck in the guard. Ballproof luminaires offered by Zumtobel include the MIREL T16 recessed luminaire and the MIRAL T16 surface-mounted luminaire as well as the VALUEA and GRAFT high-bay luminaires.

Cleanroom technology
Cleanroom compatibility tested CLEAN Advanced and CLEAN Supreme have been tested and assessed by the Fraunhofer Institute in Stuttgart (Germany) with respect to c leanroom compatibility for cleanrooms (particle emission behaviour of the luminaires) and c leanliness compatibility (disinfectability, electrostatic behaviour and chemical resistanc e). our. Airborne particle emission is used as a classification criterion in all international standards. The relevant maximum value for the permissible concentration of particles of a specific particle size constitutes the class limit.

Test setup A defined volume of air is aspirated by an air sampling probe and fed into a test chamber. The particles inside this test chamber are monitored and recorded appropriately. Exceeding the relevant limit values is decisive in order to classify the luminaires. If a limit value is not exceeded with a certainty of at least 95 %, the respective item of equipment may be regarded as suitable for use in this air cleanliness class.

Details on cleanroom compatibility The German VDI 2083 Guideline specifies a standardised procedure for all equipment used in a cleanroom. The common criterion for the cleanroom compatibility of luminaires and all other equipment is their particle emission behavi-

The Lighting Handbook

233

Details on cleanliness compatibility In order to be able to confirm cleanliness compatibility, as well as, quantities reflecting cleanroom compatibility that can be de tected by metrological methods, additional expert assessments and parameters were included in the tests conducted by the Fraunhofer Institute IPA. Cleanliness compatibility covers a large number of sector-based cleanliness requirem ents such as resistance to chemicals, surface quality, flow behaviour or electro s tatic charge characteristics. These are defined in the following standards and codes of practice, among others:

Hospital application areas: V DI 2167 Building services in hospitals D IN 1946-4 Ventilation and air conditioning Part 4 (Ventilation in hospitals)

Standardisation General: c lassification of air cleanliness cleanrooms and associated controlled environments according to DIN EN ISO 14644-1 (Federal Standard 209 has been withdrawn) c leanroom technology and cleanroom compatibility of equipment VDI 2083 E HEDG (European Hygienic Engineering & Design Group) Industrial application areas: GMP Guidelines (Good Manufacturing Practice) pharmaceuticals FDA (Food and Drug Administration) pharmaceuticals and foodstuffs Medicinal Product Law EU Pharmaceutical Regulation Good manufacturing practices Volume 4 (Medicinal products for human and veterinary use) Hazard Analytical Control Point (HACCP) Regulations foodstuffs

Airow systems in cleanrooms One of the basic criteria for the requirements placed on equipment in cleanrooms is the nature of the airflow system. The CLEAN luminaire has been designed for use in all cleanroom classes with a turbulent mixed airflow. In this commonly encountered airflow system, air enters the room with a turbulent flow, thereby causing continuous dilution and cleaning. According to GMP (Good Manufacturing Practice) classification, cleanroom Classes C to E and ISO Classes 6 to 9 can be achieved using this airflow system. Cleanrooms with low-turbulence displace ment flow, which are more expensive to build, allow air to initially enter the cleanroom with low turbulence. The design of laminar flow cleanrooms precludes the use of any luminaires other than extremely slim batten luminaires which disrupt the direct i onal flow of air as little as possible. The laminar flow system minimises contamination, and any contaminant is quickly eliminated. Cleanrooms in ISO Classes 1 to 6 and GMP Classes A and B are areas where this airflow system is used.

The Lighting Handbook

234

Fusing and rating of circuits

Tripping values of line circuit-breakers

Tripping characteristics B (quick-acting) C

Tripping current 3 to 5-fold rated current 5 to 10-fold rated current

For the operation of luminaires, automatic circuit breakers with C characteristics are recommended. In case of multipolar circuit breakers, the values specified by the manufacturer must be reduced by 20 %. The levels indicated in the table refer to simultaneous switch-on at the mains voltage peak with U N = 230 V.

Please note: the values given in the table are intended as reference values only and may deviate in individual cases. The specific range and type, as well as, the actual number of ballasts per luminaire must be taken into account. In case of metal halide lamps, the switch-on current is increased by ignition time shunting. In case of connection to circuit breakers with B characteristics, transformers should not be loaded above rating in order to avoid false tripping.

Loading of automatic circuit breakers for metal halide lamps maximum recommended number of electronic ballasts per automatic circuit breaker Electronic ballasts for HIT/HIT-DE/HIE and HIT-CE/HIT-TC-CE/ HIT-DE-CE/HIE-CE metal halide lamps, non-dimmable (TRIDONIC PCI range):
C10 C13 C16 C20 B10 B13 B16 B20 mm 2 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.5 1/20 W HI 1/35 W HI 1/70 W HI 24 16 10 33 22 18 14 42 28 26 20 48 12 15 10 10 19 13 13 19 13 13

32 8 30 6

1/150 W HI 7

20 4 6 7 7

The Lighting Handbook

235

Loading of automatic circuit breakers for electronic ballasts for uorescent and compact uorescent lamps maximum recommended number of electronic ballasts per automatic circuit breaker Electronic ballasts for T16 fluorescent lamps, not dimmable (TRIDONIC PC T5 PRO range):
C10 C13 C16 C20 B10 B13 B16 B20 mm 2 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.5 1/14 W T16 2/14 W T16 3/14 W T16 4/14 W T16 1/21 W T16 2/21 W T16 1/28 W T16 2/28 W T16 1/35 W T16 2/35 W T16 1/24 W T16 2/24 W T16 1/39 W T16 2/39 W T16 1/54 W T16 2/54 W T16 1/49 W T16 2/49 W T16 1/80 W T16 46 46 30 30 46 46 44 18 46 20 46 30 30 18 30 14 30 18 18 80 80 46 46 80 78 78 28 80 30 80 50 40 28 46 20 46 28 28 80 80 50 50 86 80 80 30 80 30 80 50 50 30 50 24 50 30 30 140 140 64 64 98 100 90 23 23 15 15 23 23 22 40 40 23 23 40 39 39 14 40 15 40 25 20 14 23 10 23 14 14 40 40 25 25 43 40 40 15 40 15 40 25 25 15 25 12 25 15 15 70 70 32 32 49 50 45 18 70 22 70 32 30 18 40 15 29 18 18

36 9 140 44 140 64 60 23 10 23 15 15

36 9 80 15

30 7 58 15

36 9 36 9

The Lighting Handbook

236

Fusing and rating of circuits

Electronic ballasts for T16 fluorescent lamps, Basic dimmable/DALIdimmable (TRIDONIC PCA T5 ECO/PCA T5 EXCEL one4all ranges):
C10 C13 C16 C20 B10 B13 B16 B20 mm 2 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.5 1/14 W T16 2/14 W T16 3/14 W T16 4/14 W T16 1/21 W T16 2/21 W T16 1/28 W T16 2/28 W T16 1/35 W T16 2/35 W T16 1/24 W T16 2/24 W T16 1/39 W T16 2/39 W T16 1/54 W T16 2/54 W T16 1/80 W T16 30 22 16 16 30 22 32 16 32 16 22 22 22 14 22 14 10 50 32 26 24 50 32 50 22 50 22 32 32 32 22 32 22 20 70 44 34 34 70 44 72 30 70 30 44 46 44 28 44 28 30 80 50 15 11 25 16 13 12 25 16 25 11 25 11 16 16 16 11 16 11 10 35 22 17 17 35 22 36 15 35 15 22 23 22 14 22 14 15 40 25 21 19 38 25 40 17 40 17 25 26 25 17 25 17 15

42 8 38 8 76 50 80 15 11 16

34 8 80 16

34 8 50 52 50 11 11 11

34 7 50 11

34 7 30 5

Electronic ballasts for T26 fluorescent lamps, non-dimmable (TRIDONIC PC E011/PC T8 PRO ranges):
C10 C13 C16 C20 B10 B13 B16 B20 mm 2 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.5 1/18 W T26 2/18 W T26 3/18 W T26 4/18 W T26 1/36 W T26 2/36 W T26 1/58 W T26 2/58 W T26 46/46 30/44 32/ 20/ 32/46 20/20 32/32 14/14 80/80 104/140 110/140 23/23 46/80 68/140 84/140 46/ 30/ 48/80 30/30 46/46 20/20 66/ 40/ 80/ 44/ 15/22 16/ 10/ 16/23 10/10 16/16 7/7 40/40 23/40 23/ 15/ 24/40 15/15 23/23 10/10 52/70 34/70 33/ 20/ 35/70 20/21 33/33 13/13 55/70 42/70 40/ 22/ 42/70 22/22 40/40 15/15

70/140 84/140 40/42 66/66 26/26 44/44 80/80 30/30

The Lighting Handbook

237

Electronic ballasts for T26 fluorescent lamps, Basic dimmable/DALIdimmable (TRIDONIC PCA T8 ECO/PCA T8 EXCEL one4all ranges):
C10 C13 C16 C20 B10 B13 B16 B20 mm 2 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.5 1/18 W T26 2/18 W T26 3/18 W T26 4/18 W T26 1/30 W T26 2/30 W T26 1/36 W T26 2/36 W T26 1/58 W T26 2/58 W T26 30 20 12 12 30 10 30 10 20 10 50 30 18 16 50 20 50 20 30 20 80 40 24 24 70 30 70 30 40 30 80 46 15 10 25 15 40 20 12 12 35 15 35 15 20 15 40 23 15 14 38 15 38 15 23 15

30 6 9 28 6 8 76 15 25 10 25 10 15 10

30 5 76 15

30 5 46 10

30 5

Electronic ballasts for TC-L compact fluorescent lamps, Basic dimmable/DALI-dimmable (TRIDONIC PCA TCL ECO/PCA TCL EXCEL one4all ranges):
C10 C13 C16 C20 B10 B13 B16 B20 mm 2 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.5 1/18 W TC-L 2/18 W TC-L 1/24 W TC-L 2/24 W TC-L 1/36 W TC-L 2/36 W TC-L 1/40 W TC-L 2/40 W TC-L 1/55 W TC-L 2/55 W TC-L 1/80 W TC-L 52 52 52 20 30 10 30 10 20 10 10 56 56 56 26 50 20 50 20 30 14 20 64 64 64 32 70 30 70 30 40 18 30 96 96 96 40 76 26 26 26 10 15 28 28 28 13 25 10 25 10 15 32 32 32 16 35 15 35 15 20 48 48 48 20 38 15 38 15 23 10 15

30 5 76 15

30 5 46 10

20 5 7 9 30 5 10 15

The Lighting Handbook

238

Fusing and rating of circuits

Electronic ballasts for TC-L compact fluorescent lamps, non-dimmable (TRIDONIC PC PRO FSD ranges):
C10 C13 C16 C20 B10 B13 B16 B20 mm 2 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.5 1/18 W TC-L 2/18 W TC-L 1/24 W TC-L 2/24 W TC-L 1/36 W TC-L 2/36 W TC-L 1/40 W TC-L 2/40 W TC-L 1/55 W TC-L 2/55 W TC-L 1/80 W TC-L 30 30 30 30 80 20 30 14 20 10 18 50 50 50 50 80 30 50 20 30 14 28 80 80 80 80 80 40 80 26 40 20 30 80 80 80 80 100 40 80 15 15 15 15 40 10 15 25 25 25 25 40 15 25 10 15 40 40 40 40 40 20 40 13 20 10 15 40 40 40 40 50 20 40 15 20 11 18

30 7 40 10

22 5 7 36 9 14

The Lighting Handbook

239

Loading of automatic circuit breakers for electronic ballasts for uorescent and compact uorescent lamps maximum recommended number of electronic ballasts per automatic circuit breaker Electronic ballasts for TC-DEL/TEL fluorescent lamps, non-dimmable (TRIDONIC PC PRO range):
C10 C13 C16 C20 B10 B13 B16 B20 mm 2 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.5 1/13 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 2/13 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 1/18 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 2/18 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 1/26 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 2/26 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 1/32 W TC-TEL 2/32 W TC-TEL 1/42 W TC-TEL 2/42 W TC-TEL 1/57 W TC-TEL 80 80 80 30 30 32 30 16 30 16 20 80 80 80 50 50 50 50 22 50 22 30 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 30 80 30 30 100 100 100 80 80 80 80 40 40 40 15 15 16 15 40 40 40 25 25 25 25 11 25 11 15 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 15 40 15 15 50 50 50 40 40 40 40 22 40 22 22

44 8 80 15

44 8 44 10

Electronic ballasts for TC-DEL/TEL compact fluorescent lamps Basic dimmable/DALI-dimmable (TRIDONIC PCA ECO/PCA EXCEL one4all ranges):
C10 C13 C16 C20 B10 B13 B16 B20 mm 2 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.5 1/13 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 2/13 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 1/18 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 2/18 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 1/26 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 2/26 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 1/32 W TC-TEL 2/32 W TC-TEL 1/42 W TC-TEL 2/42 W TC-TEL 40 28 30 22 30 22 26 10 26 10 60 40 50 32 50 32 38 18 38 18 80 60 70 46 70 46 50 24 50 24 80 64 76 68 76 56 58 28 58 28 20 14 15 11 15 11 13 5 13 5 30 20 25 16 25 16 19 9 19 9 40 30 35 23 35 23 25 12 25 12 40 32 38 34 38 28 29 14 29 14

The Lighting Handbook

240

Fusing and rating of circuits

Loading of automatic circuit breakers for low-voltage halogen incandescent lamps maximum recommended number of transformers per automatic circuit breaker Magnetic transformers for QT/QR/QR-CB(C) halogen incandescent lamps (TRIDONIC TMBx/OMTx ranges):
Power 20 W 35 W 50 W 70 W 80 W C10 C16 B10 B16 58 41 21 15 14 93 65 35 29 20 10 46 32 17 12 11

Magnetic transformers for QT/QR/QR-CB(C) halogen incandescent lamps (TRIDONIC OGT range):
Power 250 W 300 W 500 W n.r. = not recommended C10 C16 B10 B16 34 2 1 56 34 12 12 1 n.r. 23 12 n.r.

24 7 22 7

105 W 8

13 4 6

150 W 4 6 2 3 210 W 300 W 23 12 45 1 2 23 n.r. 1

n.r. = not recommended

Magnetic transformers for QT/QR/QR-CB(C) halogen incandescent lamps (TRIDONIC TMAx/TMDx ranges):
Power 20 W 35 W 40 W 50 W 60 W 70 W 80 W C10 C16 B10 B16 42 35 26 23 21 16 13 67 56 43 37 33 21 17 13 11 10 33 28 21 18 16 13 10

26 8 21 6

105 W 9

14 4 7

The Lighting Handbook

241

Line circuit breaker ratings for LED downlights and spotlights maximum number of DL recommended per line circuit breaker LED downlights/spotlights:
PANOS INFINITY 23 W LDE PANOS INFINITY 32 W LDE 2LIGHT PureWhite 18 W IYON / VIVO / CARDAN Essential, Essential+, e.g. 40 W Advanced, e.g. 47 W VIVO S LED 30 W ARCOS 2 LED 30 W DISCUS LED 30 W VIVO LED R123 12,5 W SL1000 LED 56 W SUPERSYSTEM 17 W SUPERSYSTEM 50 W DALI SUPERSYSTEM 25 W 110 V SUPERSYSTEM 50 W 110 V SUPERSYSTEM 32 W 110 V 9 18 15 15 15 70 2 17 11 25 11 25 25 25 25 90 22 14 33 14 33 15 30 35 35 35 110 3 27 18 40 18 40 16 32 30 30 30 70 3 27 18 33 18 33 50 50 50 90 35 23 43 23 43 26 51 70 70 70 110 5 46 30 56 30 56 B10 B13 B16 C10 B13 B16 11 9 8 13 10 9 18 12 12 20 16 13 25 22 17 32 26 21

The Lighting Handbook

242

Impact on materials
No material is resistant to all chemical influences. This is not really surprising, as there are so many chemicals and so many effects; in fact, they fill whole volumes with resistance tables. When assessing potential hazards, the degree of saturation of chemical substances and the ambient temperature must be taken into account. The accompanying tables therefore only provide a brief overview of frequently encountered applications and chemical impact. If you are unsure or have specific questions, your Zumtobel adviser will be happy to assist.

Excellent properties
IK code UV resistance Shock resistance Resistance to ageing Silicone-free Halogen-free International Food Standards (IFS) certification Glow-wire tested Heat resistance of luminaire plastics Flammability acc. to UL94 (ISO 60695) UV transmittance * limited UV stability of PC ** UV stabilised PC 08 + ** 6 Nm + * PMMA CHEMO Polyester 03 ++ 0.2 Nm ++ 07 ++ 4 Nm ++ 03 ++ 0.35 Nm ++

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 850C 130C V2 89% Yes 650C 90C* HB 91% Yes 850C 122C HB 89% HB Yes 850C

Recommendations according to application area

Damp locations Bake houses Damp cellars Fodder kitchens Large-scale catering establishments PC PMMA CHEMO

highly recommended suitable unsuitable * with plastic catches and special ceiling brackets (available on request)

-> to be continued on the next page

The Lighting Handbook

243

Wet locations Beer and wine cellars Breweries Wine cellars (using sulphur to steam out barrels) Damp pump rooms Meat-processing facilities Electroplating plants (caution: do not use V2A) Conservatories Cheese dairies Dairies Washing bays/car washes (motor vehicles) Rooms or areas in bathhouses or laundries Bathrooms/shower rooms Thermal spas and brine baths Agricultural premises Fodder preparation Greenhouses Storage areas/storerooms for hay, straw, fodder, fertilisers Areas for animal husbandry (stables)

PC

PMMA CHEMO

* *

Locations exposed to re hazards (only version with electronic ballast is re resistant) Woodworking Paper processing Textile processing plants Theatre workshops Drying rooms Garages Underground garages Car parks Private garages Vehicle depots Outdoor facilities Facilities on ramps (canopied) Gateways (canopied) Canopied railway platforms Canopied petrol stations Canopy roofs

The Lighting Handbook

244

Impact on materials

Chemical resistance of materials

Acetic acid up to 5 % Acetic acid up to 30 % Acetone Aliphatic hydrocarbons Ammonia 25 % Aniline Aromatic hydrocarbons Battery acid Beer Benzene Blood Bromic acid Carbon dioxide Carbon monoxide Carbon tetrachloride Caustic potash solution 30 % Chloroform Chlorophenol Cleaners naphtha (solvent) Cresol Dichloromethane Diesel fuel Diesel oil, crude oil Dimethyl benzene Dioxane Ethanol < 30% Ethanol > 30% Ether Ethyl acetate Fats: animal Fats: mineral Fats: vegetable Four-star petrol Fuel oil Glycerol PC PMMA CHEMO Polyester

resistant not resistant

The Lighting Handbook

245

Glycol Glysantin Hydrochloric acid (HCl) < 20 % Hydrochloric acid (HCl) > 20 % Hydrogen peroxide over 40 % Hydrogen peroxide up to 40 % Hydrogen sulphide Isopropyl alcohol Ketones Methyl alcohol Milk of lime Nitric acid over 20 % Nitric acid up to 10 % Nitric acid up to 20 % Petroleum ether Phenol Pyridine Regular petrol Seawater Silicone oil Soapsuds Soda Sodium hydroxide solution 2 % Sodium hydroxide solution 10 % Solution of sodium chloride Spirit of turpentine Sulphuric acid (H 2SO 4) < 50% Sulphuric acid (H 2SO 4) < 70% Sulphuric acid (H 2SO 4) > 70% Sulphuric acid (H 2SO 4) > 98% Sulphurous acid up to 5 % Synthetic detergent solution Toluene Trichloroethane Water up to 60C

PC

PMMA

CHEMO Polyester

The information given is valid under the following conditions: the chemical substance listed in the table is a basic ma terial and not part of a chemical compound. The ambient temperature is 22C. resistant not resistant

The Lighting Handbook

246

Maintenance of lighting systems

Today, the maintenance of lighting installations is a decisive factor in an installations balance of costs. According to the formula below (1), a lighting level required of E m = 500 lx at a standard maintenance factor of MF = 0.67 implies a new illuminance level of E new = 750 lx.

E m: maintained illuminance = maintenance value of illuminance

(1) E m = E neu x MF

Benet of a high MF lower luminaire investment costs reduced energy costs Benet of a low MF low maintenance costs longer maintenance intervals Please note: at a lower maintenance factor, illuminance may be constantly dimmed to the maintenance value to save energy (maintenance control).

The maintenance factor includes 4 components (2) MF = LLMF x LSF x LMF x RMF All these factors describe the decrease in illumi n ance. The maximum in each case is 1, corresponding to the new value. At the respec t ive time of maintenance, the various causes of the decrease in illuminance must be identified.

Maintenance factor components Lamp luminous flux mainten. factor LLMF Lamp survival factor LSF Luminaire maintenance factor LMF Room maintenance factor RMF Causes of illuminance decrease Ageing of lamps Failure of lamps Soiling of luminaire Soiling of room

The Lighting Handbook

Options for improving the maintenance factor l amp replacement already before the lamp service life ends (LLMF/LSF ) i mmediate replacement of lamps in case of failure (LSF = 1) u se of closed luminaires (LWF7 ) m ore frequent room cleaning (RWF7 )

247

160 % = E new 140 % 120 % 100 % 80 % 60 % 40 % 20 % 0 0.5 1.0 1.5 years 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 Example: Luminaire maintenance: every year Room surface maintenance: every 3 years Lamp replacement: every 3 years Faulty lamp replacement: immediately = Em

Environmental conditions In case you are not familiar with the appli cation, the following standard values apply; however, the tables below will help you calcu l ate the accurate maintenance factor according to formula (2).
Ambient condition Very Clean ( VC ) Maintenance interval recommended 3 years Working areas Cleanrooms, data centres, assembly workstations for electronic components Offices Schools Shops Laboratories Restaurants Warehouses Assembly bays Steel works Chemical plants Foundries Welding shops Grinding shops Wood processing Reference maintenance factor 0.80

Clean ( C ) Normal ( N )

3 years 2 years

0.67 0.57

Soiled ( S )

1 year

0.50

According to CIE volume 97, Maintenance of indoor electric lighting systems, as at 2005

The Lighting Handbook

248

Maintenance of lighting systems

Lamp luminous ux maintenance factor (LLMF) and lamp survival factor (LSF)
Lamps Service life given in hours 100 Halogen incandescent lamp CIE97:2005 T26 (low-loss ballast) triple-band uor. lamp ZVEI 2005 T26 (electronic ballast) triple-band uor. lamp ZVEI 2005/CIE97:2005 T26 (el. ballast) triple-band uor. lamp, long-life Philips MASTER TL-D Xtreme (long life) T26 (el. ballast) triple-band uor. lamp, long-life AURA Ultimate LL (long life) T16 (electronic ballast) triple-band ZVEI 2005 T16 (el. ballast) triple-band uor. lamp, long-life AURA SUPREME T5 HO LL (long life) Compact uorescent lamp CIE97:2005 TC-S, TC-D, TC-T 526 W (low-loss ballast) Compact uorescent lamp ZVEI 2005 TC-SEL, TC-TEL 542 W (electronic ballast) Compact uorescent lamp ZVEI 2005 TC-DEL 1026 W (electronic ballast) Compact uorescent lamp ZVEI 2005 TC-L 1836 W (low-loss ballast) Compact uorescent lamp ZVEI 2005 TC-L 1880 W (electronic ballast) Compact uorescent lamp ZVEI 2005 LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 500 0.99 1.00 0.99 1.00 0.99 1.00 0.99 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.99 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.98 0.99 0.98 1.00 0.98 1.00 0.98 1.00 0.99 1.00 0.99 1.00 1000 0.97 0.78 0.98 0.99 0.98 1.00 0.99 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.98 1.00 0.99 1.00 0.97 0.99 0.97 1.00 0.96 0.99 0.96 1.00 0.98 1.00 0.98 1.00 0.95 0.99 0.94 0.99 0.94 0.99 0.97 1.00 0.97 1.00 0.97 0.99 0.97 1.00 0.98 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.97 1.00 0.99 1.00 1500 2000 0.95 0.50 0.96 0.98 0.96 1.00 0.98 1.00 0.98 1.00 0.96 1.00 0.98 1.00 0.94 0.98 0.93 0.98 0.93 0.99 0.92 0.99 0.96 1.00 0.97 1.00 0.95 0.98 0.95 0.99 0.98 1.00 0.98 1.00 0.95 0.99 0.96 1.00 0.91 0.97 0.86 0.97 0.87 0.98 0.87 0.98 0.92 1.00 0.94 0.99 0.94 0.97 0.94 0.99 0.97 1.00 0.97 1.00 0.94 0.99 0.95 1.00 0.89 0.94 0.83 0.95 0.84 0.97 0.85 0.97 0.90 0.99 0.93 0.99 4000 6000

Values acc. to specifications by lamp manufacturers, January 2008, acc. to CIE97:2005 Technical report Guide on the Maintenance of Indoor Electric Lighting Systems 2 nd edition, and ZVEI publication Service life behaviour of discharge lamps for lighting of November 2005. For data of lamps by other manufacturers or other lamp types, please contact the respective manufacturer directly. The use of state-of-the-art ballast technology is a prerequisite. The switching frequency has a major influence on lamp survival. Most data are based on the standardised 3-hour switching rhythm acc. to IEC (2.75 h ON, 0.25 h OFF).

The Lighting Handbook

249

8000

10000

12000

14000

16000

18000

20000

22000

24000

30000

35000

40000

45000

0.93 0.95 0.93 0.98 0.96 1.00 0.97 1.00 0.93 0.98 0.94 1.00 0.87 0.86 0.80 0.81 0.82 0.93 0.82 0.96 0.89 0.98 0.91 0.98

0.92 0.93 0.92 0.98 0.95 1.00 0.97 1.00 0.92 0.98 0.93 1.00 0.85 0.50 0.78 0.60 0.80 0.76 0.80 0.91 0.88 0.95 0.90 0.98

0.92 0.83 0.92 0.97 0.95 1.00 0.96 1.00 0.92 0.98 0.92 1.00

0.91 0.60 0.91 0.95 0.94 1.00 0.95 1.00 0.91 0.97 0.91 1.00 0.90 0.90 0.94 1.00 0.95 1.00 0.90 0.97 0.90 0.99 0.90 0.75 0.93 1.00 0.94 1.00 0.90 0.96 0.90 0.99 0.90 0.50 0.93 1.00 0.94 0.99 0.90 0.91 0.90 0.99 0.93 1.00 0.94 0.99 0.90 0.80 0.90 0.99 0.92 1.00 0.93 0.99 0.89 0.50 0.89 0.99 0.89 0.99 0.88 0.98 0.88 0.98 0.88 0.98 0.91 1.00 0.92 0.99 0.90 0.98 0.91 0.99 0.90 0.90 0.91 0.99 0.90 0.70 0.91 0.99

0.79 0.55 0.79 0.80 0.88 0.86 0.90 0.96 0.78 0.60 0.88 0.62 0.90 0.95 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.75 0.89 0.50

The Lighting Handbook

250

Maintenance of lighting systems

Lamp luminous ux maintenance factor (LLMF) and lamp survival factor (LSF)
Lamps Service life given in hours 100 Metal halide lamp Ceramic (50150 W) CIE97:2005 Metal halide lamp Ceramic Philips CDM-T 70 W/Elite Metal halide lamp Ceramic Osram HCI-T 150 W/WDL PB Metal halide lamp Ceramic Osram HCI 250 W PB Metal halide lamp Quartz (250/400 W) CIE97:2005 Metal halide lamp Quartz Osram HQI-E 250 W/D Metal halide lamp Quartz Osram HQI-E 400 W/D Metal halide lamp Quartz Osram HQI-BT 400 W/N Metal halide lamp Quartz Philips HPI-T Plus 250/400 W Sodium vapour lamp 50/70 W ZVEI 2005 Sodium vapour lamp 150400 W (standard luminous ux level) ZVEI 2005 Sodium vapour lamp 150400 W (increased luminous ux level) ZVEI 2005 Sodium vapour lamp Philips SON(-T) PIA Plus 100400 W LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.99 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 500 0.95 0.99 0.99 1.00 0.93 1.00 0.96 0.99 0.98 0.99 0.98 0.99 0.97 0.99 0.97 0.99 0.98 1.00 0.99 1.00 0.99 1.00 0.99 1.00 0.99 1.00 1000 0.87 0.99 0.98 1.00 0.88 1.00 0.92 0.98 0.95 0.99 0.92 0.98 0.93 0.98 0.92 0.98 0.96 0.99 0.98 0.99 0.98 0.99 0.99 1.00 0.99 1.00 0.88 0.97 0.88 0.97 0.87 0.97 0.93 0.99 0.97 0.99 0.97 0.98 0.98 1.00 0.98 1.00 0.96 1.00 0.87 1.00 0.91 0.98 1500 2000 0.75 0.98 0.95 1.00 0.86 0.99 0.90 0.97 0.90 0.98 0.85 0.95 0.85 0.95 0.83 0.95 0.92 0.99 0.96 0.98 0.96 0.98 0.97 0.99 0.98 1.00 4000 0.72 0.98 0.91 1.00 0.80 0.99 0.87 0.94 0.87 0.97 0.80 0.91 0.80 0.91 0.77 0.91 0.86 0.98 0.93 0.97 0.93 0.97 0.96 0.98 0.97 1.00 6000 0.68 0.98 0.87 1.00 0.77 0.98 0.84 0.90 0.83 0.92 0.75 0.86 0.78 0.86 0.73 0.86 0.83 0.96 0.90 0.96 0.92 0.97 0.95 0.98 0.97 0.99

Values acc. to specifications by lamp manufacturers, January 2008, acc. to CIE97:2005 Technical report Guide on the Maintenance of Indoor Electric Lighting Systems 2 nd edition, and ZVEI publication Service life behaviour of discharge lamps for lighting of November 2005. For data of lamps by other manufacturers or other lamp types, please contact the respective manufacturer directly. The use of state-of-the-art ballast technology is a prerequisite. The switching frequency has a major influence on lamp survival. Most data are based on the standardised 3-hour switching rhythm acc. to IEC (2.75 h ON, 0.25 h OFF).

The Lighting Handbook

251

8000 0.64 0.95 0.85 0.98 0.73 0.96 0.81 0.85 0.79 0.86 0.70 0.79 0.74 0.79 0.72 0.79 0.80 0.93 0.89 0.93 0.91 0.96 0.94 0.97 0.96 0.98

10000 0.60 0.80 0.81 0.90 0.71 0.88 0.80 0.75 0.65 0.80 0.69 0.70 0.71 0.70 0.70 0.70 0.78 0.89 0.88 0.92 0.90 0.95 0.93 0.97 0.95 0.97

12000 0.56 0.50 0.80 0.50 0.69 0.70 0.75 0.62 0.63 0.73 0.65 0.61 0.69 0.61 0.69 0.61 0.76 0.84 0.88 0.89 0.89 0.93 0.92 0.95 0.95 0.96

14000

16000

18000

20000

22000

24000

30000

35000

40000

45000

0.60 0.68

0.56 0.63

0.53 0.55

0.50 0.50

0.74 0.75 0.87 0.84 0.88 0.92 0.92 0.93 0.94 0.93

0.73 0.66 0.87 0.79 0.88 0.90 0.91 0.92 0.94 0.92

0.72 0.59 0.87 0.72 0.88 0.88 0.91 0.90 0.93 0.88

0.71 0.50 0.86 0.63 0.88 0.84 0.90 0.86 0.93 0.86 0.85 0.50 0.87 0.79 0.90 0.81 0.92 0.82 0.87 0.70 0.90 0.73 0.92 0.77 0.90 0.55 0.89 0.43

The Lighting Handbook

252

Maintenance of lighting systems

Lamp luminous ux maintenance factor (LLMF) and lamp survival factor (LSF)
LED luminous ux classes* with the following specic values

Service life given in hours 1000 5000 1.00 1.00 0.99 1.00 0.99 1.00 0.98 1.00 0.98 1.00 0.97 1.00 0.97 1.00 0.96 1.00 0.96 1.00 0.95 1.00 10000 0.99 1.00 0.98 1.00 0.97 1.00 0.96 1.00 0.95 1.00 0.94 1.00 0.93 1.00 0.92 1.00 0.91 1.00 0.90 1.00 15000 0.99 1.00 0.97 1.00 0.96 1.00 0.94 1.00 0.93 1.00 0.91 1.00 0.90 1.00 0.88 1.00 0.87 1.00 0.85 1.00 20000 0.98 1.00 0.96 1.00 0.94 1.00 0.92 1.00 0.90 1.00 0.88 1.00 0.86 1.00 0.84 1.00 0.82 1.00 0.80 1.00 25000 0.98 1.00 0.95 1.00 0.93 1.00 0.90 1.00 0.88 1.00 0.85 1.00 0.83 1.00 0.80 1.00 0.78 1.00 0.75 1.00 30000 0.97 1.00 0.94 1.00 0.91 1.00 0.88 1.00 0.85 1.00 0.82 1.00 0.79 1.00 0.76 1.00 0.73 1.00 0.70 1.00 35000*** 0.97 1.00 0.93 1.00 0.90*** 1.00 0.86 1.00 0.83 1.00 0.79 1.00 0.76 1.00 0.72 1.00 0.69 1.00 0.65 1.00

L95 @ 50,000 h

LLMF LSF

1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.99 1.00 0.99 1.00 0.99 1.00 0.99 1.00 0.99 1.00

L90 @ 50,000 h

LLMF LSF

L85 @ 50,000 h

LLMF LSF

L80 @ 50,000 h

LLMF LSF

L75 @ 50,000 h

LLMF LSF

L70 @ 50,000 h

LLMF LSF

L65 @ 50,000 h

LLMF LSF

L60 @ 50,000 h

LLMF LSF

L55 @ 50,000 h

LLMF LSF

L50 @ 50,000 h

LLMF LSF

*A n LED luminous flux class is characterised by the useful service life Lx (basis selected: 50000 h) at a drop in luminous flux to x % (initial level = 100 %) and an ambient temperature of 25 C. Example: the LED luminous flux class at L80 @ 50000 h describes a drop in luminous flux to 80 % (LLWF = 0.80) at a useful service life of 50000 h. The maintenance factor values specified for an LED luminous flux class are intended to facilitate planning. They indicate the prospective luminous flux changes over the course of time. The maintenance factors for an assumed service life are available for planning purposes. Please note: the known lamp maintenance factors LLWF and LSF are applied to LED modules, although these are not lamps in the proper meaning of the term. LSF is assumed to be 1, as a total breakdown of the complete LED module can be neglected for planning purposes. The levels specified are in line with the drafts for IEC 62717 that have not yet been completed at the time of going to press.

The Lighting Handbook

253

40000 0.96 1.00 0.92 1.00 0.88 1.00 0.84 1.00 0.80 1.00 0.76 1.00 0.72 1.00 0.68 1.00 0.64 1.00 0.60 1.00

45000 0.96 1.00 0.91 1.00 0.87 1.00 0.82 1.00 0.78 1.00 0.73 1.00 0.69 1.00 0.64 1.00 0.60 1.00 0.55 1.00

50000 0.95 1.00 0.90 1.00 0.85*** 1.00 0.80** 1.00 0.75 1.00 0.70 1.00 0.65 1.00 0.60 1.00 0.55 1.00 0.50 1.00

55000 0.95 1.00 0.89 1.00 0.84 1.00 0.78 1.00 0.73 1.00 0.67 1.00 0.62 1.00 0.56 1.00

60000 0.94 1.00 0.88 1.00 0.82 1.00 0.76 1.00 0.70 1.00 0.64 1.00 0.58 1.00 0.52 1.00

65000 0.94 1.00 0.87 1.00 0.81 1.00 0.74 1.00 0.68 1.00 0.61 1.00

70000 0.93 1.00 0.86 1.00 0.79 1.00 0.72 1.00 0.65 1.00 0.58 1.00

75000** 0.93 1.00 0.85 1.00 0.78 1.00 0.70** 1.00 0.63 1.00 0.55 1.00

80000 0.92 1.00 0.84 1.00 0.76 1.00

85000 0.92 1.00

90000 0.91 1.00

95000 0.91 1.00

100000 0.90 1.00

LED luminaires can be compared by finding the matching LLWF and service life pair of values for the Lx @ 50000 h class in the same line, with LLWF x 100 corresponding to the luminous flux component (in %). Example: * ** L80 @ 50000 h corresponds to L70 @ 75000 h *** L90 @ 35000 h corresponds to L85 @ 50000 h

The Lighting Handbook

254

Maintenance of lighting systems

Table for luminaire maintenance factor (LMF)

Luminaire cleaning interval in years Environment type Luminaire type Batten lum. with open light distribution 0.98 Reflector exposed above (self-cleaning effect) Reflector enclosed above (no self-cleaning effect) Enclosed IP2X Dust-proof IP5X Indirect luminaires 0.96 0.95 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.95 0.95 0.93 0.92 0.96 0.92 0.92 0.91 0.89 0.87 0.93 0.89 0.88 0.88 0.83 0.83 0.91 0.85 0.96 0.95 0.94 0.94 0.96 0.93 0.93 0.90 0.89 0.88 0.94 0.86 0.89 0.86 0.81 0.82 0.90 0.81 0.83 0.83 0.72 0.77 0.86 0.74 0.95 0.94 0.93 0.93 0.92 0.91 0.91 0.87 0.84 0.85 0.92 0.81 SC C 0.5 N S SC C 1.0 N S SC 1.5 C

From CIE publication 97 Maintenance of indoor electric lighting systems, dated 2005, ICBN 3900734348 Ambient conditions: VC = very clean, C = clean, N = normal, S = soiled

Table for room surface maintenance factor (RSMF)

Luminaire cleaning interval in years Illumination type Direct Environment type VC C N S VC S N S VC C N S 0 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.5 0.98 0.96 0.92 0.87 0.97 0.93 0.87 0.77 0.95 0.89 0.77 0.60 1.0 0.97 0.95 0.91 0.86 0.96 0.91 0.84 0.75 0.93 0.86 0.73 0.56 1.5 0.97 0.94 0.90 0.86 0.95 0.91 0.84 0.75 0.92 0.85 0.72 0.55

Direct/Indirect

Indirect

From CIE publication 97 Maintenance of indoor electric lighting systems, dated 2005, ISBN 3900734348 The figures in the table above apply to reflection factors 70/50/20 and a medium-sized room (k = 2.5) Ambient conditions: VC = very clean, S = clean, N = normal, V = soiled

The Lighting Handbook

255

1.5 N S SC C

2.0 N S SC C

2.5 N S SC C

3.0 N S

0.87 0.83 0.74 0.79 0.88 0.73

0.80 0.79 0.64 0.73 0.83 0.65

0.94 0.92 0.91 0.91 0.93 0.77

0.89 0.84 0.80 0.83 0.91 0.88

0.84 0.80 0.69 0.77 0.86 0.66

0.78 0.75 0.59 0.71 0.81 0.57

0.93 0.91 0.89 0.90 0.92 0.86

0.87 0.82 0.77 0.81 0.90 0.73

0.82 0.76 0.64 0.75 0.85 0.60

0.75 0.71 0.84 0.68 0.80 0.51

0.92 0.87 0.87 0.89 0.92 0.85

0.85 0.79 0.74 0.79 0.90 0.70

0.79 0.74 0.61 0.73 0.84 0.55

0.73 0.68 0.52 0.65 0.79 0.45

2.0 0.97 0.94 0.90 0.86 0.95 0.91 0.83 0.75 0.92 0.84 0.72 0.55

2.5 0.97 0.94 0.90 0.86 0.95 0.91 0.83 0.75 0.92 0.84 0.72 0.55

3.0 0.97 0.94 0.90 0.86 0.95 0.91 0.83 0.75 0.92 0.84 0.72 0.55

3.5 0.97 0.94 0.90 0.86 0.95 0.91 0.83 0.75 0.92 0.84 0.72 0.55

4.0 0.97 0.94 0.90 0.86 0.95 0.91 0.83 0.75 0.92 0.84 0.72 0.55

4.5 0.97 0.94 0.90 0.86 0.95 0.91 0.83 0.75 0.92 0.84 0.72 0.55

5.0 0.97 0.94 0.90 0.86 0.95 0.91 0.83 0.75 0.92 0.84 0.72 0.55

5.5 0.97 0.94 0.90 0.86 0.95 0.91 0.83 0.75 0.92 0.84 0.72 0.55

6.0 0.97 0.94 0.90 0.86 0.95 0.91 0.83 0.75 0.92 0.84 0.72 0.55

The Lighting Handbook

256

Maintenance of lighting systems

Table of burning hours

Burning hours per lamp and year in hours 8760 h 7300 h 4960 h 3720 h 3100 h 1760 h 2580 h 1550 h

Working mode/ shift type 24-h shift working, Process monitoring/ control Double shift, 6 days/week Single shift, 6 days/week Single shift, 5 days/week

Switch-on period Days in use/year 365 365 310 310 310 310 258 258

Hours/day 24 h 24 h 16 h 16 h 10 h 10 h 10 h 10 h

Daylight-based control No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes

Daylight-based control: the lamps switch on automatically when there is too little daylight available. Data is based on the assumption that there is sufficient available daylight for half the year.

From CIE publication 97 Maintenance of indoor electric lighting systems, dated 2005

The Lighting Handbook

Chapter 9

Checklists

General information The ve steps of lighting design

258

Checklist 1: Lighting quality requirements (ELI requirements) 260 Checklist 2: Lighting quality analysis (ELI assessment) 264 General information Refurbishment of lighting systems 267

Checklist 3: Refurbishment of lighting systems 270 Checklist 4: Diagnosis in the event of malfunctions in luminaires 272 Checklist 5: Ofces 276

The Lighting Handbook

258

General information The five steps of lighting design

The ve steps of lighting design = help for structuring the lighting design scheme Determine lighting REQUIREMENTS S ELECT lamps, luminaires and lighting management Calculate NUMBER of luminaires required POSITION luminaires and lighting control ANALYSE the results

From experience we know that usually Step 1 = Determine lighting requirements, is not taken into account sufficiently. The checklist below should help the user to consider key questions for clarifying basic requirements. Accordingly, requirements are broken down as follows: general conditions lighting quality requirements visual performance vista visual comfort vitality empowerment

The lighting quality criteria are in line with those set by the EU. ELI (Ergonomic Lighting Indicator) was developed in col laboration with ETH Zurich and TU Ilmenau (Prof. Dr. Schierz). Understanding this task will allow for proper development of a well thought-out lighting solution based on the quality characteristics of lighting (page 10) and project-specific requirem ents. Analysis includes the assessment of lighting quality. In the process, the requirement criteria are taken into account. The formulations for assessment differ from the requirements (ELI assessment).

The Lighting Handbook

259

Requirements placed on lighting Underlying conditions Utilisation of rooms Size and height of room Ceiling structure Reflection factors Window areas Doors, passageways, circulation areas Multi-task areas Arrangement and material of furniture Protection types (foreign bodies and humidity) Protection classes (electrical installations) Influence by chemicals Fire protection Emergency lighting Energy consumption limits (kWh/year) Maximum power requirement (W/m 2) Budget for initial installation
checked 3

The Lighting Handbook

260

Checklist 1: Lighting quality requirements (ELI requirements)

Criterion A Visual performance
How well should the visual task be recognised? Explanation: Lighting in conformity with relevant standards is decisive for ensuring that the visual task can be identified and the related activities can be carried out. Consideration of the traditional quality characteristics of lighting has a major impact on visual task performance.

At the workstations, standard visual tasks have to be performed. visual tasks are the same across the whole area. colour distinction is required to a common extent. no extraordinary changes of viewing direction occur. Within the visual task area, hard shadows must be avoided. the field of vision should be free from sources of glare. reflections must be avoided.
* Minimum criterion, corresponds to values specified in the standards -2 -1 0 1 2 -2 -1 0 1 2 -2 -1 0 1 2 Mean value Visual task -2 -1 0* 1 2 -2 -1 0 1 2 -2 -1 0 1 2 -2 -1 0 1 2

Criterion B Vista
How do you want to experience the lighting solution in your environment? Explanation: In prestigious buildings, for example, light is not only needed for seeing but also enhances the looks of the interior. Light can provide guidance and create a favourable first visual impression of a room.

In the project planned, the lighting concept should blend in smoothly with the interior design. the lighting concept should be properly geared towards expectations. the lighting concept should facilitate orientation in the room. In the project planned, the first visual impression will be decisive. the perceptible quality of the luminaire will be of major importance. the cleanliness of the room and the lighting will be of major importance.
1 = does not apply at all; 5 = applies completely 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 Mean value Vista 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5

The Lighting Handbook

261

Criterion C Visual comfort

How much visual comfort is required in the room? Explanation: Light is needed not only in the visual task area, but also for perception in the room. Rooms should be illuminated with uniform brightness and lighting balance.

In the project planned, users must be particularly protected from annoying sources of glare. i t will be particularly important to identify three-dimensional structures in the room. the room should provide a bright and inviting impression. daylight must be taken into account. there must be no flickering light. larger dark areas should be avoided. In the area around the visual task, the room should be illuminated uniformly.
* Minimum criterion, corresponds to values specified in the standards -2 -1 0* 1 2 -2 -1 0 1 2

-2 -1 0 1 2 -2 -1 0 1 2 -2 -1 0 1 2 -2 -1 0 1 2 -2 -1 0 1 2

Mean value Visual comfort

Criterion D Vitality
How positive should the lights inuence be on people? Explanation: Light significantly influences peoples activity and sense of wellbeing. Moreover, it has a positive impact on their health and may even enhance or influence biological processes.

The lighting concept should make people feel good. should stimulate people. In the project planned, it should be possible, in particular, to adjust the lighting to the brightness level required. the effect to be created should be as natural as possible. peoples circadian rhythm should be particularly taken into account. In the project planned, special emphasis is put on protection against sources of annoyance or adverse health effects.
1 = does not apply at all; 5 = applies completely 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5

Mean value Vitality

The Lighting Handbook

262

Checklist 1: Lighting quality requirements (ELI requirements)

Criterion E Empowerment
To what extent should the lighting adjust to my personal requirements? Explanation: Varying visual requirements, visual tasks or periods of use call for options to individually influence ones lighting situation. Sensors and control systems help users adjust the lighting situation to their personal needs.

In the project planned, the user should be able to personally influence the lighting situation. a variety of tasks must be taken into account. The lighting should be switched automatically. Artificial lighting should be controlled by daylight sensors. The lighting should be controlled on the basis of time. Any future layout changes should be taken into account.
1 = does not apply at all; 5 = applies completely 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 Mean value Empowerment

ELI LENI requirements

Application: the Visual mean performance values of the individual criteria are entered on the centre lines of the spider chart.

ELI
5

1 Visual performance
A

LENI
Calculation see page 23

E
Empowerment

3
E
5

-1 2 1 -2 1 31 2 -2 -1
4 3 4 5

1 0

2
2

-1

3
2

4
3

5B Vista
4 5B Vista

Empowerment

3 4 5

1 -2 1 1 2 -2 -1 0

60
60 120

120

1 2

1 2

0
kWh/m2 a

180
kWh/m2 a

180

D
Vitality

D
Vitality

C
Visual comfort

Visual comfort

The Lighting Handbook

263

Selection of lamps, luminaires and lighting management Lamp type Luminaire range and model Lighting management range and modules

Checked 3

Calculate number of luminaires required Rough calculation (Quickplan/Quickcalc) Detailed calculation (Dialux/Relux) Planning conditions (maintenance, reflection)

Checked 3

Positioning of luminaires and lighting control Positioning the luminaires structural situation orientation (avoid reflections and glare) spacings between luminaires (regular patterns) peripheries alignment Technical infrastructure (distribution cabinet, clamping compartment, ) Position of control gear Emergency lighting

Checked 3

The Lighting Handbook

264

Checklist 2: Lighting quality analysis (ELI assessment)

Criterion A Visual performance
How well can the visual task be recognised? Explanation: Lighting in conformity with relevant standards is decisive for ensuring that the visual task can be identified and the related activities can be carried out. Consideration of the traditional quality characteristics of lighting has a major impact on visual task performance.

In the main visual task area, the lighting complies with the maintenance value of illuminance. provides uniformity of illuminance. complies with the colour rendering index. In the area around the visual task, the illuminance level required is achieved. In the lighting installation as it exists at present, annoying hard shadows, irritating direct glare and annoying reflections are avoided.
* Minimum criterion, corresponds to values specified in the standards -2 -1 0 1 2 -2 -1 0 1 2 -2 -1 0 1 2 Mean value Visual task -2 -1 0* 1 2 -2 -1 0 1 2 -2 -1 0 1 2 -2 -1 0 1 2

Please note: EN 12464 specifies standard values; values may be lower only if visual tasks are modified. Where there are several task areas, calculate and assess the mean value for all of them.

Criterion B Vista
How do you experience the lighting solution in your environment? Explanation: In prestigious buildings, for example, light is not only needed for seeing but also enhances the looks of the interior. Light can provide guidance and create a favourable first visual impression of a room.

The lighting concept enhances interior design features. fulfils my personal expectations. takes passageways, circulation areas and activity zones into consideration. creates a hierarchy of perception (lighting focuses). The luminaires make a high-quality impression. The luminaires are neither soiled nor affected by other foreign substances.
1 = does not apply at all; 5 = applies completely 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 Mean value Vista

The Lighting Handbook

265

Criterion C Visual comfort

How much visual comfort is provided in the room? Explanation: Light is needed not only in the visual task area, but also for perception in the room. Rooms should be illuminated with uniform brightness and lighting balance.

The lighting solution produces no glare (UGR). The lighting components are balanced and matched to the room. The ceiling and walls are pleasantly bright. The lighting solution takes daylight into account and uses it. does not flicker. does not allow major dark areas in the room. The task area environment is uniformly illuminated.
* Minimum criterion, corresponds to values specified in the standards

-2 -1 0* 1 2 -2 -1 0 1 2 -2 -1 0 1 2

-2 -1 0 1 2 -2 -1 0 1 2 -2 -1 0 1 2 -2 -1 0 1 2 Mean value Visual comfort

Criterion D Vitality
How positive is the lights inuence on the people? Explanation: Light significantly influences peoples activity and sense of wellbeing. Moreover, it has a positive impact on their health and may even enhance or influence biological processes.

The lighting is one of the factors that make me feel good. has a stimulating effect. adjusts to the brightness level required. The lighting creates a natural, pleasant effect. The lighting stabilises/enhances the users circadian rhythm. There are no sources of annoyance or adverse health effects.
1 = does not apply at all; 5 = applies completely 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 Mean value Vitality

The Lighting Handbook

266

Checklist 2: Lighting quality analysis (ELI assessment)

Criterion E Empowerment
To what extent does the lighting adjust to my personal requirements? Explanation: Varying visual requirements, visual tasks or periods of use call for options to individually influence ones lighting situation. Sensors and control systems help users adjust the lighting situation to their personal needs.

The installation can be switched or dimmed. A variety of lighting scenes can be called up. Presence detectors make sure that the lighting switches automatically. Thanks to daylight sensors, the artificial lighting adjusts to daylight changes over the course of the day. Automated, dynamic scenes are available. Luminaires and switches can be rearranged flexibly. The luminaires are arranged to allow for flexible changes in the room utilisation without major effort.
1 = does not apply at all; 5 = applies completely

1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5

Mean value Empowerment

ELI LENI assessments

Visual performance
Application: the mean values A of the individual criteria are entered on the centre lines of the spider chart. 2

ELI
E
Empowerment 5 4

1 Visual performance
A

LENI
Calculation see page 23

0 3
E
Empowerment 5

-1 2 1 -2 4 1 31 2 -2 -1
3 4 5

1 0

2
2

-1

3
2

4
3

5B Vista
4 5B Vista

3 4 5

1 -2 1 1 2 -2 -1 0

60
60 120

120

1 2

1 2

0
kWh/m2 a

180
kWh/m2 a

180

D
Vitality

D
Vitality

C
Visual comfort

Visual comfort

Other analyses Situation regarding standards Economic efficiency Budget Documentation Methods of presentation

The Lighting Handbook

General information Refurbishment of lighting systems

The following list provides clues for discussion with the customer. The potentials stated draw a comparison between con temporary lighting solution options available today with the technology approx. 15 years ago. In a project, viable savings must be accura tely calculated in the design stage. The savings apply only on a case-by-case basis. If several measures are taken, they will complement each other without the levels adding up.

267

1. Saving energy, CO 2 and costs Potential Pros savings 1. Advanced materials Todays reflectors and innovative surface finishes provide for more efficient luminaires. 2. Use of daylight The LUXMATE daylight-based lighting control system provides for high energy savings where sufficient daylight is available. up to 30 %

up to 60 %

3. Improvement of lamps and control gear up to 40 % Innovations in the electronic control of lamps, optimised temperatures and improvements of the lamps physical properties provide for extensive savings. 4. Taking ageing into account The balance between the new value and minimum illuminance can be saved by dimmable control (Maintenance Control). 5. Taking room utilisation into account Using presence detectors or a time-based control system, the lighting can be adjusted precisely to the time/s of use. up to 17 %

up to 25 %

The Lighting Handbook

268

General information Refurbishment of lighting systems

2. Improved ergonomic compatibility Potential Pros savings 1. Increased productivity According to various studies, an individuals productivity can be significantly improved by an upgraded lighting solution (e.g. research by TU Ilmenau, AIF no. 9955). 2. Fewer errors According to various studies, peoples error rate can be minimised by an upgraded lighting solution (e.g. research by TU Ilmenau, AIF no. 9955). 3. Increased alertness The human physiology is decoded step-by-step, allowing to perfectly adjust the lighting to the individual (e.g. doctoral thesis by Susanne Fleischer, ETH Zrich). 4. Enhanced sense of wellbeing Pleasant brightness levels and personal control can have a positive impact on an individuals sense of wellbeing (e.g. Light Right Consortium).

Please note: It is difficult to provide exact and generally applicable figures; however, measurable increases were achieved in individual cases. Minor increases already result in high economic benefits.

3. I mproved maintenance conditions (employment of staff for cleaning, maintenance and monitoring) Potential Pros savings 1. Extension of maintenance cycle Over recent years, the service life of lamps has been significantly extended (e.g. AURA SUPREME). 2. Reduction in maintenance costs Contemporary luminaires frequently come in a closed design, allowing for easy cleaning (e.g. MELLOW LIGHT IV, LIGHTFIELDS, PERLUCE). 3. Automatic monitoring of installations Today, the facility management tools allow for automatic, central monitoring of installations (e.g. in emergency lighting/ONLITE). 4. Energy savings Easy cleaning luminaires and extension of the maintenance cycle result in a reduced number of luminaires required, and thus energy savings (e.g. TECTON I IP). up to +50 %

up to 30 %

up to 80 %

up to 20 %

The Lighting Handbook

269

4. Additional arguments Pros 1. Improvements in environmental factors Today, WEEE and RoHS provide the basis for manufacturing luminaires. Environmental impact has been reduced (e.g. lead/cadmium). 2. State-of-the-art The latest lighting solutions reflect the state-of-the-art and an improved situation in terms of lighting standards.

Collecting data for lighting refurbishment

The following forms are intended to help you collect all relevant data required for evaluating the situation in terms of existing lighting installations. They provide the basis for comparing technical lighting features and for calculating costs.

The Lighting Handbook

270

Checklist 3: Refurbishment of lighting systems

Project Address Contact Tel. Fax Activities in room

Luminaire type A Number of luminaires Number of lamps per luminaire Type of ballast System power per luminaire incl. ballast (W) Illuminance Luminaire type B Number of luminaires Number of lamps per luminaire Type of ballast System power per luminaire incl. ballast (W) Illuminance

Old system

Option 1

Option 2

Total installed load in kW ON period each day (h) Working days per year Annual ON period (h) Power consumption in kWh/a Annual savings in kWh Basic power price kWh/year Power costs per kWh Annual power costs in kWh Annual savings

The Lighting Handbook

271

Room length Room width Room height

Reection: wall

ceiling % floor % E min g= = E mean lx lx

Uniformity E mean = E min =

Room sketch:

Costs Cleaning per luminaire/year Lamp replacement (incl. lamp)

Old system

Option 1

Option 2

The Lighting Handbook

272

Checklist 4: Diagnosis in the event of malfunctions in luminaires

1. Fundamental analysis in luminaires with electronic ballast or dimmable electronic ballast:
Error occurring Luminaire was recently installed but cannot be switched on. Possible cause Faulty circuit-breaker/mains fuse

Faulty cable leading to luminaire Ballast power down

With 3-phase through-wiring in particular, overvoltages (400 V) may have occurred. N conductor has been confused with L conductor directly earthed conductor interrupted unbalanced load Luminaire worked but suddenly cannot be switched on again. No re-ignition after lamp replacement

Faulty lamp

Wrong lamp

Faulty lampholder contact

2. Additional tests for luminaires with dimmable electronic ballast:

Error occurring Dimmable luminaire already worked but suddenly cannot be switched on again. Possible cause Ballast power down in switchDIM installations

Ballast power down in LM and/or DALI bus installations

Problems with signal line and/or bus line (faulty bus)

The Lighting Handbook

273

Possible solution After checking, perhaps install new circuit-breaker/fuse.

Note

Checked 3

Measure voltage at luminaire terminal. Fix wiring at input end. Use mains fuse to briefly switch off luminaire power, then switch on again. Visually check electronic ballasts if there are any burn marks at mains input. Replace all units affected.

230 V 10 % Power reset

Use mains fuse to briefly switch off luminaire power, then switch on again. Check cause: replace lamp/s for working lamp/s from adjacent luminaire. Fit new lamp/s if cause has been confirmed. In multi-lamp luminaires, all lamps have to be replaced (make voltage reset). Check compatibility with ballast. Details on ballast label must conform with details printed on lamp. Check by rotating lamp several times to left and right (approx. 180).

Power reset

Possible solution Use mains fuse to briefly switch off power. Activate momentaryaction switch at switchDIM input (switching on/off). Intermit signal in bus line (B1, B2 or DALI) (disconnect line). Use mains fuse to briefly switch off power. Then reconnect bus line and try to switch luminaire via control gear installed (LM or DALI). Measure power at bus.

Note Power reset with switchDIM

Checked 3

Power reset with bus signal

Specified values: DALI: 9 to 15 V = LM: 13 to 15 V = DSI: no power measured

The Lighting Handbook

274

Checklist 4: Diagnosis in the event of malfunctions in luminaires

3. Additional test for HID luminaires (high-pressure lamps such as HIT, HST, etc.):
Error occurring After relamping, luminaire does not work any more. Possible cause No contact in lampholder thread

4. Analysis of partial function of luminaires with electronic ballast (poor lighting quality of uorescent lamp)

Error occurring Lamp start delayed Poor dimming quality

Possible cause No earth connection in luminaires with protection class 1 Poor earth connection

Poor luminous efficiency/dimming behaviour

Ambient temperature of lamp too low/too high

Cool spot neglected Increasing migration of dark spots along fluorescent lamp

The Lighting Handbook

275

Possible solution screw-fasten lamp as deeply as possible check contact between lamp solder point and cap tab remove oxidation from lamp solder point, if necessary

Note

Checked 3

Possible solution Connect luminaire earth. Use high-resistance voltmeter to measure power between phase and earth, and between neutral conductor and earth. Check for heat buildup underneath high ceilings or at workplaces with very high temperatures. Too low temperatures outside, or heavy air flow (e.g. air-conditioning system). Do not operate lamps in positions unprovided for. In order to achieve an appropriate lighting quality, new lamps should always be operated at 100 % for the first 100 hours of operation.

Note

Checked 3

Common temperature range: 15 C < T < 35 C

Cool Spot

The Lighting Handbook

276

Checklist 5: Offices
Potential for conicts with regard to Lighting of workplaces

Assessment criterion Point score Does the mean illuminance on the task level (h = 0.75 m, measuring grid 0.5 m) comply with specifications (for instance, a minimum of 500 lx are specified for office areas)? Is illuminance distributed uniformly (E min /E mean > 0.67)? The left screen symbolically shows reflections or mirror effects that are so severe that text can no longer be deciphered. The right screen symbolically stands for full readability of characters and symbols. What is the situation like in the workplace? At a level of 1.2 m, measure horizontal illuminance and vertical illuminance in all four directions. Use the formula below for calculation. Is the level between 0.3. and 0.7? S= Ev1 + Ev2 + Ev3 + Ev4 4 EH
1

Sum of points

no

yes

no

yes

no

yes

Do visible reflections occur on the screens which may irritate or distract users? Are the displays arranged in parallel to the window frontages? Can flickering caused by the lighting be perceived in the room? Place a pencil in upright position on the desktop. Which of the opposite pictograms resembles the shadow image most closely?

no

yes

no no
2

yes yes
2

The Lighting Handbook

277

Assessment criterion Point score Are there any irritating shadows in the room (cast e.g. by furniture, people, plants)? Does the room create a pleasant impression in terms of lighting effect? Can the lighting be individually adjusted to the room? Can the lighting be intuitively controlled by all the users (employees, cleaning staff, security guards)? Place a high-gloss pad on the desktop. Do high-gloss phenomena occur on this pad? If so, do they bother you when reading? What are the contrasts on room peripheries like?
1

Sum of points
3

no no no no

yes yes yes yes

no

yes

1 3 2

2 1 2

3 3

Does the lighting generate noticeable heat? Have blinds been installed at the windows? Do the windows allow for visual contact towards the outside?

1 3 3

no no no

2 2 2

yes yes yes

3 1 1

Total score

How to read the score 1317 1823 2439 I f the first 4 questions are marked with a black dot, basic specifications in the standard are not being complied with. A ccording to the criteria checked, it may be assumed that the lighting solution in the room complies with the state of the art. T he lighting system includes several critical aspects. It must be checked which of the lighting installations criteria can be adjusted at reasonable effort and expense. T he lighting system has deficiencies that must be remedied by all means. It is highly probable that working in this room permanently will affect the users sense of wellbeing and health.

The Lighting Handbook

Chapter 10

Design tools

Design process and tools 281 Programs ELI-LENI Calculator VIVALDI LM Energy ecoCALC 282 282 283 284 285

Online product information 286 Online catalogue 286 Mobile online catalogue 287 QR code 288 Product data sheets and installation instructions 289 2D CAD data 290 3D/REVIT CAD data 290 Environmental product declaration (EPD) 291 Online design tools 292 QuickCalc 292 QuickCalc mobile 293 Map Of Light 294

Zumtobel Lighting DVD 295

The Lighting Handbook

Design process and tools

Design process Communication Requirement Planning Blueprint planning: work out a concept Implementation Implementation, testing, maintenance Detailed planning: calculation, optimise Documentation Define requirements, determine basic situation Attention to products and concepts

281

Design tools Communication Product catalogue, brochures, Map of Light, ads and press work, trade fairs, conferences, events, roadshows, LightForums Requirement Planning Implementation DIALux, Relux, ecoCALC, ELI-LENI Calculator, VIVALDI visualisation, VIVALDI optimisation Online catalogue, QuickCalc, system configurators, LM Energy ELI-LENI Calculator, VIVALDI Reference Library, research projects, studies

The Lighting Handbook

282

Programs
ELI-LENI Calculator The ELI-LENI Calculator is our tool for evaluating a lighting solutions energy efficiency and lighting quality.

For more information and downloads, please refer to: zumtobel.com/com-en/ service.html#programms

Easy calculation of energy efficiency in compliance with EN 15193 and graphic illustra t ion of LENI in a diagram Definition of a requirement profile for the lighting solution according to the following quality criteria: A : Visual performance B: Vista C: Visual comfort D: Vitality E: Empowerment Evaluation of lighting quality according to the quality criteria using checklists Clearly structured comparison and visualisation of the results in an ELI-LENI stamp Support of communication between those involved in the design process All solutions can be evaluated independently of the manufacturer

The Lighting Handbook

283

VIVALDI VIVALDI is our interactive tool for designing lighting scenes and designing dynamic lighting concepts.

For further information, simply refer to: zumtobel.com/com-en/ service.html#programms

VIVALDI uses photos, sketches or images from lighting calculation programs Individual light sources can be intuitively controlled in intensity and colour using sliders As regards images from calculation programs, details on illuminance and luminance levels as well as on energy consumption are given in real time Changes in lighting scenes are displayed in real time Dynamic sequences within the scenes are interactively controlled via timelines Daylight sequences can be taken into account so that daylight and artificial lighting can be dynamically adjusted over the course of the day

The Lighting Handbook

284

Programs

LM Energy The LM Energy program calculates the ener g y-saving potential to be expected for interior lighting controlled by daylight-based lighting management systems.

For more information, please refer to zumtobel.com/com-en/ service.html#programms

The Lighting Handbook

285

ecoCALC ecoCALC is Zumtobels tool for analysing the costs of a lighting solution throughout its service life.

For more information and downloads, please refer to: zumtobel.com/com-en/ service.html#programms

Maintenance cycles and the dimensions of the lighting solution are optimised so that lighting quality will be guaranteed at all times with maximum cost efficiency. Evaluation of static or dynamically controlled lighting solutions with individual timelines for all luminaires A variety of utilisation and control sce narios over the course of a year can be evaluated Database including defined dimming characteristics and details regarding lamp and ballast changes throughout their servic e life Variable electricity rates and rise in electricity rates can be defined Existing installations can be analysed and all luminaires independent of the manufacturer can be entered Easy to operate and control thanks to wizard mode

The Lighting Handbook

286

Online product information

Online catalogue Under the Download tab, the online catalogue provides a list of all product data available for a specific product. Available product information: Product data sheet incl. maintenance category Photometric data sheets incl. UGR tables Photometric data formats Eulumdat, IES Drag & drop data for DIALux and Relux Brochures Installation instructions CE certificates 3D BIM Revit file CAD data: 2D and 3D Environmental product declaration (EPD)

Quick access with URL/article reference: zumtobel.com/42176750

The Lighting Handbook

287

Mobile online catalogue Zumtobels online product catalogue has been optimised for access via mobile devices, enabling users to directly access information on the complete product range anywhere and at any time, by means of smart phones and tablets. To this end, all you need to do is go to http://mobile.zumtobel.com (or the page of the respective country, e.g. http://mobile. zumtobel.co.uk) via the mobile devices browser. As this is not an app, no software needs to be installed, and access is possible from various devices.

The system supports iPhones, iPads as well as Android-based mobile phones and tablets. Access is, however, also possible using Blackberry devices OS 6 and higher, as well as other current smart phones, such as the Nokia S60, for instance. In the mobile version, too, products can be accessed directly via a quicklink. To do so, all you need to do is enter http://mobile.zumtobel.com followed by the respective order number.

For article number 42918319, for example, this would be http://mobile.zumtobel.com/42918319

The Lighting Handbook

288

Online product information

QR code A so-called QR (Quick Response) code is printed on all cardboard packaging for Zumtobel luminaires of the standard range. This code is similar to a bar code and makes it easy to quickly access information on a specific product, even when you are not at the office. If you have installed free QR reading software on your smart phone, all you need to do is focus your mobile phones camera onto this black-and-white square; you

will then be automatically directed to the respecti v e product in Zumtobels online catalog ue. All information available on the product, such as installation instructions, data sheets and product details, can be conveniently retriev e d from the product catalogue. In order to make it really easy to navigate the catalogue using a mobile phone as well, the whole online catalogue has been optimised for mobile devices.

The Lighting Handbook

289

Product data sheets and installation instructions available online Complete product information in PDF Any product information required can be format, up to date and country-specific: select e d from the online catalogue and figures, charts, images summaris e d in the form of a data sheet. Compilation of the product information Additionally, all installation instructions for the respective product are available in select e d in the form of a data sheet PDF format. (ZIP file) Photometric data sheets Data sheets with connecting instructions for LUXMATE products Quick dispatch of any part of the catalogue by e-mail For more product information, please refer to: zumtobel.com/com-en/products

The Lighting Handbook

290

Online product information

2D CAD data Note: The complete library can be called up on the homepage under Services. Access via: zumtobel.com/com-en/ downloads.html#2D-CAD

3D/REVIT CAD data 3D CAD data for Zumtobels product ranges are available for downloading also in Autodesk REVIT format. The first product ranges can already be downloaded from the websites Service Center under menu item REVIT BIM DATA. Other product ranges will be added to the collection on an ongoing basis. 3D CAD data are also available in the online product catalogue. In addition to other CAD data in DWG format (2D/3D), the REVIT files for a product if already available for this product range can be found in the products downloading section. Note: The complete library can be called up on the homepage under Services. Access via: zumtobel.com/com-en/ downloads.html#revit

The Lighting Handbook

291

Environmental product declaration (EPD) The environmental product declaration (EPD) according to ISO 14025 describes the specific environmental impact of a product. The declaration is based on the product catego r y rules (PCR) for luminaires, lamps and components for luminaires set out accor d ing to EN 15804. The life cycle assess m ent (LCA) was prepared in compliance with ISO 14040. For more product information, please refer to: zumtobel.com/com-en/products

The product described serves as a declared unit. An EPD includes a product description, data on material composition, manufacture, transport, period of use, disposal and recycling as well as the results of the life cycle assessment. It is subjected to independent testing according to ISO 14025. EPDs of building products can be compared only if life cycle assessments have been calculat e d according to the same PCRs. This EPD refers to the IBU master EPD for the Zumtobel Group and can be called up at http://bau-umwelt.de/hp4234/ Luminaires-lamps.htm

The Lighting Handbook

292

Online design tools

QuickCalc QuickCalc provides a quick, approxima te determination of the number of luminaires required to achieve a defined illuminance level according to the light output ratio method or vice versa: to determine the illuminan c e level necessary for a defined number of luminaires.

In the Zumtobel online catalogue, QuickCalc is available for products with calculation data under the QuickCalc tab. You find QuickCalc at the respective product under: zumtobel.com/com-en/products

The Lighting Handbook

293

QuickCalc mobile The mobile version of QuickCalc makes this intuitive lighting calculation program available at any time, anywhere. This tried-and-tested program by Zumtobel has been optimised for mobile terminal devic e s, ensuring that users can now make rough calculations not only at the office, but also directly at the construction site.

Based on product data available in the mobi l e e-catalogue, QuickCalc mobile needs just a few steps to calculate how many luminaires are required to achieve the necessary illuminance level at a given room size. For any number of luminaires specified, the program will calculate the illuminance level that can be achieved.

The calculation program opens as soon as you click the QuickCalc icon in the online product catalogue.

Now enter the length, width and height of the room.

The number of luminaires required will now be calculated, and a PDF file can be created from the calculation.

The Lighting Handbook

294

Map Of Light
The Map Of Light shows you state-of-the-art lighting solutions and impressive pictures of more than 1000 projects implemented all over the world, providing you with in spiring ideas and new stimuli for forthcoming projects.

For the Map Of Light, please refer to: zumtobel.com/com-en/ lighting_solutions.asp

The Lighting Handbook

Zumtobel Lighting DVD

Zumtobel data plug-in for DIALux and Relux with all available product data (Product Explorer with QuickCalc and maintenance factor calculation), 3D BIM REVIT files, the latest program versions of DIALux and Relux, and other tools: LUXMATE Energy Light, ZX2 Configurator, SLOTLIGHT II Configurator, ELI/LENI Calculator and VIVALDI demo version.

295

The Lighting Handbook

United Kingdom Zumtobel Lighting Ltd. Chiltern Park Chiltern Hill, Chalfont St. Peter Buckinghamshire SL9 9FG T +44/(0)1753 482650 F +44/(0)1753 480350 [email protected] zumtobel.co.uk USA and Canada Zumtobel Lighting Inc. 17-09 Zink Place, Unit 7 Fair Lawn, NJ 07410 3300 Route 9W Highland, NY 12528 T +1/(0)845/6916262 F +1/(0)845/6916289 [email protected] zumtobel.us Australia and New Zealand Zumtobel Lighting Pty Ltd 333 Pacific Highway North Sydney, NSW 2060 T +61/(2)89135000 F +61/(2)89135001 [email protected] zumtobel.com.au China Zumtobel Lighting China Shanghai office Room 101, No 192 YIHONG Technology Park Tianlin Road, Xuhui District Shanghai City, 200233, P.R. China T + 86/(21) 6375 6262 F + 86/(21) 6375 6285 [email protected] zumtobel.cn Hong Kong Zumtobel Lighting Hong Kong Unit 4319-20, Level 43, Tower 1, Metroplaza, 223 Hing Fong Road, Kwai Fong, N.T. T +852/(0)25030466 F +852/(0)25030177 [email protected] India Zumtobel Lighting GmbH 1522, Devika Tower, 6, Nehru Place, 110019 New Delhi T +91/1146012782 [email protected]

Singapore Zumtobel Lighting Singapore 158 Kallang Way # 06-01/02 Singapore 349245 T +65 68445800 F +65 67457707 [email protected] United Arab Emirates Zumtobel Lighting GmbH (Branch) Dubai Airport Free Zone, Building 6W, B Block, 233 PO Box 54302 Dubai T +971/(0)4 2993530 F +971/(0)4 2993531 [email protected] Romania Zumtobel Lighting Romania SRL Tipografilor 1115, S-Park Office, Wing A1-A2 013714 Bucharest T +40 312253801 F +40 312253804 [email protected] zumtobel.com Hungary Zumtobel Lighting Kft Vci t 49 1134 Budapest T +36/(1) 3500828 F +36/(1) 3500829 [email protected] zumtobel.hu Croatia, Bosnia and Herzegovina Zumtobel Licht d.o.o. Radnika cesta 80 Zagrebtower 10000 Zagreb T +385/(1) 6404080 F +385/(1) 6404090 [email protected] [email protected] Serbia Zumtobel Licht d.o.o. Karadjordjeva 2-4 Beton Hala 11000 Belgrade T +381/(0)11 6557657 F +381/(0)11 6557658 [email protected] Czech Republic Zumtobel Lighting s.r.o. Jankovcova 2 Praha 7 17000 Praha T +420/(2) 66782200 F +420/(2) 66782201 [email protected] zumtobel.cz

Slovak Republic Zumtobel Lighting s.r.o Vlie Hrdlo 1, 82412 Bratislava [email protected] zumtobel.sk Poland Zumtobel Licht GmbH Sp.z.o.o. Platinium III ul. Wooska 9a 02-583 Warszawa T +48/(22) 8567431 F +48/(22) 8567432 [email protected] zumtobel.pl Slovenia Zumtobel Licht d.o.o. tukljeva cesta 46 1000 Ljubljana T +386/(1) 5609820 F +386/(1) 5609866 [email protected] zumtobel.si Russia Zumtobel Lighting GmbH Official Representative Office Skakovaya Str.17 Bld. No 1, Office 1104 125040 Moscow T +7/(495) 9453633 F +7/(495) 9451694 [email protected] zumtobel.ru Norway Zumtobel Belysning Hoffsveien 4 Postboks 1025 Hoff 0218 Oslo T +47 22 06 50 50 F +47 22 06 50 52 [email protected] zumtobel.no Sweden Zumtobel Belysning Birger Jarlsgatan 57 11356 Stockholm T +46 8 262650 F +46 8 265605 [email protected] zumtobel.se Denmark Zumtobel Belysning Store Kongensgade 118 1264 Kbenhavn T +45 35 437000 [email protected] zumtobel.dk

The Lighting Handbook

Headquarters Zumtobel Lighting GmbH Schweizer Strasse 30 Postfach 72 6851 Dornbirn, AUSTRIA T +43/(0)5572/390-0 F +43/(0)5572/22826 [email protected] Zumtobel Licht GmbH Grevenmarschstrasse 74-78 32657 Lemgo, GERMANY T +49/(0)5261 212-0 F +49/(0)5261 212-7777 [email protected] zumtobel.com

Order no. 04797525-EN 10/13 Zumtobel Lighting GmbH Technical data was correct at time of going to press. We reserve the right to make technical changes without notice. Please contact your local sales office for further information. For the sake of the environment: LuxoLight is chlorine-free paper from sustainably managed forests and certified sources.

ISBN 978-3-902940-22-3
pefc.org PEFC/06-38-214